JP7290364B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

In a game machine, for example, in Patent Document 1, an effect operation device is provided on the right side of a ball tray, and the effect operation device is provided with an effect operation lever that can move between a retracted position and an operable position. disclosed. Further, it is disclosed that an operation input related to a game effect is performed by tilting the effect control lever positioned at the operable position.

JP 2018-187116 A

By the way, for example, when the player performs an operation without paying attention to the operation means, such as by violently operating the operation means, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the gaming machine. or the operating means may be damaged. Also, if the player does not pay attention to the presence of the operation means, the player may unintentionally touch the operation means.
An object of the present invention is to call the player's attention to the operating means.

The present invention, which achieves the above objects, is implemented as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) includes a first operation means (for example, effect button 161B) that can be operated by the player, and a second operation means that can be operated by the player and is different from the first operation means. Operation means (for example, production lever 161L), attention calling means (for example, attention sticker 41) for calling the player's attention to the second operation means, and variable production accompanied by variable display of specific symbols can be executed. and a production control means (for example, production control unit 300), the production control means can execute an operation production to prompt the operation of the second operation means, and under a predetermined condition, the second operation means a predetermined image simulating at least part of the second operating means when executing the variable performance using the first operating means than the variable performance using the can be displayed according to a first mode and then displayed according to a second mode , and the predetermined image has a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode a specific background image can be displayed when the specific image is displayed; and the specific pattern can be superimposed on the specific background image; It has a warning character for calling attention to an operation performed by the second operating means, and when displaying the specific image in the first mode, the predetermined image can be displayed in the first mode and then displayed in the second mode. and when displaying the specific image in the second mode, the predetermined image can be displayed in the second mode .

It should be noted that the above-mentioned reference numerals in this column are given for illustrative purposes when describing the present invention, and the present invention is not restricted by these reference numerals.

According to the present invention, it is possible to call the player's attention to the operating means.

1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment; FIG. (a) is an enlarged view showing an example of a display device arranged at the lower left of the game board, and (b) is a partial plan view of the pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the control unit of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of an image/sound control unit and a lamp control unit according to the embodiment; It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure of the game control part of this Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows operation|movement of the basic process by a game control part. It is a flow chart showing the operation of the power-off processing by the game control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing of a game control part. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a starting opening switch process. 4 is a flow chart showing the contents of gate switch processing. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of special design processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a jackpot determination process. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of processing during suspension. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a customer waiting setting process. It is a flow chart showing the contents of normal design processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a special winning opening process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of an electric tulip process. It is a diagram showing a configuration example of the random number used in the present embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the jackpot random number, (b) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the jackpot pattern random number, (c ) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reach random number, and (d) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a winning random number. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a variation pattern and a table used in variation pattern selection processing. It is a block diagram for explaining a configuration example of the RAM of the game control unit, (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the storage area, (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit shown in (a) is. It is a block diagram for explaining a configuration example of the RAM of the effect control unit, (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a reserved storage area, (b) is a block showing the configuration of each storage unit shown in (a) It is a diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a prior determination process. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the structure of a command, where (a) is a diagram showing the data structure of the command, and (b) is a diagram showing the structure of the command as a bit string; 3 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a command storage area in RAM; FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing details of output processing by an output control unit; It is a flow chart which shows operation of a production control part, (a) is a figure showing main processing, and (b) is a figure showing interruption processing. 4 is a flowchart showing the contents of command reception processing; 27 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pre-determination effect selection process and the effect selection process of FIG. 26. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot effect selection process of FIG. 26; FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the content of the ending effect selection process of FIG. 26; FIG. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the contents of a customer waiting command reception process of FIG. 26; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the content of production|presentation button processing. It is explanatory drawing of the production|presentation operating device of this embodiment. It is a partial plan view of a frame member. (A) is a diagram showing the front side of the attention calling sticker, and (B) is a diagram showing the back side of the attention calling sticker. It is the figure which showed the structure of the part to which the caution-calling seal|sticker is stuck among frame members, and the part of the vicinity of it. It is the figure which showed the example which an operator affixes a caution-calling sticker to a frame member using a jig|tool. It is the figure which showed the positional relationship of the production|presentation lever and a handle|steering_wheel, and an alerting|calling sticker|sticker. It is a figure which shows the alerting means of a modification. It is the figure which showed the displacement amount of the production|presentation button, and the displacement amount of the production|presentation lever. It is the figure which showed the production|presentation lever of a modification. It is the figure which showed the fluctuation production|presentation pattern table for big hits in a low-probability time-saving non-gaming state. It is a diagram showing a small hit in the low probability time-saving non-gaming state and a variation effect pattern table for the loss. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is explanatory drawing of the period during which operation of the production|presentation lever is effective in example 3 of variation production, and the period during which operation of the production|presentation button is effective in example 4 of variation production|presentation. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the production|presentation by a player's operation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another example of adjustment of volume and amount of light; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a setting example of automatic operation; It is a figure showing a setting example of the effect in the modification. It is the figure which showed the modification of pseudo-continuous production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another modification of the pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another modification of the pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another modification of the pseudo-continuous effect; It is an overall view of the pachinko gaming machine of Embodiment 2. FIG. It is a side view of the pachinko game machine of Embodiment 2. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram of a game frame of the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a first starting port unit provided with a first starting port according to Embodiment 2; It is a diagram showing a pachinko game machine in a state in which the glass door frame is open. It is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine when the pachinko gaming machine is seen from the rear side. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a contact alerting sticker of Embodiment 2; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of an operation caution-calling sticker of Embodiment 2; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a spec seal of Embodiment 2; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of the indicator seal of Embodiment 2; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of an optical warning sticker, an anti-fraud alert sticker, and a panel number sticker of Embodiment 2; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a certificate stamp seal of Embodiment 2; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a frame warning sticker of Embodiment 2; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a disc alert seal of Embodiment 2; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a frame number sticker of Embodiment 2; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a handling caution seal of Embodiment 2; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a sub-ROM seal of Embodiment 2; 8A and 8B are explanatory diagrams of a main board management seal, a main board seal, and a main ROM seal of Embodiment 2; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a voltage seal of Embodiment 2; It is explanatory drawing of the modification 1 of the seal|sticker regarding alerting. It is explanatory drawing of the modification 2 of the seal|sticker regarding alerting. It is an overall view of the external information terminal section in the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram of variation effect example 6 in the pattern variation effect of decorative symbols performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit; FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram of variation effect example 6 in the pattern variation effect of decorative symbols performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit; FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram of variation effect example 6 in the pattern variation effect of decorative symbols performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit; FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram of variation effect example 6 in the pattern variation effect of decorative symbols performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit; 14 is a timing chart of special light emission effects and object change effects in example 6 of variation effects. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of variation effect example 7 in the pattern variation effect of decorative symbols performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of variation effect example 7 in the pattern variation effect of decorative symbols performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of variation effect example 7 in the pattern variation effect of decorative symbols performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of variation effect example 7 in the pattern variation effect of decorative symbols performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit; 19 is a timing chart of the special light emission effect and the object change effect in variation effect example 7. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of variation production example 8 in the pattern variation production of decorative symbols performed by the production control unit using the image display unit; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of variation production example 8 in the pattern variation production of decorative symbols performed by the production control unit using the image display unit; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of variation production example 8 in the pattern variation production of decorative symbols performed by the production control unit using the image display unit; FIG. 14 is a timing chart of a special light emission effect and an object change effect in variation effect example 8. FIG. It is explanatory drawing of the customer waiting production|presentation of this embodiment. This is a reception screen for setting regarding the contents of the player's effect in the pattern variation effect of the pachinko game machine.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
<Embodiment 1>
[Basic configuration of game machine]
FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine 100 according to this embodiment.
A pachinko gaming machine 100 as an example of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 is configured to pay out prize balls when a game ball hit by a player's instruction operation wins. This pachinko game machine 100 comprises a game board 110 on which game balls are launched, and a game frame 150 surrounding the game board 110.例文帳に追加The game board 110 is detachably attached to the game frame 150 .

The game board 110 has a game area 111 for playing a game with game balls, a rail member 112 forming a passage for the game balls shot from below to rise to an upper position of the game area 111, and a game board 110. A guide member 113 for guiding game balls is provided on the right side of the area 111 .
In the present embodiment, an image display section 114 for displaying various images for presentation is arranged at a position of the game area 111 that is easily visible to the player. The image display unit 114 has a display screen such as a liquid crystal display, and displays, for example, decorative symbols for informing the player of the symbol lottery result (symbol variation result) as the player progresses the game. An effect image due to the appearance of a character or an item, or an effect image using a hold display, which will be described later, is displayed.
In addition, a movable accessory 115 and a board lamp 116 used for various effects are provided on the front surface of the game board 110 . The movable accessory 115 performs various effects by operating on the game board 110, and the board lamp 116 performs various effects by emitting light.
Also, an upper accessory 5 used for various effects is provided in the upper part of the game frame 150 . The upper accessory 5 is provided so as to be movable upward.

The game area 111 is provided with game pegs, windmills and the like (not shown) for changing the direction in which the game ball falls. Also, in the game area 111, various accessories related to prize winning and lottery are arranged at predetermined positions. In addition, the game area 111 is provided with a discharge port 117 for discharging out of the game area 111 those game balls that have hit the game area 111 but have not entered the winning opening.

In this embodiment, as various accessories related to winning and lottery, when a game ball wins, a special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) starts 121 and 2nd start port 122, and when a game ball passes through, normal A starting gate (hereinafter simply referred to as a gate) 124 for starting a symbol lottery (opening/closing lottery) is arranged on the game board 110 . In FIG. 1, the gates 124 are provided on the left and right sides of the game area 111, respectively, the left gate 124 is described as 124L, and the right gate 124 is described as 124R. Further, the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 referred to herein refer to a prize winning port that triggers the operation of one predetermined special symbol display device. Specifically, the first start port 121 and the second start port 122 are provided with switches (first start port switch 211 and second start port switch 212, which will be described later) that detect the passage of game balls at the time of winning. It is When the game ball enters the first start port 121 or the second start port 122, the switch detects the passage of the game ball, which triggers the activation of the special symbol display.

The second starting port 122 is provided with an electric tulip (opening/closing member) 123 as a normal electric accessory, in which a pair of tulip-shaped blades are opened and closed by an electric solenoid and lighted. In the electric tulip 123, when the blades are closed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start port 122, but when the blades are opened, the entrance of the second start port 122 expands and the game ball enters the second start port 122. Designed for easy access. When the electric tulip 123 wins the normal pattern lottery, the wings open for a specified time (for example, 0.15 seconds to 1.8 seconds) and for a specified number of times (for example, 1 time to 3 times) while lighting or blinking.

A pachinko game machine 100 has, as game states, a low-probability state with a low winning probability and a high-probability state with a higher winning probability than the low-probability state, based on the winning probability of a jackpot lottery. Then, the state is controlled to either the low probability state or the high probability state based on a predetermined condition.
In addition, the pachinko game machine 100 has, as a game state, an electric sapo state in which there are few winning opportunities to the second start port 122 and an electric sapo state in which there are more chances to win in the second start port 122 than in the no electric sapo state. have. Then, for example, under a predetermined condition such as triggered by the number of lotteries of a big hit or a special symbol lottery, it is controlled to either the state of no power supply or the power supply state. The electric sapo state is, for example, shortening the normal symbol fluctuation time, extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123, or increasing the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery. It is a game state controlled by combination.
In addition, the pachinko game machine 100 has, as game states, a time-saving no state with a long special symbol variation time and a time-saving state with a shorter special symbol variation time than the no time-saving state.
In addition, in this Embodiment, an electric support state and a time saving state shall be controlled simultaneously. Further, in the following description, the electric sapo state and time saving state are simply referred to as the time saving state, and the electric sapo no state and no time saving state are simply referred to as no time saving state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as other accessories related to winning and lottery, there is a large winning opening 125 as a special electric accessory that is opened according to the result of the special symbol lottery, and a lottery is performed even if the game ball wins. A normal winning opening 126 is provided on the game board 110.例文帳に追加A large winning opening door 125D for opening and closing the large winning opening 125 is provided in the large winning opening 125. - 特許庁In the following description, the opening/closing state and opening/closing operation of the big winning opening door 125D may be referred to as the opening/closing state and opening/closing operation of the big winning opening 125 for convenience.
In this embodiment, a display 130 for displaying the lottery results and the number of pending games is arranged at the lower left position of the game board 110 .

In addition, on the back side of the game board 110, there are a game control board for determining the winning of special symbols, etc., an effect control board for comprehensively controlling effects, an image control board for controlling effects by images and sounds, various lamps and Various substrates (not shown) such as a lamp control substrate for controlling the performance by the movable accessory 115 are attached. A switching power supply (not shown) that converts the supplied 24V AC power into DC power and outputs the DC power to various substrates is arranged on the rear surface of the game board 110 .

In the game frame 150, when the player touches the handle 151 and rotates the lever 152 clockwise, game balls are fired at predetermined time intervals (for example, 100 balls per minute) with a hitting force corresponding to the operation angle. Equipped with a launcher (not shown) that fires electrically. In addition, the game frame 150 includes a supply device (not shown) that sequentially supplies game balls to the shooting device one by one at a timing that is interlocked with the operation of the lever 152 by the player, and the game balls that the supply device supplies to the shooting device. An upper tray 153 for temporary storage and a lower tray (not shown) provided below the upper tray 153 for retaining game balls falling from the upper tray 153 are provided. A payout ball is put out to the upper tray 153 by a payout unit, for example.

In addition, the game frame 150 includes a stop button 154 for temporarily stopping the shooting of game balls even when the player is touching the handle 151 of the shooting device, and a game ball accumulated in the lower tray. and an eject button 155 for dropping it into a box (not shown) and ejecting it.
In addition, the game frame 150 includes a speaker 156 and a frame lamp 157 for announcing the game state and situation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and performing various effects. The speaker 156 performs various productions using music, voice, and sound effects. The frame lamp 157 is composed of a luminous body such as an LED, and performs various effects with light, such as a pattern of lighting and blinking, a difference in emission color, and the like. As for the frame lamp 157, a configuration example is conceivable in which it is possible to perform an effect of changing the irradiation direction of light.
The game frame 150 also has a transparent plate (not shown) for separating the game board 110 from the player.

FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 2(a) is an enlarged view showing an example of the display 130 arranged at the lower left of the game board 110. FIG. 2(b) is a partial plan view of the pachinko gaming machine 100. FIG.
The display device 130 of the pachinko game machine 100, as shown in FIG. A second special symbol display 222 that operates correspondingly and a normal symbol display 223 that operates corresponding to the passage of the gate 124 are provided. The first special symbol display device 221 variably displays the special symbols based on the winning of the first starting port 121, and then stops the display to display the lottery result. The second special symbol display device 222 variably displays the special symbols based on the winning of the second starting port 122, and then stops the display to display the lottery result. The normal symbol display device 223 variably displays the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 124, and then stops the display to display the lottery result. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222 are each composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is displayed depending on the lighting mode. Similarly, the normal symbol display device 223 is also composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed according to the lighting mode thereof.

In addition, the display device 130 includes a first special symbol reservation display device 218 that operates in response to the suspension on the first special symbol display device 221, and a second special symbol display device 218 that operates in response to the suspension on the second special symbol display device 222. A 2 special design reservation display 219 and a normal design reservation display 220 which operates corresponding to the reservation by the normal design display 223 are provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol reservation display device 218, the second special symbol reservation display device 219 and the normal symbol reservation display device 220 are each composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the number of reservations is determined by the lighting mode. Is displayed.

Here, the hold will be explained. When the game ball enters the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 during the variable display operation of the special symbols (while the variable display for one prize is being performed), the special symbols are changing. Secondly, it is not possible to start the variable display operation of the special symbols based on the subsequent prize winning. Therefore, subsequent winnings are stored up to a specified number (for example, 4), and the right to start the special symbols for the winning game ball is not retained until the variable display operation for the first winning game ball is completed. Reserved.
It should be noted that the same processing as that for the special symbols is performed for the normal symbols. The fact that such a reservation is made and the number of reservations (unchanged number) are displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 218, the second special design reservation display 219 and the normal design reservation display 220.

Furthermore, the indicator 130 has a status indicator 224 that displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 100 . In this embodiment, the status indicator 224 is composed of a display device in which three LEDs are arranged. One of the three LEDs lights to notify whether the state of the pachinko game machine 100 is a high probability state in which the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is high. In addition, the other one is for notifying by lighting whether or not the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is a time-saving state with a short special symbol variation time. Still another one is to notify by lighting whether or not the player is in an advantageous state by hitting to the right (by changing the hitting force of the game ball).

In addition, the indicator 130 has a round number indicator 225 for displaying the number of rounds when the big winning opening 125 is activated in the big win game performed according to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. Incidentally, the jackpot game will be described later. The round number indicator 225 is composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the number of operation rounds of the big winning opening 125 in the jackpot game is displayed according to the lighting mode thereof.

The game slot 150 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is provided with an input device for the player to make an input to the performance. As shown in FIG. 2B, in the present embodiment, as an example of an input device, a production key 161B, a production key 162 adjacent to the production button 161B and composed of a plurality of keys arranged in a substantially cross shape, are arranged in the game frame 150 . In the illustrated example, consider a case where an effect for accepting an operation of selecting one image from among a plurality of images is performed. In this case, for example, by operating the effect key 162 consisting of four keys arranged in a cross, the player designates one of the plurality of images displayed on the image display section 114, and presses the effect button 161B. By operating it, it is possible to perform an effect such as selecting the instructed image. As for the form of the input device, in addition to the production button 161B and production key 162 shown in the drawings, various input forms such as levers and handles can be adopted according to the contents of production.

[Configuration of control unit]
Next, a control unit that performs operation control and signal processing in the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the control unit of the pachinko game machine of this embodiment.
FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of an image/sound control section and a lamp control section according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control unit includes, as main control means, a game control section 200 for determining whether a special symbol is won or the like. In addition, as a sub-control means, it is provided with an effect control unit 300 that controls the effect in general, and a payout control unit 330 that performs payout control of the payout balls.

[Structure and function of the game control unit]
The game control unit 200 includes a CPU 201 that performs arithmetic processing when determining winning of special symbols, etc., a ROM 202 that stores programs executed by the CPU 201, various data, etc., and a working memory for the CPU 201. and a RAM 203 .

The game control unit 200 controls the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 in either a high probability state or a low probability state, or in either a no time saving state or a time saving state. As a result, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is a high probability state and time saving state high probability time saving game state, a low probability state and time saving state low probability time saving game state, a high probability state and no time saving state high It becomes one of the low probability time saving non-gaming state, the low probability state and the low probability time saving non-gaming state which is the non-working time saving state. And the game control part 200 switches a high probability state and a low probability state based on a predetermined|prescribed condition, and switches a time saving no state and a time saving state. In addition, the game control unit 200, in the time saving state, controls such as making the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery higher than in the time saving state, shortening the normal symbol fluctuation time, extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123, etc. I do.

The game control unit 200 performs a special symbol lottery when a game ball has entered the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 . Then, a special game such as a jackpot game is performed according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery. In the special game, the game control unit 200 performs a predetermined number of rounds to maintain an open state until the large winning opening 125, which is a special electric accessory, satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, the passage of 29.5 seconds or the winning of 10 game balls). control to repeat only Then, the game control section 200 controls the opening/closing operation interval when the big winning opening 125 is opened.

In addition, the game control unit 200 performs a normal symbol lottery triggered by the passage of the game ball through the gate 124 . Then, the operation of the electric tulip is controlled according to the determination result of the normal symbol lottery.
In addition, the game control unit 200, the game ball has entered the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 during the special symbol variation, and the game ball has passed through the gate 124 during normal symbol variation. Set the hold that occurs due to
In addition, the game control unit 200, the determination result of the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery, the change information of the high probability state and the low probability state, the change information of the time saving no state and the time saving state, the setting information of the reservation, etc. accompanying the game control Information is sent to the effect control unit 300 by a command to be described later.

Furthermore, the game control unit 200, when the game ball wins the first start hole 121, the second start hole 122, the big win hole 125 and the normal win hole 126, one game ball hits according to the place where the game ball wins. The payout controller 330 is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls. For example, when a game ball enters the first start hole 121, three prize balls are awarded, when a game ball enters the second start hole 122, four prize balls are awarded, and when a game ball enters the big prize opening 125, thirteen prizes are awarded. When a game ball wins a prize in a ball or a normal prize winning opening 126, an instruction command (command) is sent to a payout control section 330 so as to pay out 10 prize balls respectively. Even if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the gate 124, the payout control unit 330 is not instructed to pay out the prize balls associated therewith.
When the payout control unit 330 pays out the prize balls according to the instruction of the game control unit 200, the game control unit 200 acquires information on the number of paid out prize balls from the payout control unit 330. Thereby, the number of awarded balls is managed.

The game control unit 200 includes, as detection means, a first start opening detection unit (first start opening switch (SW)) 211 for detecting the winning of a game ball to the first start opening 121, as shown in FIG. , the second start opening detection unit (second start opening switch (SW)) 212 that detects the winning of the game ball to the second start opening 122, the electric tulip opening and closing unit 213 that opens and closes the electric tulip 123, and the gate 124 A gate detection unit (gate switch (SW)) 214 for detecting passage of a game ball is connected.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 includes a large winning opening detection unit (large winning opening switch (SW)) 215 for detecting the winning of a game ball into the large winning opening 125, and a large winning opening door 125D of the large winning opening 125. A large winning opening door opening/closing unit 216 that is set to a closed state and a projecting inclined open state, and a normal winning opening detection unit (normal winning opening switch (SW)) 217 that detects the winning of a game ball into the normal winning opening 126. , are connected.

In addition, the game control unit 200 includes a first special symbol holding display 218 that displays the unvaried reserved number of winnings in the first start port 121 during the variation of the special symbols, and a second special symbol during the variation of the special symbols. A second special symbol reservation display 219 for displaying the unvaried reserved number of winning prizes in the starting port 122, and a normal symbol reservation display for displaying the unvaried reserved number passed through the gate 124 during normal symbol fluctuation. 220 and are connected.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 includes a first special symbol display 221 for displaying the fluctuation display of the special symbols and the result of the special symbol lottery performed by winning the game ball to the first starting port 121, and a second starting port. A second special symbol display 222 for displaying the variable display of special symbols and the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the winning of the game ball to 122, and the normal symbol display for displaying the variable display of the normal symbols and the result of the normal symbol lottery. A device 223 and a state display device 224 for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 are connected.

Detection signals detected by the first start switch 211 , the second start switch 212 , the gate switch 214 , the big win switch 215 and the normal win switch 217 are sent to the game controller 200 . In addition, the control signal from the game control unit 200 is the electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, the large winning opening door opening/closing unit 216, the first special symbol reservation display device 218, the second special symbol reservation display device 219, and the normal design reservation display device 220. , the first special symbol indicator 221, the second special symbol indicator 222, the normal symbol indicator 223 and the state indicator 224. Thereby, the game control unit 200 performs various controls related to the above-described number of awarded balls to be paid out.

Further, the game control unit 200 is connected with a board external information terminal board 350 for transmitting various information to a host computer (not shown) installed in the hall. Then, the game control unit 200 transmits information about the number of paid out prize balls and information indicating the state of the game control unit 200 acquired from the payout control unit 330 to the host computer via the board external information terminal board 350. do.

[Configuration and function of payout control unit]
The payout control unit 330 includes a CPU 331 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the payout of balls to be put out, a ROM 332 that stores programs executed by the CPU 331 and various data, and a RAM 333 that is used as a working memory for the CPU 331. and have.
Then, the payout control section 330 controls the payout of the payout balls based on the command sent from the game control section 200 .
Specifically, the payout control unit 330 acquires a command to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls from the game control unit 200 according to the location (first start port 121, etc.) where the game ball has won. Then, the payout drive unit 334 is controlled so as to pay out the number of prize balls specified by the command. The payout drive unit 334 here is configured by a drive motor for sending out game balls from a game ball storage unit.

The payout control unit 330 also includes a payout ball detection unit 335 for detecting the number of prize balls actually paid out from the game ball storage unit by the payout drive unit 334, and a game ball storage unit (not shown). A ball presence detection unit 336 for detecting whether or not the balls are stored, and a tray 153 for holding game balls used when a player plays a game and paid-out prize balls are in a full tank state. The full-tank detector 337 is connected. The payout control unit 330 receives the detection signals detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, the ball presence detection unit 336, and the full tank detection unit 337, and performs predetermined processing according to these detection signals.
Further, the payout control unit 330 is connected with a frame external information terminal board 340 for transmitting various kinds of information to a host computer installed in the hall. The payout control unit 330 provides, for example, information on the number of prize balls instructed to be paid out to the payout drive unit 334, information on the number of prize balls actually paid out detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, and the like. is transmitted to the host computer via the frame external information terminal board 340 . In addition, similar information is transmitted to the game control unit 200 as well.

[Configuration and functions of production control unit]
The effect control unit 300 includes a CPU 301 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the effect, a ROM 302 that stores programs executed by the CPU 301 and various data, a RAM 303 that is used as a working memory for the CPU 301, and a date and time and a real-time clock (RTC) 304 that measures the
The performance control unit 300 sets the content of the performance based on the result of determination as to whether or not the winning in the special symbol lottery sent from the game control unit 200 and the variation pattern, for example. At that time, an operation input from the user using the effect button 161B or the effect key 162 may be received, and the contents of effect corresponding to the operation input may be set. In this case, for example, a signal (operation signal) corresponding to the operation is received from a controller (not shown) such as the production button 161B, and the operation content identified by this operation signal is reflected in the setting of production.
In addition, when the game is interrupted for a predetermined period, the effect control unit 300 instructs setting of a screen display for customer waiting as one of the effects.
Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 sets the content of effect based on the change information of the high probability state and the low probability state and the change information of the no time saving state and the time saving state received from the game control unit 200 .
In addition, the effect control unit 300 sends a command for instructing execution of the set effect content to the image/sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 .

Further, the production control unit 300 is connected to an image/sound control unit 310 that controls production using images and sounds, and a lamp control unit 320 that controls production using various lamps and movable accessories 115. It is

[Structure and function of image/sound control unit]
As shown in FIG. 4, the image/sound control unit 310 stores a CPU 311 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the image and sound representing the content of the effect, and a program that is executed by the CPU 311, various data, and the like. A ROM 312 , a RAM 313 used as a work memory for the CPU 311 , a VDP (Video Display Processor) 314 , a CGROM 315 , and an SNDROM 316 are provided.

The image/sound control unit 310 controls the image displayed on the image display unit 114 and the sound output from the speaker 156 based on the command sent from the effect control unit 300 .
Specifically, the CGROM 315 stores pattern images and background images to be displayed during the game on the image display unit 114, decorative patterns for notifying the player of the lottery result, characters and characters for displaying the advance notice effect to the player. Image data such as items are stored. The SNDROM 316 also stores various audio data such as music, voice, and effect sounds such as jingles to be output from the speaker 156 in synchronization with the image data or independently of the image data.
CPU311, based on the pending number command or the variable effect start command sent from the effect control unit 300, analyzes the animation pattern, creates a display list that summarizes commands related to drawing, and transmits the display list to the VDP314. conduct.

Based on the display list received from the CPU 311, the VDP 314 reads image data and sound data stored in the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316, respectively. Furthermore, the VDP 314 uses the read image data to perform background image display, pattern image display, pattern image variation, drawing processing for character/item display, etc., and audio processing using the read sound data. . Then, the VDP 314 controls screen display on the image display unit 114 based on the rendered image data. Also, the VDP 314 controls the sound output from the speaker 156 based on the sound-processed sound data.
In the present embodiment, the VDP 314 is configured to perform audio processing in addition to drawing processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a processor dedicated to audio processing may be provided separately.

[Structure and function of lamp controller]
The lamp control unit 320 stores a CPU 321 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the light emission of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 and the operation of the movable accessory 115, and the programs and various data that are executed by the CPU 321. A ROM 322 and a RAM 323 used as a work memory for the CPU 321 are provided.
Then, the lamp control section 320 controls the lighting/blinking of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, the emission color, etc. based on the command sent from the effect control section 300 . Also, it controls the operation of the movable accessory 115 .

Specifically, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 stores lighting/blinking pattern data and emission color pattern data (emission pattern data) are stored. The CPU 321 selects and reads out the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM 322 corresponding to the command sent from the effect control section 300 . Then, the lamp control unit 320 controls the light emission of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 based on the read light emission pattern data.
Further, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 stores operation pattern data of the movable accessory 115 corresponding to the content of the effect set by the effect control unit 300 . The CPU 321 controls the motion of the movable accessory 115 based on the read motion pattern data.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the game control unit 200, the effect control unit 300, the image/sound control unit 310, the lamp control unit 320, and the payout control unit 330 are each provided on the rear surface of the game board 110. A game control board as a sub-board, an effect control board as a sub-board, an image control board, a lamp control board, and a payout control board are individually configured.
Further, in the configuration example described with reference to FIG. 4, the effect button 161B and the effect key 162 are connected to the effect control unit 300 and controlled by the effect control unit 300, but are not limited to this. The effect button 161B and the effect key 162 may be connected to the lamp control section 320 and controlled by the lamp control section 320. FIG.

[Functional configuration of game control unit]
Next, the functional configuration of the game control section 200 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the game control section 200. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the game control unit 200 includes a random number acquisition unit 231, a normal symbol determination unit 232, a special symbol variation control unit 233, and a special symbol determination unit 234 as functional units that execute various lottery processes. , and a normal symbol variation control unit 236.
In addition, the game control section 200 includes a variation pattern selection section 235 as a functional section that executes processing associated with special symbol variation.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 includes a large winning opening operation control unit 237, an electric tulip operation control unit 238, and a prize ball processing unit 239 as functional units that perform operation control of various accessories and data processing related to prize balls. , an output control unit 240 , and a random number control unit 241 .

The random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value used for the special symbol lottery and a random number value used for the normal symbol lottery. In the case of the random number used for the special symbol lottery, specifically, on the condition that the game ball has won the first start port 121 or the second start port 122, for each type of random number, a numerical value within a predetermined range One numerical value (random value) is selected (acquired) from among them. The acquired random number value is used for determination by the special symbol determination unit 234 . Although details will be described later, the random numbers used in the special symbol lottery include a jackpot random number indicating whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot, a pattern random number indicating the type of jackpot, a variation pattern random number, a reach random number, and the like.
In addition, in the case of the random number used in the normal symbol lottery, specifically, one number (random number) is selected (obtained) from a predetermined range of numbers on the condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 124. ) is done. The acquired random number value is used for determination by the normal symbol determination unit 232 . In addition, as the random numbers used in the normal symbol lottery, in addition to the winning random number indicating whether or not the winning, the symbol random number indicating the type of winning, the variation pattern random number, etc. may be set.
The special symbol variation control section 233 controls the variation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 221 or the second special symbol display device 222 according to the lottery result when the special symbol lottery is performed.

The special symbol determination unit 234 uses a random number table as shown in FIG. type”, and “whether it is a small win or not when the big win is not won”. That is, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value related to the special symbol when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first starter switch 211 or the second starter switch 212, which is the detection means, and determines the special symbol. The unit 234 determines whether or not to play a special game (such as a jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the obtained random number value. It should be noted that the special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) described above refers to processing in the random number acquisition unit 231 and the special symbol determination unit 234 .

Here, the "jackpot" is classified into a plurality of types according to the game state that occurs after the jackpot game ends. Specifically, the type of jackpot is determined by a combination of no time-saving state or time-saving state, and a high-probability state or a low-probability state. That is, as the type of jackpot based on the gaming state that occurs after the end of the jackpot game, after the end of the jackpot game, a jackpot that becomes a high probability time saving game state (hereinafter referred to as a high probability time saving game state jackpot), a low probability time saving game state A jackpot (hereinafter referred to as a low-probability time-saving game state jackpot), a high-probability time-saving no-game state jackpot (hereinafter, a high-probability time-saving no-game state jackpot), a low probability time-saving no-game state jackpot (hereinafter, low There can be a jackpot in a probability time-saving non-playing state). These jackpots are associated with individual special symbols, respectively, and the type of jackpot is determined according to the type of special symbols won in the special symbol lottery.

Also, the "jackpot" may be divided into a big win in which the jackpot game time is long and a large amount of game balls can be expected to be paid out, and a jackpot game in which the jackpot game time is short and almost no game balls can be expected to be paid out. The former is called "long hit" and the latter is called "short hit". For example, in the "long win", a round is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) until the open state of the big prize opening 125 satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds have elapsed or 10 game balls have won a prize). be In addition, in the "short hit", a round in which the big winning opening 125 is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 0.9 seconds) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice).

In addition, the "small win" when the big win is not won is a small win game in which the big winning port 125 is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 0.9 seconds) for a predetermined number of times (for example, twice). done. When the small prize is won, the game state before winning the small prize is continued even after the small prize is finished. That is, when the game state at the time of winning the small hit is the high probability time saving game state, the high probability time saving game state is continued even after the small win game ends, and the game state does not shift. Similarly, when the game state at the time of winning the small win is the low-probability time-saving no-game state, the low-probability time-saving no-game state is continued even after the small-win game ends, and the game state does not shift.
In addition, "minor win" is a kind of "lose", and none of the above game states that are advantageous to the player are set.

The variation pattern selection section 235 selects a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222 . Specifically, the variation pattern selection unit 235 is a variation pattern (for example, 13.5 seconds or more ), the variation pattern is determined based on the determination result of whether or not. Then, based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection unit 235, the special symbol variation control unit 233 controls the variation of the special symbols. Details of the operation of the variation pattern selection section 235 and the special symbol variation control section 233 will be described later.
Here, "ready-to-win" is an effect for making the player expect a big win in decorative symbols, which will be described later.

The normal symbol determination unit 232 determines whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol is "whether or not" using a random number table as shown in FIG. That is, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines, based on the random number value for the normal symbol lottery acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231, whether or not the auxiliary game of opening and closing the electric tulip 123 is to be performed. Also, when a plurality of types of hits are set in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the "win type" when the determination result is a hit. The normal symbol lottery is a process performed by the random number acquisition unit 231 and the normal symbol determination unit 232 .
The normal symbol variation control section 236 controls the normal symbol variation by the normal symbol display device 223 according to the lottery result when the normal symbol lottery is performed.
The electric tulip operation control unit 238 opens the electric tulip 123 for a specified time and a specified number of times when the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines that the normal symbol lottery is “hit”, and the game ball enters the second start port 122. A state in which it is easy to win a prize is generated. Further, when it is judged as "off", such an open state of the electric tulip 123 is not generated. The operation pattern of the electric tulip 123 will be described later, but there are, for example, an operation pattern that opens once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds and an operation pattern that opens three times with an opening time of 1.80 seconds.

When the special symbol determination unit 234 determines "big win" in the special symbol lottery, the big winning opening operation control unit 237 performs a big winning opening with an operation pattern specified based on the type of the big winning as a big winning game. 125 opening operation. In addition, when the special symbol determination unit 234 determines "small hit" in the special symbol lottery, the big winning opening operation control unit 237 opens the big winning opening 125 for a specified time and specified number of times as a small winning game. .
The prize ball processing unit 239 sets commands for managing the number of prizes awarded to various accessories related to prizes and lotteries, and for controlling the payout of prize balls according to the prizes.
The output control section 240 controls the output of control commands from the game control section 200 to the effect control section 300 and the payout control section 330 .
The random number control unit 241 updates various random values acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 at predetermined timings.

[Basic operation of game machine]
Next, the basic operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
When the power is turned on, the game control unit 200 of the pachinko game machine 100 performs initialization and initial setting of various devices as basic processing at startup. After performing the basic processing, the game control section 200 repeatedly executes the main control processing, which is a series of processing relating to the progress of the game. Also, when shutting off the power, the game control unit 200 executes a series of power shut-off processes.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the operation of basic processing by the game control unit 200. As shown in FIG.
When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the game control unit 200 first permits access to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 3) (step (hereinafter referred to as "S") 601). Then, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch for clearing the RAM 203 is ON (S602).
When the RAM clear switch is OFF (No in S602), next, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the backup flag regarding the operation at the time of power shutdown is ON (S603).
When the backup flag is ON (Yes in S603), next, the game control unit 200 determines whether the checksum created at the time of power shutdown is normal (S604).
If the checksum is normal (Yes in S604), then the game control unit 200 executes return processing (S605). In this return process, the game control unit 200 sets the sub-control means such as the effect control unit 300 when returning from the power-off state. Specifically, the game control unit 200 controls the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 when the power is shut off (whether the jackpot game is in progress, either the high probability state or the low probability state, the time saving state and the time saving no state). (either) is output to the effect control unit 300 to set the sub-control means so as to reflect. Also, in this return process, the game control unit 200 turns off the backup flag.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is ON (Yes at S602), the backup flag is OFF (No at S603), or the checksum is abnormal (No at S604), then the game control unit 200 is initialized. As processing, the stored contents of the RAM 203 are cleared (S606), and the work area of the RAM 203 is set (S607). Then, the game control unit 200 outputs a command for setting (initializing) the sub-control means to the effect control unit 300, and sets the sub-board (sub-control means) (S608). Setting the sub-board includes clearing the RAM 303, RAM 313, and RAM 323 mounted on each sub-board.

After the return process (see S605) ends, or after the setting of the sub board (see S608) ends, the game control unit 200 sets various counters and timers used for game control (S609). Then, the game control unit 200 allows interrupts (S610), disables interrupts (S611), designs random number control processing (S612), initial value random number update processing (S613), and determines whether or not the power shutdown flag is ON. (S614) is repeatedly executed as a loop process.
Here, interrupt permission (S610) and interrupt prohibition (S611) are provided to enable execution of interrupt processing during execution of this loop processing (S610 to S614). In this embodiment, the main control process in the game control is executed by this interrupt process. Details of the main control process will be described later.
In the symbol random number control process (S612), the game control unit 200 updates the variation pattern random number used in the special symbol lottery.
In the initial value random number update process (S613), the game control unit 200 updates the initial values of various random numbers used in game control.
In the determination of the power cutoff flag, if the power cutoff flag is OFF (No in S614), the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is not cut off, the game control unit 200, loop processing (S610 ~ S614) and the main control by interrupt Execute the process repeatedly. On the other hand, if the power cutoff flag is ON (Yes in S614), the game control unit 200 starts processing for cutting off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (power cutoff processing).

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing the operation of the power-off processing by the game control unit 200. As shown in FIG.
In the power-off processing, the game control unit 200 first clears the setting of the output port for performing various outputs (S701). Next, the game control unit 200 creates a checksum and stores it in the RAM 203 (S702). Next, the game control unit 200 turns ON the backup flag (S703), prohibits access to the RAM 203 (S704), and shifts to an infinite loop.

[Main control processing of game machine]
Next, the main control processing of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
In the main control process, the game control unit 200 controls the game in the pachinko game machine 100, instructs the production control unit 300, which is a sub-control means, to control the production, and issues a prize ball to the payout control unit 330. to control the payout of

FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing the main control process of the game control section 200. As shown in FIG.
The main control process consists of a series of processes in game control, and is repeatedly executed at predetermined intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). In this embodiment, the game control unit 200 generates an interrupt at predetermined intervals, and when the interrupt is permitted (see S610) in the loop processing shown in FIG. 6, the main control as the interrupt processing Execute the process. As shown in FIG. 8, in the main control process, a random number update process, a switch process, a symbol process, an electric accessory process, a winning ball process, and an output process are sequentially executed (S801 to S806).

In the random number update process (S801), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number control unit 241, and updates the values of various random numbers used in game control by the game control unit 200. The details of setting the random number and updating the random value will be described later.

As the switch process (S802), a starting port switch process and a gate switch process are performed.
In the starter switch process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231, monitors the states of the first starter switch 211 and the second starter switch 212 in FIG. When it becomes, the processing for the special symbol lottery is executed. In addition, although it will be described in detail later, when the preliminary determination processing is performed in the first start opening switch 211 and the second start opening switch 212, each function (subroutine) of the special symbol determination unit 234 and the variation pattern selection unit 235 is called. Execute processing for prior determination.
In the gate switch process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231, monitors the state of the gate switch 214 in FIG. Execute the process.
Details of these switch processes will be described later.

As the symbol processing (S803), special symbol processing and normal symbol processing are performed.
In the special symbol processing, the game control unit 200 calls each function (subroutine) of the special symbol variation control unit 233, the special symbol determination unit 234, and the variation pattern selection unit 235, and executes the special symbol variation and the processing accompanying this symbol variation. do.
In the normal design process, the game control section 200 calls the functions (subroutines) of the normal design determination section 232 and the normal design fluctuation control section 236, and executes the normal design fluctuation and the process associated with this design fluctuation.
Detailed contents of these symbol processing will be described later.

As the electric accessory processing (S804), the big winning opening processing and the electric tulip processing are performed.
In the big winning opening process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the big winning opening operation control unit 237, and controls the opening operation of the big winning opening 125, which is a special electric accessory, based on a predetermined condition.
In the electric tulip process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the electric tulip operation control unit 238, and controls the opening operation of the electric tulip 123 which is a normal electric accessory based on predetermined conditions.
The detailed contents of these electric accessory processes will be described later.

In the prize ball processing (S805), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the prize ball processing unit 239, and sets a command for controlling the number of winning prizes and the payout of prize balls according to the winning prizes.

In the output process (S806), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the output control unit 240, outputs a command for effect control to the effect control unit 300, and outputs a command for payout control to the payout control unit 330. Output. The effect control command is generated in each process from S802 to S804 and stored (set) in a control command storage area provided in the RAM 203 . The payout control command is generated in the process of S<b>805 and stored (set) in a control command storage area provided in the RAM 203 . A storage area is set in the RAM 203 for each type of control command.

The output control unit 240 sequentially checks the control command storage areas of the RAM 203, and if control commands are stored in the individual storage areas (that is, control commands are generated in the processing of S802 to S805). ), the control command is read out and output to the output destination (effect control unit 300 or payout control unit 330).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, output processing is performed at the end of a series of main control processing. That is, the commands generated in each process of S802 to S805 by the above functions as the first processing means are stored in the corresponding storage areas of the RAM 203 in each process. After these processes, the output control unit 240 as the second processing means collectively outputs the commands generated in each process accumulated in the storage area of the RAM 203 . In other words, in the present embodiment, when the main control process is executed for one cycle, the command generated during the one cycle execution is output after the last command generation for the one cycle execution.

[Modification of Basic Operation of Gaming Machine]
In the operation examples described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8, interrupts are permitted in the loop processing portion of the basic processing, and main control processing consisting of a series of processing is executed as interrupt processing. However, the main control process only needs to be configured to be repeatedly executed at fixed time intervals, and specific implementation means (execution procedure) are not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. For example, the main control process may be incorporated into a series of operations of the basic process, the elapsed time may be measured at a predetermined timing, and the main control process may be returned to at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). Further, while incorporating the main control process into the series of operations of the basic process, as in the operations described with reference to FIGS. It may be configured to return to the main control process incorporated during the basic process.

When outputting a command generated by the basic processing, in principle, each time a command is generated, it is stored in the command storage area of the RAM 203, and the function of the output control unit 240, which is the second processing means, is called. Output. The basic process is different from the main control process related to the progress of the game, and is a special process such as an initial operation that is performed only when the power is turned on. In addition, since the basic processing may change due to branching based on conditions such as the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is turned on, the generated commands are output promptly so that there is no omission in the output processing. processing. In addition, when commands are continuously generated by a plurality of related processes, a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area of the RAM 203 and collectively output according to a request for a specific process. can be

[Random Number Update Processing by Game Control Unit]
A random number as determination information used for various lotteries in game control such as a special symbol lottery is counted by a counter, starting from a predetermined initial value, the random number update process (S801) of the main control process shown in FIG. It is incremented by 1 each time. Then, the value at the time when each lottery is performed is acquired by the starting port switch process (Fig. 9) and the gate switch process (Fig. 10), and is used in the special design process (Fig. 11) and the normal design process (Fig. 16). be. This random number counter is an infinite loop counter, and after the counted random number reaches the set maximum random number (for example, 299 for the jackpot random number shown in FIG. 20(a), which will be described later), , returns to the initial value again. In addition, since the random number update process is performed at regular time intervals, if the initial value of each random number is specified, there is a risk that the winning value will be estimated based on the information on the update interval and the initial value. Therefore, after returning from the main control process to the basic process shown in FIG. 6, the initial value of each random number is randomly changed in the initial value random number update process of S613.

[Starting port switch processing by game control unit]
FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing the contents of the starting opening switch process in the switch process shown in S802 of FIG.
In this start opening switch process, a process for winning at the first start opening 121 and a process for winning at the second start opening 122 are sequentially performed. Referring to FIG. 9, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting port 121 and the first starting port switch 211 has been turned ON (S901). When the first starting port switch 211 is turned ON, next the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the unvaried pending number U1 in the winning prize of the first starting port 121 is less than the upper limit (S902). . In the example shown in FIG. 9, the upper limit is four. If the pending number U1 has reached the upper limit (No in S902), the unvaried winnings can no longer be held, so the processing for winnings in the first start port 121 is terminated.

On the other hand, when the pending number U1 is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S902), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for determination based on the winning of this time, and stores it in the RAM 203 (S903). . Here, since the first starting port 121 has won a prize, a random number value for the special symbol lottery is acquired. The random number value acquired at this time is the value updated by the random number update processing in S801. Then, the random number determines the result of the special symbol lottery in the later special symbol processing. The random number here refers to the jackpot random number that determines the jackpot, small hit or loss, the type of jackpot (time saving state or no time saving state after the end of the jackpot game, high probability state and low probability state, long hit, short Pattern random number value (jackpot pattern random number value) that determines the hit), fluctuation pattern random number value for specifying the fluctuation pattern in the pattern fluctuation, reach random number value that determines whether or not to perform the reach with reach effect described later at the time of loss , etc. are included.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs preliminary determination processing (S904). The pre-determining process is a winning ball (reserved ball) for which random numbers have already been acquired by winning at the start gate, but random numbers have not yet been determined by the special symbol processing described later. This is processing for judging the random number before it is judged (pre-judgment).

And, production control section 300 of form of this execution, random number is decided by special design processing on the basis of the decision result of the random number which is decided by previous decision processing (preliminary decision result), than the decision result is notified A notice effect suggesting the determination result can be performed before the game. This advance notice effect is, for example, in response to the occurrence of a winning ball (holding ball) for which random numbers have already been acquired by winning at the start gate but random numbers have not yet been determined by special symbol processing, and the image display unit. This is performed using a pending display effect (described later) displayed in 114, or the like. The advance notice performance based on this advance determination suggests to the player the judgment result when the random number judgment by the special symbol processing is performed after that regarding the reserved ball corresponding to the advance judgment related to the notice performance. As a result, the player can play the game while having expectations for the reserved ball. The details of the advance notice effect based on the prior determination will be described later.

Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the number of reservations U1 (S905).
Thereafter, the game control unit 200 sets a pre-determination result command including pre-determination information by the pre-determination process of S904 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the effect control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S906).
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sets a pending number increase command for notifying the effect control unit 300 of the increase in the pending number U1 by S905 in the RAM 203 (S907), and ends the processing for winning in the first start port 121. .

Next, a process for winning a prize at the second starting port 122 is performed. Referring to FIG. 9, next, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 122 and the second starting port switch 212 has been turned ON (S908). When the second starting port switch 212 is turned ON, next, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the unvaried pending number U2 in the winning prize of the second starting port 122 is less than the upper limit value (S909 ). In the example shown in FIG. 9, the upper limit is four. If the pending number U2 has reached the upper limit (No in S909), the unvaried winnings cannot be held any longer, so the processing for winnings in the second start port 122 is terminated.

On the other hand, when the number of reservations U2 is less than the upper limit (Yes in S909), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires the random number for the lottery based on the winning this time, and stores it in the RAM 203 (S910). . Here, since the second start port 122 wins a prize, the random number for the special symbol lottery (jackpot random number, jackpot pattern random number, reach random number, variation pattern random number, etc.) is acquired in the same manner as in the above S903. be. The random number value acquired at this time is the value updated by the random number update processing in S801. Then, the random number determines the result of the special symbol lottery in the later special symbol processing.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs preliminary determination processing (S911). The content of this preliminary determination process is the same as that of S904 described above.
Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the number of reservations U2 (S912).
After that, the game control unit 200 sets a pre-determination result command including pre-determination information by the pre-determination process of S911 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the effect control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S913).
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sets a pending number increase command for notifying the production control unit 300 of the increase in the pending number U2 by S912 in the RAM 203 (S914), and ends the processing for winning in the second start port 122. .

[Gate switch processing by game control unit]
FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the contents of gate switch processing when a game ball passes through the gate 124. As shown in FIG.
In this gate switch process, the game control unit 200 first determines whether the game ball has passed through the gate 124 and the gate switch 214 has been turned ON (S1001). If the gate switch 214 is turned ON, then the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the unchanged pending number G is less than the upper limit (S1002). In the example shown in FIG. 10, the upper limit is four. If the pending number G has reached the upper limit value (No in S1002), the gate switch process is terminated because the unvaried winnings cannot be held any longer.

On the other hand, when the number of reservations G is less than the upper limit (Yes in S1002), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires the random number for the lottery for this winning prize, and stores it in the RAM 203 (S1003). . Here, since the gate 124 wins a prize, a random number (such as a winning random number) for the normal symbol lottery is acquired.

Next, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the number G of reservations (S1004).
After the value of the number of reservations G is added in S1004, the game control unit 200 sets a number of reservations G increase command for notifying the production control unit 300 of the increase in the number of reservations G in S1004 in the RAM 203 (S1005), The processing for the winning at the gate 124 ends.

[Special symbol processing by game control unit]
FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol processing out of the symbol processing shown in S803 of FIG.
In this special symbol processing, the special symbol variation control unit 233 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the jackpot game flag is turned on in the flag setting (hereinafter, flag setting) set in the RAM 203 ( S1101). Here, the jackpot game flag is a flag that is set to identify that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

When the jackpot game flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is already hitting the jackpot, so the special symbol processing is terminated without starting the special symbol variation (Yes in S1101). On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is OFF (No in S1101), then the special symbol variation control section 233 determines whether the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is during special symbol variation (S1102). If the special symbol is not fluctuating (No in S1102), then the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 performs processing regarding the reserved numbers U1 and U2 (see FIG. 9) of the unvaried special symbols (S1103 to S1106). In the present embodiment, since the reservation number U1 related to the winning of the first start opening 121 and the reservation number U2 related to the winning of the second start opening 122 are distinguished, this process is also performed individually for each corresponding start opening. .

Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233 first determines whether or not the pending number U2 related to the winning of the second starting port 122 is 1 or more (S1103). When the number of reservations U2 is 1 or more (Yes in S1103), the special symbol variation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reservations U2 (S1104). On the other hand, when the number of reservations U2=0 (No in S1103), the special symbol variation control unit 233 next determines whether the number of reservations U1 related to the winning of the first starting port 121 is 1 or more (S1105). When the number of reservations U1 is 1 or more (Yes in S1105), the special symbol variation control section 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reservations U1 (S1106). On the other hand, if the pending number U1=0 (No in S1105), it means that there is no winning to start the special symbol lottery. is executed to terminate the process (S1116).
In addition, in the present embodiment, the processing relating to the pending number U2 related to the winning of the second starting port 122 is given priority. That is, when the number of reservations U2 is 1 or more, the process for the number of reservations U2 is performed, and when the number of reservations U2=0, the process for the number of reservations U1 is performed (see S803 to S806). On the other hand, regardless of which of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 wins, it is also possible to perform control such that the pending numbers U1 and U2 are subtracted in order of winning.

After subtracting the number of reservations U1 or the number of reservations U2 in S1104 or S1106, the special symbol variation control unit 233 turns OFF the customer waiting flag set in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1107). The customer waiting flag is a flag for identifying that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state, and is set in the customer waiting setting process (S1116, see FIG. 15 described later).

Next, the special symbol variation control unit 233 executes a big hit determination process and a variation pattern selection process by separate routines (S1108, S1109). Although details will be described later, the setting information (jackpot pattern, game state, variation patterns, etc.) are determined. In addition, these information are included in the variation start command sent to the production control unit 300 .

After that, the special symbol variation control section 233 is displayed by the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222 shown in FIG. Start the variation of the special design to be (S1110). Then, it generates a variation start command including setting information (jackpot symbol, game state, variation pattern, etc.) indicating the setting contents, and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1111). The variation start command set in S1111 is transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

When it is determined that the special symbol is fluctuating in S1102 (Yes in S1102), or after the fluctuation start command is set in S1111, the special symbol fluctuation control section 233 judges whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S1112 ). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbols in S1110 has reached the variation time set in the variation pattern selection process of S1109. If the variation time has not passed (No in S1112), the special symbol variation is continued, and the special symbol processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the variation time has passed (Yes in S1112), the special symbol variation control unit 233 first determines the variation of the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 221 and the second special symbol display device 222 in the jackpot determination process of S1108. It stops at the pattern decided by (S1113). A fluctuation stop command for stopping the decorative symbols, which will be described later, is set in the RAM 203 (S1114). Then, a process during stop of another routine is executed (S1115). The contents of the processing during suspension will be described later. The fluctuation stop command set in S1114 is transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

[Jackpot determination processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the content of the big hit determination process (S1108 in FIG. 11).
In this big hit determination process, the special symbol determination unit 234 of the game control unit 200 first determines the big hit random number value in the special symbol lottery this time (S1201), and determines whether or not the big hit or the small hit is made (S1202). , S1205). Whether or not a big win or a small win is made is whether or not the value of the big win random number acquired in S903 or S910 of FIG. (See FIG. 20(a)).

If the result of the random number determination in S1201 is a big hit (Yes in S1202), then the special symbol determination unit 234 determines a big hit symbol random number value (S1203). Depending on the result of this determination, the type of jackpot (high-probability time-saving gaming state jackpot, low-probability time-saving non-gaming state jackpot, etc.) is determined. Which jackpot will be won is determined by whether the value of the jackpot symbol random number acquired in S903 or S910 of FIG. b) see).

After the above determination, the special symbol determination unit 234 sets the symbol (jackpot symbol) representing the type of the jackpot determined by the determination of the jackpot symbol random number in the RAM 203 as setting information (S1204).

If the result of the random number determination of S1201 is a small hit (No in S1202, Yes in S1205), then the special symbol determination unit 234 is a symbol representing a small hit (hereinafter referred to as a small hit symbol) as setting information. It is set in the RAM 203 (S1206).

If the result of the random number determination in S1201 is neither a big hit nor a small hit (No in S1202 and S1205), then the special symbol determination unit 234 stores a symbol indicating that the lottery has been lost (hereinafter referred to as a lost symbol) as setting information in the RAM 203. (S1207).

[Variation pattern selection processing by game control unit]
FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process (S1109 in FIG. 11).
In this variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern selection unit 235 of the game control unit 200 first refers to the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (no time saving state or time saving state, and high probability state or low probability state). (S1301). Then, using the judgment result of S1202 of the big hit judging process (FIG. 12), it is judged whether or not the special symbol lottery of this time has made a big hit (S1302). If it is a big hit (Yes in S1302), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads a variation pattern table for big wins from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1303).

On the other hand, if there is no big hit (No in S1302), then the variation pattern selection unit 235 determines a random value for determining whether or not to perform a so-called ready-to-win effect to make the player expect a big win. (S1304). Whether or not to perform the reach effect is determined by determining whether or not the value of the reach random number acquired in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 matches a preset value (see FIG. 20(c)). .
As a result of the determination using the random number value, if the reach effect is performed (Yes in S1305), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the variation pattern table for reach from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1306). Also, when the ready-to-win effect is not performed (No in S1305), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the variation pattern table for losing from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1307).
Here, the fluctuation pattern table is a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance (variation time 3 seconds, 7 seconds, 13 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, etc.) and fluctuation pattern random number values is a table that associates

Next, the variation pattern selection unit 235 uses the variation pattern random number value acquired in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 and the variation pattern table set in S1303, S1306, and S1307 to determine the variation pattern random number value (S1308 ). That is, the variation pattern selection unit 235 refers to the variation pattern table set in the RAM 203 and selects a variation pattern according to the random value of the variation pattern random number. Therefore, even if the same random number value is acquired, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is a time saving state or no time saving state, and whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state), the result of the special symbol lottery (whether it was a big hit or not , whether or not the ready-to-win effect is to be performed when the jackpot is not achieved), etc. Since the variation pattern table referred to differs depending on the difference, the determined variation pattern differs.

Thereafter, the variation pattern selection unit 235 sets the variation pattern selected in S1308 to the RAM 203 as setting information (S1309). The setting information of the variation pattern set in S1309 is included in the variation start command set in S1111 of FIG. 11, and is transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG. Details of the variation pattern selected in the present embodiment and its setting will be described later.

[Stopping process by game control unit]
FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the contents of the in-stop process (S1115 in FIG. 11).
In this stopping process, the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not a flag indicating a time saving state in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (hereinafter referred to as a time saving flag) is ON (S1401). When the time saving flag is ON (Yes in S1401), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the lottery number (fluctuation number) J in the time saving state (S1402), and whether or not the lottery number J has become 0. is examined (S1403). And if the lottery frequency J=0 (Yes in S1403), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S1404). The operation to turn on the time saving flag and the setting of the initial value of the lottery number J are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the later-described big winning opening process (FIG. 17).

If the time saving flag is OFF (No in S1401) or after the time saving flag is turned OFF in S1404, or if the value of the lottery number J after subtracting in S1402 is not 0 (No in S1403), then game control The unit 200 checks whether a flag indicating a high-probability state (hereinafter referred to as a high-probability flag) is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1405). In addition, when both this high probability flag and the previous time saving flag are ON, it is a high probability time saving game state, and when the high probability flag is ON and the time saving flag is OFF, it is a high probability time saving non-game state. be.

When the high probability flag is ON (Yes in S1405), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of times of lottery (number of fluctuations) X in the high probability state (S1406), and whether the number of times of lottery X becomes 0 It is checked whether or not (S1407). Then, if the lottery number of times X=0 (Yes in S1407), the high probability flag is turned OFF (S1408). The operation to turn on the high probability flag and the setting of the initial value of the lottery number X are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the later-described big winning opening process (FIG. 17).

If the high-precision flag is OFF (No in S1405) or after the high-precision flag is turned OFF in S1408, or if the value of the lottery number X after subtraction in S1406 is not 0 (No in S1407), then The game control unit 200 determines whether or not the special symbol lottery of this time hits a jackpot (S1409). Then, if it is a jackpot (Yes in S1409), then the game control unit 200 determines the type of jackpot (S1410). In addition, here, as an example of determination of the kind of jackpot, it is determined whether or not it is a long hit.

Here, the judgment as to whether or not it is a big win can be made based on the judgment result of the big win judging process (FIG. 12). For example, if any of the symbols shown in the chart of FIG. 20B, which will be described later, is set, the answer is Yes in S1409. If the winning design or the small winning design is set in the RAM 203 by the big hit determination process, it is No in S1409.

When the type of jackpot is a long hit (Yes in S1410), the game control unit 200 turns on the long hit game flag (S1411). As a result, the setting of the game state of the RAM 203 becomes a big win game state (long win game state) in which the kind of big win is a long win. It should be noted that here in the long hit, it does not distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. Whether the high-probability state or the low-probability state is established is specified by turning ON the corresponding flag in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the later-described large winning opening process (FIG. 17).

If the type of jackpot is not a long hit (No in S1410), the game control unit 200 turns on the short hit game flag (S1412). As a result, the setting of the gaming state of the RAM 203 becomes a big winning gaming state (short winning gaming state) in which the kind of big winning is a short winning. As in the case of long wins, in the case of short wins, there is no distinction between a high probability state and a low probability state.

After turning ON the jackpot game flag in S1411 or S1412, the game control unit 200 initializes the values of the lottery times J and X (S1413). Moreover, the game control unit 200 turns off the time saving flag when the time saving flag is ON in S1401 and the lottery number J is not 0 in S1403 (S1414). Similarly, when the high probability flag is ON in S1405 and the lottery number X is not 0 in S1407, the high probability flag is turned OFF (S1414).

After initializing the lottery numbers J and X in S1413, the game control unit 200 starts an opening operation (S1417). Here, the contents of the opening operation differ depending on which of S1411 and S1412 the winning game flag is turned ON. In other words, the opening operation is set according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery.
Thereafter, the game control unit 200 sets an opening command for performing an opening operation effect corresponding to the jackpot game flag in the effect control unit 300 in the RAM 203 (S1418), and ends the stop processing. This opening command is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

On the other hand, if the result of this special symbol lottery is not a big hit (No in S1409), then the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the result of this special symbol lottery was a small hit (S1415). ). If it is not a small hit (No in S1415), the stop processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is a small hit (Yes in S1415), the game control unit 200 starts a small hit game (S1416). As a result, the setting of the game state of the RAM 203 becomes the small winning game state. In addition, in the small winning game, as described above, the big winning opening 125 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, and the game ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

[Customer waiting setting processing by game control unit]
FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (S1116 in FIG. 11).
In this customer waiting setting process, the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1501). Here, the customer waiting flag is a flag set to identify that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state.

If the customer waiting flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the customer waiting state, so the process is terminated (Yes in S1501). On the other hand, when the customer waiting flag is OFF, the game control unit 200 generates a customer waiting command, sets it in the RAM 203 (S1502), and turns on the customer waiting flag (S1503). The customer waiting command set in S1502 is transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG. It should be noted that the customer waiting flag is set in a state in which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped and there is no reservation.

[Normal symbol processing by game control unit]
FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal design process among the design processes shown in S803 of FIG.
In this normal design process, the normal design variation control section 236 of the game control section 200 first checks whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1601). Here, the auxiliary game flag is a flag that is set when winning the normal symbol lottery. The state in which the auxiliary game flag is set is a state in which the electric tulip 123 is opened according to the electric tulip processing (FIG. 19) described later and it is easy to win the second start port 122 (auxiliary game state).

When the auxiliary game flag is ON, it is already in the auxiliary game state and the normal design is stopped, so the normal design process is terminated without starting the normal design fluctuation (Yes in S1601). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is OFF (No in S1601), then the normal symbol variation control section 236 determines whether the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is during normal symbol variation (S1602). If the normal symbol is not fluctuating (No in S1602), then the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 determines whether or not the number G of reserved normal symbols (see FIG. 10) for the non-fluctuation is 1 or more (S1603). If the number of reservations G=0 (No in S1603), it means that there is no winning for starting the lottery of normal symbols, so the process is terminated without starting the normal symbol variation.

On the other hand, when the number G of reservations is 1 or more (Yes in S1603), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reservations G (S1604). Then, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the winning random number in the current normal symbol lottery, and determines whether or not the normal symbol lottery is won (S1605). Whether or not the player has won the lottery is determined by determining whether or not the value of the winning random number acquired in S1003 of FIG. 10 matches the value set as the winning value in a table or the like shown in FIG. It is determined.

Next, the normal design variation control unit 236 normally sets the design according to the result of the normal design lottery (S1606). That is, when winning the normal symbol lottery, the symbol representing the winning (hereinafter referred to as winning symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as setting information. On the other hand, when the player does not win the normal symbol lottery, a symbol indicating that the lottery is lost (hereinafter referred to as a lost symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as setting information.

Next, the normal design variation control section 236 sets the normal design variation time (S1607). This variable time is set based on the time saving flag set in the processes of S1404 and S1414 in FIG. 14 and S1804 and S1807 in FIG. 18 described later. That is, if the time saving flag is ON at the time of setting in S1607, it is set to a short time (for example, 1.5 seconds), and if the time saving flag is OFF, it is set to a long time (for example, 4.0 seconds). be done. After this setting, the normal design variation control section 236 starts the normal design variation in the normal design display device 223 shown in FIGS. In addition, it is also possible to determine the variation pattern of normal symbols by lottery. In this case, for example, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, the random number acquisition unit 231 normally acquires the fluctuation pattern random number value of the symbol, and in S1607, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 normally obtains the fluctuation pattern random number value of the symbol. The variable time is set by the determination.

After starting the variation of the normal symbol in S1608, or when it is determined that the symbol is normally varying in S1602 (Yes in S1602), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 determines whether or not the variation time has elapsed (S1609 ). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the normal symbol variation in S1608 has reached the variation time set in S1607. If the variation time has not elapsed (No in S1609), the normal symbol variation is continued, so the normal symbol processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the variation time has ended (Yes in S1609), the normal symbol variation control section 236 stops the normal symbol variation on the normal symbol display 223 (S1610). Then, the normal symbol variation control section 236 determines whether or not the determination result of S1605 is winning (S1611). If it is elected (Yes in S1611), the auxiliary game flag is turned ON (S1612). On the other hand, if the lottery is lost (No in S1611), the normal symbol processing is terminated without turning ON the auxiliary game flag.

[Large winning opening processing by game control unit]
FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the contents of the big winning opening process in the electric accessory process shown in S804 of FIG.
In this big winning opening process, the big winning opening operation control section 237 of the game control section 200 first checks whether or not the big winning game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1701). When the jackpot game flag is OFF, there is no winning to the big winning opening 125, so the big winning opening process is terminated (No in S1701). On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is ON (Yes in S1701), then the jackpot operation control unit 237 determines whether the opening in the operation control at the time of the jackpot started in the processing while the pachinko gaming machine 100 is stopped (FIG. 14). It is determined whether or not it is in the middle of an operation (S1702).

If the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the process of opening (Yes in S1702), then the big winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not a preset opening operation time (opening time) has elapsed. (S1703). If the opening time has not elapsed, the opening operation at the big winning opening 125 is continued, so the big winning opening process is terminated (No in S1703). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1703), then the large winning opening operation control unit 237 sets the operation of the large winning opening 125 (S1704), and initializes the winning number C (C=0). Then (S1705), 1 is added to the value of the number R of rounds for operation of the big winning opening 125 from the current value (S1706), and the big winning opening 125 starts operating (opens) (S1707).

In the operation setting of S1704, the operation pattern of the big winning opening 125 and the number of rounds to be operated in the operation pattern (the number of operation rounds) are set. Examples of the case where the big winning opening 125 is activated include a case of a big win or a short win in a special symbol lottery, and a case of a small win. The operation pattern and the number of rounds are variously set according to the types of these wins. In addition, in the jackpot game, it is stipulated that the operation of the jackpot 125 is continuously performed a plurality of times (a plurality of rounds). As an example, in the case of a long hit, for example, 15 rounds (15R) are operated, and one opening of 29.5 seconds is performed in one round. In the case of a short hit, for example, two rounds (2R) are operated, and one opening of 0.9 seconds is performed in one round. To explain further, it opens for 0.9 seconds, closes for 1.0 seconds, and then opens for 0.9 seconds. On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, for example, the door is opened for 0.9 seconds, closed for 1.0 seconds, and then opened for 0.9 seconds. Here, when comparing the operation with a short hit and the operation with a small hit in the above example, both are opened twice for 0.9 seconds. In other words, the action of the big winning hole 125 seen by the player is the same in the case of a short win and the case of a small win. you can't.

It is stipulated by law that the accumulated opening time of the big winning opening 125 must be set within 1.8 seconds in the case of a small winning. On the other hand, in the case of a big win (long win or short win), the big winning opening 125 must be opened continuously a plurality of times. Therefore, when trying to make it difficult to visually distinguish between the operation of the small hit and the operation of the short hit as described above, in the small hit, within the range where the open cumulative time in one operation is within 1.8 seconds, An operation mode is set in which the big winning opening 125 is opened two or more times, and in the short winning, the same number of rounds as the number of openings of the small winning is set.

Next, the big winning opening operation control section 237 determines whether or not the opening time in the operation pattern set in S1704 has elapsed (S1708). If the open state of the large winning opening 125 has not passed the opening time (No in S1708), then the large winning opening operation control unit 237 determines that the winning number C of the large winning opening 125 is a specified number (for example, 9). pieces) or more (S1709). If the opening time has not elapsed and the number of winning prizes C is less than the specified number, the operation state (open state) of the large winning prize port 125 is continued, so the large winning prize port processing is terminated (No in S1709). ). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1708) or if the number of winning prizes C has reached the prescribed number (Yes in S1709), the large winning prize gate operation control unit 237 ends the operation of the big prize winning gate 125 (closes). (S1710).

Next, the large winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the number of rounds R for operating the large winning opening 125 has reached the maximum value set in S1704 (S1711). Then, if the maximum value has not been reached, the remaining operations are performed, so the big winning opening process is terminated (No in S1711).

If the number of rounds R for the operation of the large winning opening 125 reaches the maximum value (Yes in S1711), then the large winning opening operation control section 237 starts the ending operation (S1712). Here, the content of the ending action corresponds to the state of the jackpot game flag among the ending actions set in each game of the long hitting game and the short hitting game.
After that, the big winning opening operation control unit 237 sets an ending command for performing an effect in the ending operation corresponding to the big winning game flag in the effect control unit 300 in the RAM 203 (S1713). This ending command is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

Next, after resetting the number of rounds R for the operation of the big winning opening 125 to 0 (S1714), the big winning opening operation control unit 237 performs the ending operation in which the elapsed time from the start of the ending operation is set in advance. It is determined whether or not the required time (ending time) has elapsed (S1717). If the ending time has not elapsed, the ending operation is continued, so the big winning opening process is terminated (No in S1717). On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (Yes in S1717), then the big winning opening operation control section 237 turns OFF the jackpot game flag after the game state setting process by the game control section 200 (S1718). The big winning opening process is ended (S1719). The contents of the game state setting process will be described later.

In S1702, when it is determined that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the opening (No in S1702), then the big winning opening operation control section 237 determines whether or not the ending is in progress (S1715). Then, if the ending is in progress (Yes at S1715), the operations after S1717 are executed.

On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the ending state (No in S1715), then the large winning opening operation control section 237 determines whether or not the large winning opening 125 is operating (opening) (S1716). If not in operation (No in S1716), the operations from S1705 onward are executed, and if in operation (Yes in S1716), the operations from S1708 onward are executed.
It should be noted that the effect performed in the small hit game described above is the same as the effect performed in the short hit game, and it is not possible to distinguish between the short hit and the small hit from the effect.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 18 shows the contents of the game state setting process (S1718) by the game control unit 200, which is executed when the ending time has passed (Yes in S1717).
When the game state setting process is performed, as a premise, the jackpot game flag is ON in S1701 of FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, the game control unit 200 first determines the type of the jackpot (S1801, S1802, S1803, S1806). These judgments can be made, for example, based on the type of symbol set in the RAM 203 as setting information in the big hit judging process (FIG. 12). In addition, since these determinations are substantially the same as S1202, S1203, and S1205 of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12), the determination results of S1202, S1203, and S1205 may be used.

If it is a small hit (Yes in S1801), the game state setting process is terminated because the game state is not changed.
If the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a low-probability time-saving gaming state (No in S1801, Yes in S1802, S1803), the game control unit 200 turns on the time-saving flag (S1804). Thereby, the setting of the game state of RAM203 will be in a low probability time-saving game state. Also, the game control unit 200 sets the initial value of the lottery number J (S1805), and ends the game state setting process. The initial value of the lottery number J is 100 in the illustrated example. Therefore, if the lottery in the low-probability time-saving gaming state is performed 100 times, the low-probability time-saving gaming state ends and the low-probability time-saving no-game state is entered.

On the other hand, if the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a low-probability time-saving no-game state (No in S1801, Yes in 1802, and No in S1803), the game control unit 200 performs processing without turning on both the time-saving flag and the high-accuracy flag. finish. Therefore, the setting of the game state of the RAM 203 for the game after this big hit is a low probability time saving non-game state.

When the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a high-probability time-saving game state (No in S1801 and S1802, Yes in S1806), the game control unit 200 turns on the time-saving flag (S1807), and sets the initial value of the lottery number J. (S1808). The initial value of the lottery number J in this case is 10000 in the illustrated example. In addition, the game control unit 200 turns on the high probability flag (S1809), and sets the initial value of the lottery times X (S1810). The initial value of the lottery number X is 10000 in the illustrated example. Thereby, the setting of the game state of RAM203 will be in a high probability time-saving game state. Then, when the lottery in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is performed 10000 times, the high-probability time-saving gaming state ends, and the low-probability time-saving no-game state is entered.

On the other hand, if the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a high-probability time-saving no-game state (No in S1801, S1802, and S1806), the game control unit 200 turns ON only the high-probability flag (S1809), and the initial value of the lottery number X (10000 times) is set (S1810). As a result, the setting of the gaming state of the RAM 203 becomes the high probability time saving non-gaming state. Then, when the lottery in the high-probability time-saving no-game state is performed 10000 times, the high-probability time-saving no-game state ends and the low-probability time-saving no-game state is entered.

[Electric tulip processing by game control unit]
FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the contents of the electric tulip process in the electric accessory process shown in S804 of FIG.
In the electric tulip processing, the electric tulip operation control section 238 of the game control section 200 first checks whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1901). When the auxiliary game flag is OFF, since the electric tulip 123 is not opened, the electric tulip processing is terminated (No in S1901). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is ON (Yes in S1901), then the electric tulip operation control unit 238 determines whether or not the electric tulip 123 is in operation (S1902).

If the electric tulip 123 is not in operation (No in S1902), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 sets the operation pattern of the electric tulip 123 (S1903), and operates the electric tulip 123 according to the set operation pattern (S1904). . Here, the operation pattern is set based on the time saving flag set in the processes of S1404, S1414 in FIG. 14, S1804, S1807 in FIG. 18, and the like. For example, if the time saving flag is OFF at the time of setting in S1903, an operation pattern that opens once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds is set, and if the time saving flag is ON, 1.80 seconds open An operating pattern is set to open three times in time. Thus, normally, when the time saving flag is ON (when the time saving state), the electric tulip 123 is opened multiple times for a long time, and the winning support (electric chew support) that makes it easier to win the second start port 122 is done. In addition, when the time saving flag is ON or OFF, a plurality of operation patterns (types of auxiliary games) of the electric tulip 123 are prepared, and the operation is performed according to the type of winning determined in the normal symbol processing (see FIG. 16). It may be configured to set a pattern.

When it is determined in S1902 that the electric tulip 123 is in operation (Yes in S1902), or after the electric tulip 123 is operated in S1904, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 determines that the opening time in the set operation pattern has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1905). If the open time has not elapsed, the electric tulip 123 continues to operate (open state), so the electric tulip process is terminated (No in S1905). On the other hand, if the opening time has passed (Yes in S1905), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 turns off the auxiliary game flag and ends the electric tulip processing (S1906).

[Method of judging by random numbers]
Here, the method of determination based on random numbers performed in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12), variation pattern selection process (FIG. 13), normal symbol process (FIG. 16), etc. will be described in detail.
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a configuration example of random numbers (decision table) used in the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery in the present embodiment.
Fig. 20(a) shows a configuration example of the jackpot random number used in the special symbol lottery, Fig. 20(b) shows a configuration example of the jackpot random number used in the special symbol lottery, and Fig. 20(c) shows a special symbol lottery. A configuration example of reach random numbers used and a configuration example of hit random numbers used in normal symbol lottery are shown in FIG. 20(d), respectively.

Referring to FIG. 20(a), as a determination value of the jackpot random number, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 at the time of jackpot determination is a jackpot when the game state is a low probability state and the game state at the time of jackpot determination is a jackpot when the game state is a high probability state. Two types and a small hit are set. The range of values of random numbers (random numbers for big hits) is 300 from 0 to 299. In the case of a special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) in a low probability state, only one winning value is set, and the winning probability is 1/300. In addition, in the case of the special symbol lottery in the high probability state, the winning value is set to 10, and the winning probability is 10/300 (=1/30). That is, in the illustrated example, if a special symbol lottery is performed by winning the start ports 121 and 122 in a high probability state, the probability of winning is ten times higher than when the special symbol lottery is performed in a low probability state. In addition, the winning value of the small win is set to three regardless of whether it is in a low probability state or a high probability state, and the winning probability is 3/300 (=1/100).
Here, a special symbol lottery in a low-probability state will be described as an example. It is determined whether or not the winning value of the jackpot lottery in the low-probability state in (a) matches "5". Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery in the high probability state and the special symbol lottery for the small hit.

Referring to FIG. 20(b), five types of jackpot symbols are prepared: low-probability symbol A, low-probability symbol B, high-probability symbol A, high-probability symbol B, and latent probability symbol. Here, the low-probability pattern A and the low-probability pattern B are patterns representing a low-probability jackpot, and among them, the low-probability pattern A is a long hit (8 rounds) and a low-probability short-time gaming state jackpot. indicates that there is The low-probability symbol B indicates that it is a long hit (4 rounds) and a jackpot in a low-probability time-saving game state. High-probability pattern A and high-probability pattern B indicate that it is a long hit (15 rounds) and a high-probability time-saving game state jackpot. The high-probability symbol C and the high-probability symbol D indicate a long hit (8 rounds) and a high-probability time-saving game state jackpot. The high-probability symbol E indicates that it is a short hit (two rounds) and a high-probability time-saving no-game state jackpot. The latent certainty pattern is a pattern representing a short hit (two rounds) and a high-probability time-saving non-playing state jackpot. Therefore, the high-probability pattern B and the latent-probability pattern have the same game state after the big win game, but the latent-probability pattern is a condition for carrying out a latent performance that does not clearly notify the player of the high-probability state. Therefore, it is provided separately from the high probability pattern B. The range of random number values is 250 from 0 to 249. In addition, in the jackpot symbol random number, a winning value is set for each of the first start port 121 and the second start port 122 that trigger the special symbol lottery.

In the low-probability symbol A, 35 values are assigned as winning values to both the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 . Therefore, the probability of winning the low-probability symbol A when winning the jackpot is 35/250 (=7/50).
In the low-probability symbol B, 15 values are assigned as winning values to both the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 . Therefore, the probability of winning the low-probability symbol B when winning the jackpot is 15/250 (=3/50).

In the high-probability pattern A, 20 values are assigned as winning values when winning the first starting port 121. - 特許庁Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol A is 20/250 (=2/25) when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121.例文帳に追加
On the other hand, 150 values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 wins. Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol A is 150/250 (=15/25) when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122.例文帳に追加

In the high-probability pattern B, five values are assigned as winning values when winning the first starting port 121. - 特許庁Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol B when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121 is 5/250 (=1/50).
On the other hand, 25 values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 wins. Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol B when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122 is 25/250 (=1/10).

In the high-probability symbol C, 25 values are assigned as winning values when winning the first starting port 121. - 特許庁Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol C is 25/250 (=1/10) when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121.例文帳に追加
On the other hand, 10 values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 wins. Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol B is 10/250 (=1/25) when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122.例文帳に追加

In the high-probability pattern D, 25 values are assigned as winning values when winning the first starting port 121. - 特許庁Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol D when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121 is 25/250 (=1/10).
On the other hand, 10 values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 wins. Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol D when winning the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122 is 10/250 (=1/25).

In the high-probability pattern E, 25 values are assigned as winning values when winning the first starting port 121. - 特許庁Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol E is 25/250 (=1/10) when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121.例文帳に追加
On the other hand, five values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 wins. Therefore, the probability of winning the high-probability symbol E when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122 is 5/250 (=1/50).

In the latent probability pattern, 100 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, the probability of winning the latent probability symbol in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121 is 100/250 (=2/5).
On the other hand, the second starting port 122 is not assigned a winning value in the latent certainty pattern, and when the second starting port 122 wins, the winning in the latent certainty pattern does not occur.

Here, taking the low-probability symbol A as an example, the jackpot symbol random number value (see S903 and S910) acquired with the opportunity of winning the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 is shown in FIG. ), it is determined whether the winning value of the low-probability symbol A matches “0 to 34”. Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery such as the low-probability symbol B.

As described above, by differentiating the winning probabilities of the types of jackpots in the case of winning the first starting hole 121 and the winning of the second starting hole 122, various game characteristics can be provided. In addition, the arrangement of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 on the game board 110 is devised so that either one of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 can be aimed easily in a specific state (mode). , it is possible to encourage players to actively participate in games.

Next, determination of reach random numbers will be described. In addition, the reach random number is set according to the number of reservations as described later. Here, as an example, the reach random number when the pending number is 0 will be described.
Referring to FIG. 20(c), the range of random number values is 250 from 0 to 249, and 22 random numbers are assigned to the lottery result (with reach) that performs reach production, and lottery that does not perform reach production. 228 random values are assigned to the result (no reach). That is, in the illustrated example, if the special symbol lottery does not win big, the ready-to-win effect is performed with a probability of 22/250 (=11/125). Here, the ready-to-win effect is a effect performed in the image display section 114 when special symbols are changed. Hereinafter, the production at the time of special pattern fluctuation without the ready-to-win production is called the production without reach, and the ready-to-win production is also called the production with reach.

Here, if the reach is explained as an example, the reach random number (see S903, S910) acquired with the opportunity of winning the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 is the reach in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the winning value "0 to 21". Although detailed explanation is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery without reach.

In many cases, at the time of special symbol fluctuation, the display control of the first special symbol indicator 221 and the second special symbol indicator 222 (hereinafter referred to as special symbol indicators 221 and 222 when not distinguished) is interlocked. , the image display unit 114 performs an effect using decorative patterns. The decorative pattern is formed by displaying three lines of patterns each consisting of a numerical sequence in which numbers 1 to 9 are continuously written in the vertical direction, for example. At the same time when the variable display of the special symbols on the special symbol displays 221 and 222 is started, the decorative symbols displayed on the image display section 114 start scrolling. Further, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the special symbols (the start of the scrolling of the decorative symbols), the special symbols are stop-displayed and the decorative symbols are also stopped. In general, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the same three numbers are arranged in a horizontal or oblique straight line in the stationary display of the decorative symbols. The effect using the decorative design that is performed along with the variable display of this special design is called a variable effect.

In the ready-to-win production, the following operations are performed with respect to decorative symbols as a variable production. First, when the decorative patterns scrolling in the vertical (horizontal) direction are stopped and the respective patterns are stopped and displayed, any two patterns (sequence) are stopped first. At this time, the same number is stopped and displayed on a horizontal (vertical) or diagonal straight line. To explain further, if the decorative patterns are scrolled in the vertical direction, the same numbers are stop-displayed in one row in the horizontal direction.
Next, the scroll speed for the last line is gradually slowed down, giving the player a sense of anticipation that three identical numbers will line up on a straight line. In such a ready-to-win effect, an SP ready-to-win effect or an SP/SP ready-to-win effect may be performed before the last row of scrolling stops. In addition, the SP reach effect is generally called super reach or special reach, and is a effect that makes you expect a bigger hit than reach, and is a moving image effect in which various characters appear and stories develop. . In addition, SP and SP reach are generally called super super reach and special special reach, and are effects that make you expect a bigger hit than SP reach, and animation images in which various characters appear and stories develop. It is a production of
Further, as shown in FIG. 21, which will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the variation time is longer (for example, 90 seconds or 60 seconds), SP ready-to-win or SP/SP ready-to-win effects are set to be executed. . It should be noted that the above-mentioned variable production that is performed together with the ready-to-win production is also referred to as a ready-to-reach variable production.
On the other hand, in the non-reach production, when the decoration patterns scrolling in the vertical (horizontal) direction are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, there is no production that gives the player a sense of expectation like the production with reach. , The pattern is stopped and displayed in a state where the same numbers are not aligned on a horizontal (vertical) or diagonal straight line.

In this way, the reach random number is for determining whether to perform the reach presence effect or the reach non-representation in the image display unit 114 when the result of the determination of the jackpot random number is a loss. The performance with reach appears with a probability to give the player a moderate sense of expectation.
In addition, when a jackpot is won, a presentation with reach is performed, and finally, the decorative patterns are stop-displayed with the same numbers aligned on a horizontal (vertical) or diagonal straight line. can be done. On the other hand, in the ready-to-win effect when winning a small prize or losing, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a state in which the same numbers are not aligned on the straight line.

Next, the determination of the winning random number used in the normal symbol lottery will be described.
Referring to FIG. 20 (d), the range of random number values is 10 from 0 to 9, one value is assigned as the winning value when the time saving flag is OFF, and the winning value when the time saving flag is ON Nine values are assigned. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 and the normal symbol lottery is performed in the absence of time-saving state, the game is won with a probability of 1/10. On the other hand, if a game ball passes through the gate 124 in the time-saving state and a normal symbol lottery is performed, the player wins with a probability of 9/10.

Here, the time saving flag OFF will be described as an example. It is determined whether it matches with "0" which is the winning value of the time saving flag OFF in d). Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the normal symbol lottery with the time saving flag ON.

In addition, although not particularly shown, it is possible to set a plurality of wins with different contents of the auxiliary game (opening pattern of the electric tulip 123) performed when a win is determined in the normal symbol lottery. In this case, for example, like the jackpot pattern random number (see FIG. 17(b)) specifying the type of jackpot in the special pattern lottery, the winning pattern random number for specifying the type of win in the normal symbol lottery is set. Then, the game control unit 200 acquires the random number of the winning random number and the random number of the winning symbol random number in the gate switch process (see FIG. 10) by the random number acquisition unit 231, and the normal symbol determination unit 232 acquires the random number of the winning symbol random number. Determine the type of win based on random numbers.
It should be noted that the range of random numbers, the percentage of winning values, and the values of winning values shown in the configuration examples of random numbers in FIG. 20 are merely examples, and are not limited to the illustrated values.

[Setting example of fluctuation pattern]
Next, a setting example of a variation pattern and a table used in the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 13 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a setting example of variation patterns and tables used in the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. In addition, FIG. 21 shows a setting example of the low-probability time-saving non-gaming state. Although illustration is omitted, a table for setting the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is separately provided for other game states such as the high probability time saving gaming state.
In addition, FIG. 21 shows a setting example when a game ball has entered the first starting port 121. As shown in FIG. Regarding the case where the game ball wins in the second start port 122, a table for setting the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process may be provided separately, or the game ball wins in the first start port 121. A table to be referred to in each case may be shared and referred to.

As shown in FIG. 21, the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines the variation pattern based on the big winning symbol and the variation pattern random number when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a big win (Yes in S1302 of FIG. 13). . Specifically, in the special symbol variation control unit 233, the variation pattern random number value (see S903) acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 matches any of the variation pattern random number values assigned to each jackpot symbol. determine the variation pattern based on whether For example, when the jackpot design is "high probability design A" and the variation pattern random number is "51", it matches the variation pattern random number range "50 to 69" allocated to "high probability design A" in FIG. Therefore, "PB3" is selected as the variation pattern. In addition, the special symbol variation time in this "PB3" is "90.18 seconds".

In addition, the special symbol variation control unit 233, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is lost (No in S1302 of FIG. 13), the holding number U1 of the first special symbol lottery, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number determine the variation pattern. Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233, when the number of reservations U1 of the first special symbol lottery is "0", the reach random number (see S903) acquired together with the jackpot random number by the random number acquisition unit 231 , determines whether it is assigned to the reach random number range "0 to 21" assigned to the pending number "0" of "missing" in FIG. 21 or to the reach random number range "22 to 249". Then, when the obtained reach random number is included in the reach random number range “0 to 21”, the variation pattern random number (see S903) obtained together with the jackpot random number by the random number obtaining unit 231 is the reach random number range “0 to 21”, the variation pattern is determined based on which of the variation pattern random values assigned to “21” matches. For example, when the variation pattern random number is "51", it matches the variation pattern random number range "50 to 89", so "PR4" is selected as the variation pattern.

As described above, the game control unit 200 controls the variation pattern random number value (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) acquired when the game ball enters the starting ports 121 and 122, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100, the reach A variation pattern of special symbols is determined based on conditions such as the presence or absence of performance and the number of reservations. Information on the determined special symbol variation pattern is included in the variation start command and sent from the game control section 200 to the effect control section 300 . In the effect control unit 300, as will be described later, as the effect at the time of the special symbol variation, the effect corresponding to the variation time specified based on the information of the variation pattern included in the variation start command (executable in the variation time) is produced. is selected and executed.

[Configuration of RAM of game control unit and RAM of effect control unit for performing advance notice effect based on advance determination]
Next, the configurations of the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 and the RAM 303 of the effect control unit 300 in the present embodiment for executing the notice effect based on the prior determination will be described.
FIG. 22 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the RAM 203 (see FIG. 3) of the game control section 200 according to this embodiment. 22(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the storage area 204, and FIG. 22(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the storage units shown in FIG. 22(a).

As shown in FIG. 22(a), the RAM 203 has a storage area 204 as a special symbol holding storage area for storing the jackpot random numbers obtained by the jackpot random number lottery. This storage area 204 has eight storage units corresponding to the maximum value of the number of reservations of the first start port 121 and the number of reservations of the second start port 122 (when the upper limit of each number of reservations is 4) . Specifically, the storage area 204 includes a first storage unit 204a, a second storage unit 204b, a third storage unit 204c, a fourth storage unit 204d, a fifth storage unit 204e, a sixth storage unit 204f, and a seventh storage. It has a section 204g and an eighth storage section 204h.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22(b), each of these storage units 204a to 204h is an area for storing information indicating whether the winning starter (first starter 121 or second starter 122) is selected. , an area for storing the obtained jackpot random number, an area for storing the symbol random number, an area for storing the reach random number, and an area for storing the variation pattern random number. That is, each of the storage units 204a to 204h stores a jackpot random number, a pattern random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number.

Here, each random number is stored in order from the first storage unit 204a. More specifically, for example, when no random number is stored in any of the first storage unit 204a to the eighth storage unit 204h, the obtained random number is stored in the first storage unit 204a. Further, for example, when random numbers are already stored in the first storage unit 204a to the fourth storage unit 204d, the obtained random numbers are stored in the fifth storage unit 204e.

FIG. 23 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3) of the effect control section 300 according to this embodiment. FIG. 23(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of reserved storage areas 305 and 306, and FIG. 23(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the storage units shown in FIG. 23(a).
As shown in FIG. 23(a), the RAM 303 has a first reservation storage area 305 and a second reservation storage area 306 as reservation status storage areas for storing the status of the reservation ball. The first reservation storage area 305 and the second reservation storage area 306 correspond to the reservation of the winning to the first start gate 121 and the reservation of the winning to the second start gate 122, respectively. have. Specifically, the first reserved storage area 305 has a first storage section 305a, a second storage section 305b, a third storage section 305c, and a fourth storage section 305d. The second reserved storage area 306 has a first storage section 306a, a second storage section 306b, a third storage section 306c, and a fourth storage section 306d.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23(b), each of these storage units 305a to 305d and 306a to 306d has a hold flag storage area for turning ON/OFF the hold flag and a notification flag storage area for turning ON/OFF the notification flag. and a region. The reserve flag is a flag for identifying the presence or absence of a reserve ball for each of the storage units 305a to 305d and 306a to 306d. That is, for example, when the number of pending prizes to the first starting port 121 is 3, the pending flags are turned ON in the three pending flag storage areas of the first to third storage units 305a, 305b, and 305c. The notification flag is a flag for setting whether or not to perform the notice effect based on the preliminary determination result for each reserved ball. In the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can set whether or not to perform the advance notice effect based on the result of prior determination according to the game state and the state of the effect. Therefore, the notification flag is turned ON when the announcement effect is performed, and the notification flag is turned OFF when the announcement effect is not performed. For example, when the notice effect is performed for the third held ball out of the three held balls, the notification flag is turned ON in the notification flag storage area of the third storage unit 305c.

That is, the RAM 203 and the RAM 303 function as storage means for storing hold information, which is starting information based on establishment of a predetermined starting condition, within a predetermined number in the game control unit 200 and the effect control unit 300. In addition, the game control unit 200, based on the holding information which is the starting information, before the determination of the special symbol determination unit 234 triggered by the establishment of the starting condition corresponding to the starting information, special game state It is a preliminary determination means for performing preliminary determination processing regarding whether or not to shift to. The effect control unit 300 is effect control means for performing a notice effect for notifying (suggesting) the result of prior determination.

Although not shown in particular, the RAM 203 has an area (hereinafter referred to as a prior determination information storage area) in which prior determination information is stored, in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 22(a). The pre-determination information is information obtained by the pre-determination processing (see S904 and S911 in FIG. 9) based on the above random numbers. The content of the pre-determination information is the same as the information obtained as various determination results in the special symbol processing (see FIG. 11). In the case of , it is information for indicating the type of the jackpot, whether the content of the effect is the effect with reach or the effect without reach, and the contents of the variation pattern (variation time). The pre-determination information stored in the pre-determination information storage area is stored together with information (hereinafter referred to as retention information) related to the hold corresponding to the winning ball (reserved ball) for which the pre-determination process has been performed, or independently of this hold information. At the timing, it is included in the pre-determination result command and sent from the game control section 200 to the effect control section 300. - 特許庁

[Pre-judgment processing]
Next, the advance determination processing (see S904 and S911 in FIG. 9) will be described in detail.
In the pre-determination process in the present embodiment, the game control unit 200 performs pre-determination as follows using a random number table similar to the random number configuration example described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21 .

FIG. 24-1 is a flow chart showing the details of the preliminary determination processing (S904 and S911 in FIG. 9) according to this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 24-1, the game control unit 200 first determines whether the game state is a high probability state (S2401), and when it is determined to be a high probability state (Yes in S2401), the high probability state A table for the game is selected, and a jackpot random number and a jackpot pattern random number are determined in advance (S2402). On the other hand, when it is determined as No in S2401, a table for low probability state is selected, and a jackpot random number and a jackpot symbol random number are pre-determined (S2403).

After the prior determination of the jackpot random number and the jackpot pattern random number of S2402 or S2403, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (S2404), and determines that it is the time saving state (Yes in S2404), The table for the time saving state is selected, and the reach random number is pre-determined (S2405). Furthermore, the table for time saving state is selected, and the fluctuation pattern random number is pre-determined (S2406).
On the other hand, when it is determined as No in S2404, the table for time saving non-state is selected, and the reach random number is determined in advance (S2407). Furthermore, the table for time saving no state is selected, and the fluctuation pattern random number is determined in advance (S2408).

Thereafter, the game control unit 200, the result of the prior determination of the jackpot random number obtained as described above, the result of the prior determination of the jackpot pattern random number, the result of the prior determination of the reach random number, and the result of the prior determination of the variation pattern, It is stored in the advance judgment information storage area as advance judgment information (S2409). Furthermore, in order to transmit the preliminary determination information to the effect control section 300, the preliminary determination result command including the preliminary determination information is set in the RAM 203 (S2410).

Here, the above-mentioned preliminary determination is based on the random number value (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) acquired according to the winning of the game ball to the starting ports 121 and 122, and the determination table (see FIG. 20) used in the big hit determination process. ) and a determination table having the same structure as the one shown in FIG. That is, the determination itself after selecting the determination table to be used is the same as the determination in the big win determination process (see S1201 in FIG. 12). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the subroutine (see S1108 in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12) of the jackpot determination process used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 11) is called to determine the random number in the prior determination.

With such a configuration, in the present embodiment, there is no need to prepare a processing function (subroutine) for determining random numbers in addition to the jackpot determination process in order to determine random numbers in the preliminary determination process. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of control instructions and suppress an increase in the size of the program relating to the jackpot determination process and the advance determination process. Further, as described above, when the determination table used for the preliminary determination has the same configuration as the determination table used for the big win determination, the determination table used for the big win determination may also be used for the preliminary determination.

Also, here only the prior determination of the special symbol lottery (whether it is a big hit or not) was described, but in the present embodiment, the variation pattern when performing the variable display and stop display of the special symbol is also read ahead (preliminary determination). I do. The selection of the variation pattern in the special symbol lottery is a random number for variation pattern selection (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) acquired according to the winning of the game ball to the starting ports 121 and 122 and the variation pattern table (FIG. 21 (see S1109 of FIG. 11 and FIG. 13). Therefore, even in the look-ahead of the variation pattern, using a random number value for selecting the variation pattern obtained at the time of winning and the look-ahead table having the same configuration as the variation pattern table used in the variation pattern selection process of the special symbol process, it is selected. Fluctuation patterns can be read ahead.

In this case, in order to foresee the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process, the subroutine of the variation pattern selection process (see S1109 of FIG. 11 and FIG. 13) used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 11) is called and used. be able to. Moreover, regarding the look-ahead table used for the look-ahead of the variation pattern selection, the variation pattern table used in the variation pattern selection process of the special symbol processing may be used. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the number of control instructions related to prefetching of variation pattern selection and suppress an increase in program size.

It should be noted that, if the pre-determination process and the jackpot determination process at the time of special symbol variation are performed in the same subroutine using the same determination table group, the execution time of each process is different, so the pre-determination result and the special symbol variation There may be a case where the judgment result by the big hit judging process of (1) is different. That is, it is a case where the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state, or whether it is a time saving state or no time saving state) changes before the start of special symbol variation after the execution of the preliminary determination process. In this case, since different types of determination tables are used according to the gaming state, the specific determination table used for determination differs between when the preliminary determination process is executed and when the big win determination process is executed. . Therefore, even if the same random number value obtained at the time of winning the starting ports 121 and 122 is used, the preliminary determination result and the determination result of the jackpot determination process may differ. In such a case, in the production control unit 300, after the execution of the preliminary determination process, if the game state changes before the start of the special symbol variation, the production based on the preliminary determination result is not executed (prohibition) control, etc. can be done.

[Command configuration and transmission method]
Here, the configuration and transmission method of commands (commands for effect control and commands for setting) output from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 will be described.
FIG. 24-2 is a diagram showing the structure of commands. FIG. 24-2(a) shows the data structure of the command, and FIG. 24-2(b) shows the structure of the command as a bit string.

As shown in FIG. 24-2(a), one command of the command output from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 consists of 2 bytes. This command consists of a 1-byte "code" as the first data section and a 1-byte "data" as the second data section. "Code" indicates the type of command, and "Data" indicates the value of the command. This command is transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 using a start-stop synchronization with one serial signal. More generally, the "code", which is the first data part, has a size of a bits (a is an integer of 2 or more), and the value of the leading 1 bit is specified as either 1 or 0. , the second data part "data" has a size of n×a bits (n is an integer equal to or greater than 1), and the leading 1-bit value is different from the leading 1-bit value of the first data part. specified in the value.

Since the start-stop synchronization is used, each of the "code" and "data" constituting the command is provided with a 1-bit start bit (a bit labeled "S" in the figure) at the beginning and a 1 at the end. A bit end bit (a bit labeled "E" in the figure) is provided. A 1-bit parity bit (indicated as "P" in the drawing) is provided for each of the "code" and "data" forming the command.

As shown in FIG. 24-2(a), both the "code" and "data" forming the command have a data size of 1 byte (8 bits). Then, when transmitted, the "code" and "data" are each provided with a start bit, an end bit and a parity bit. Therefore, it is not easy for the effect control unit 300 that receives the command to identify whether the received data string is the "code" or "data" of the command from the shape of the data string. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a flag is set for distinguishing between "code" and "data". Specifically, the value of a specific part of the 8-bit value that makes up the "code" and the value of the part that corresponds to the specific part of the "code" among the 8-bit values that make up the "data" are made different. .

In the example shown in FIG. 24-2(b), the leading 1 bit of each of "code" and "data" is used as a flag. That is, in the 8-bit value forming the "code", the leading 1-bit value is set to "1", and in the 8-bit value forming the "data", the leading 1-bit value is set to "0". . Thereby, the effect control section 300 can identify whether the data string is "code" or "data" by checking the value of the first bit following the start bit of the received data string. Note that the specific values of the flags are merely examples, and values different from the values shown above may be used as long as the "code" and "data" can be distinguished.

Here, since the leading 1-bit value of "code" is specified as "1", the range of possible values for "code" is 128 from 10000000B (=80H) to 11111111B (=FFH). is. The letter "B" attached to each value indicates binary notation, and the letter "H" indicates hexadecimal notation. In addition, since the leading 1-bit value of "data" is specified as "0", the range of possible values for "data" is 128 values from 00000000B (=00H) to 01111111B (=7FH). be. That is, according to the configuration shown in FIGS. 24-2(a) and 24-2(b), 128 types of commands, each of which can take 128 types of values, can be set.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, many kinds of effects are executed according to the game state, the determination result of the special symbol lottery, and the like. Therefore, a large number of commands are prepared for commands for effect control. In particular, the above 128 "data", which are values indicating the specific content of the command, may be insufficient. On the other hand, a number smaller than the above 128 "codes" that indicate the types of commands is usually sufficient. Therefore, it is conceivable to use part of the "code" bit string to describe the value of "data".

For example, consider the case where the last 1 bit of "code" is used to describe the value of "data". Each bit in the 8-bit bit string that constitutes the "code" and "data" is hereinafter referred to as the 1st bit to the 8th bit. In addition, apart from the bit string that makes up the "code", the value of the "code" that actually indicates the type of command is called the "code value". The value of "data" shown is called a "data value". Then, the code value is described using the 1st to 7th bits of the "code" bit string, and the data value is described by using all of the "data" bit string (from the 1st bit to the 8th bit). , and the eighth bit of the "code".

With this configuration, the possible range of code values is 1000000B (=40H) to 1111111B (=7FH) because the value of the first bit is specified as "1" and the total size is 7 bits. ) are 64. In addition, the possible range of data values is 128 represented by 8 bits of "data" in which the value of the first bit is specified as "0" and the values of the eighth bit of "code" are "0", " 1”, the number is 256. Therefore, it is possible to set a command having 256 kinds of values as data values.

It should be noted that the above configuration for describing a data value using part of the "code" is merely an example, and the specific number of bits and values are not limited to the above configuration example. For example, the 7th and 8th bits of the "code" may be used to describe the data value. More generally, a predetermined type of data (data value) is generated by using predetermined bits that constitute a "code" that is the first data section and bits that constitute a "data" that is a second data section. is recorded. Then, other types of data (code values) different from the predetermined types of data (data values) are recorded using the remaining bits in the "code", which is the first data section, excluding the predetermined bits. be. In other words, the a-bits constituting the second data portion “data” and the b-bits constituting the first data portion “code” (b is an integer smaller than a−1 and equal to or greater than 1) are are used to record data values of size (a+b) bits.

In addition, as a means for increasing the number of data values that can be handled, it is conceivable to increase the number of "data" bit strings that describe data values. For example, it is conceivable to prepare "first data" and "second data" as bit strings describing data values. In this case, if each bit string is 8 bits, a data value can be described by a bit string of 16 bits in total. If the second bit of the 8-bit bit string is used as a flag to distinguish between the "first data" and the "second data", for example, the first bit and the second bit of the "first data" can be '00B' and the first and second bits of the 'second data' can be '01B'. The first bit has a value of "0" as a flag for identifying "code". In other words, the second data part "data" has a size of bit strings ("first data", "second data", . , for each a bit), the same value as the value of the leading 1 bit is set.

With this configuration, the range of values that the "first data" can take is 64 from 00000000B (=00H) to 00111111B (=3FH), and the range of values that the "second data" can take is: Since there are 64 from 01000000B (=40H) to 01111111B (=7FH), the total is 4096 (=64×64). Here, the first bit is used as a flag for distinguishing between "code" and "data" ("first data" and "second data"), and "first data" and "second data" are Although the second bit is used as a flag for identifying , the first and second bits may be used to set flags for identifying four types of bit strings. For example, "code" can have the first and second bit values as "11B", and "data" can have the first and second bit values as "00B", "01B", or "10B". Conceivable.

[Configuration example for command output in RAM of game control unit]
FIG. 24-3 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a command storage area in the RAM 203. As shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 24-3, the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 has a command storage area (storage area) to which individual commands generated by various processes such as the main control process shown in FIG. 8 are allocated. . In the example shown in FIG. 24-3, 31 command storage areas from area 01 to area 031 are set in the RAM 203 . Here, assignment of commands to each command storage area does not necessarily have a one-to-one correspondence. For example, it is possible to allocate multiple commands that are not generated at the same time to the same command storage area. In the example shown in FIG. 24C, a plurality of commands are assigned to area 01, area 09, area 012, area 019, area 020, area 021, area 022, area 023, and area 030, and other commands One command is assigned to each storage area.

In the example shown in FIG. 24-3, area 01 is assigned commands relating to power-on. Commands related to power-on include a command for controlling power-on during RAM clearing and a command for controlling power-on during recovery. Since these commands are generated in different scenes, they are not generated at the same time, and are all assigned to area 01 .

Areas 02 to 04 are assigned three commands (denoted as "Starting Entrance 1 Winning" in the drawing) relating to winning the first opening 121. FIG. One of the commands related to the winning of the first starting port 121 is a command indicating the determination (prefetching) result in the preliminary determination (see S904 in FIG. 9) based on the winning of the first starting port 121 ("Special Figure 1 "Pattern look-ahead") and is assigned to area 02. The other one is a command (described as "special figure 1 fluctuation pattern prefetching" in the figure) indicating the prefetching (preliminary judgment) result of the fluctuation pattern specified along with the judgment result, and is assigned to the area 03. Furthermore, the other one is a command ("Special figure 1 reservation (+1)" in the figure) indicating that the number of reservations for the special symbol lottery has been updated (here, the value is increased by 1) based on the winning to the first start port 121 ) and is allocated to area 04 .

Areas 05 to 07 are assigned three commands related to the winning of the second starting gate 122 (denoted as "starting gate 2 winning" in the figure). One of the commands related to the winning of the second starting port 122 is a command indicating the determination result in the preliminary determination based on the winning of the second starting port 122 (see S911 in FIG. 9) ) and is assigned to the area 05 . The other one is a command that indicates the result of prefetching of the variation pattern specified along with the determination result (described as "special figure 2 variation pattern prefetching" in the figure), and is assigned to the area 06. Furthermore, the other one is a command ("special figure 2 reservation (+1)" in the figure) indicating that the number of reservations for the special symbol lottery has been updated (here, the value is increased by 1) based on the winning to the second start port 122 ) and is assigned to the area 07 .

In the area 08 to area 010, five commands related to normal pattern lottery described) are assigned. Among the commands relating to the normal design lottery, one of the "normal pattern reservation" commands indicates that the number of reservations of the normal design lottery has been updated (here, the value is increased by 1) based on the game ball passing through the gate 124. It is a command (shown as "normal map hold (+1)" in the figure) and is assigned to area 08. "Normal pattern type" command designates the normal pattern representing the judgment result in the normal pattern lottery, and a command indicating that the normal pattern display 223 has started the variable display (described as "normal pattern fluctuation start" in the figure) and is assigned to area 09 . The "normal pattern confirmation" command is a command indicating that the normal symbol display device 223 is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol lottery, and the normal symbol representing the judgment result of the normal symbol lottery is confirmed ("normal symbol confirmation" in the figure). description) and is assigned to area 09 . The "normal figure open/close" command is a command (described as "normal electric open / close" in the figure) indicating that the electric tulip 123, which is a normal electric accessory, is operated (auxiliary game) based on the determination result of the normal pattern lottery. Yes, and is assigned to region 09. Another one of the "normal pattern hold" command is a command indicating that the number of reservations has been updated (here, the value is decreased by 1) due to the processing of the normal pattern lottery ("normal pattern hold (- 1)”) and is allocated to area 010.

Here, in the processing of the normal symbol lottery, the variable display of the normal symbols, the stop display of the normal symbols, and the operation of the electric tulip 123 by the auxiliary game are sequentially executed as a series of operations. Then, when another game ball passes through the gate 124 while the electric tulip 123 is operating, the variable display of normal symbols is not started (see FIG. 16). Therefore, none of the above three types of commands, ie, "general map type", "general map determination", and "general power open/close" are generated at the same time. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 24-3, these three types of commands are assigned to the same command storage area (area 09).

Areas 011 to 014 are assigned nine commands (described as "special figure variation" and "special figure special electric" in the figure) relating to the special symbol lottery. Among the commands related to the special symbol lottery, one of the "special figure variation" commands is a command ( In the figure, it is described as "game state") and is assigned to the area 011. Another one of the "special symbol variation" commands designates a special symbol representing the determination result of the special symbol lottery in the special symbol lottery, and the variable display of the first special symbol indicator 221 and the second special symbol indicator 222. It is a command (described as "special figure designation" in the figure) that indicates that the has started, and is assigned to the area 012. Still another one of the "special symbol variation" commands is a command (described as "variation pattern" in the figure) specifying the variation pattern of the special symbol variation performed in the special symbol lottery, and is assigned to the area 013. Still another one of the "special figure fluctuation" commands is a command (in the figure, "special figure reservation ( -1)”) and is allocated to area 014.

On the other hand, one of the "special special electric" commands is a command indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state (described as "customer waiting" in the drawing), and is assigned to the area 012. FIG. Another one of the "special figure special electric" commands is a command (in the figure, "special electric “Open”) and allocated to area 012 . Still another one of the "special figure special electric" commands is a command (described as "jackpot OP" in the figure) indicating that the opening operation of the jackpot game has started, and is assigned to the area 012. Still another one of the "special figure special electric" commands is a command (described as "jackpot ED" in the drawing) indicating that the ending operation of the jackpot game has started, and is assigned to the area 012. FIG. Still another one of the "special pattern special electric" commands is to stop and display the first special pattern display device 221 and the second special pattern display device 222, and confirm the special pattern representing the determination result of the special pattern lottery. It is a command shown (described as "special figure confirmation" in the figure) and is assigned to the area 012.

Here, in the processing of the special symbol lottery, the variable display of the special symbols, the stop display of the special symbols, and the operation of the special game opening 125 are sequentially executed as a series of operations. And, during execution of the special game, the variable display of the special symbols based on the winning of other game balls is not started (see FIG. 11). Also, in the jackpot game, the opening operation, the operation of the big winning opening 125, and the ending operation are sequentially executed as a series of operations. Therefore, the "special figure designation" command in the above "special figure variation" command and the five types of "special figure special electric" commands are not generated at the same time. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 24-3, these six types of commands are assigned to the same command storage area (area 012).

Areas 015 to 018 are assigned four commands related to switch detection (denoted as "switch pass" in the figure). One of the commands related to switch detection is a command indicating that a game ball has passed through the gate 124L on the left side of the game area 111 (denoted as "left gate passing" in the figure), and is assigned to the area 015. Another one of the commands related to switch detection is a command indicating that a game ball has passed through the gate 124R on the right side of the game area 111 (described as "right gate passage" in the figure), which is assigned to the area 016. . Still another one of the commands related to switch detection is a command indicating that a game ball has entered the second starting port 122 (described as "starting port SW2 passage (electric chew)" in the figure), which is assigned to area 017. It is Still another one of the commands related to switch detection is a command indicating that a game ball has entered the big winning hole 125 (denoted as “big winning hole win” in the figure), which is assigned to the area 018 .

Areas 019 to 030 are assigned commands relating to errors (denoted as "error" in the figure). Errors detected by the game control unit 200 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 include, for example, a full tank error indicating that the tray 153 (see FIGS. 1 and 2(b)) is filled with balls to be dispensed; A door open error indicating that the frame is in an open state, a payout error indicating that game balls cannot be put out by the payout unit, and various detection switches such as the gate switch 214 and the starter switches 211 and 212 are not activated. There is a switch unconnected error, etc. that indicates that it is connected. In the example shown in FIG. 24-3, these errors are assigned to areas 019 to 023, respectively. Also, for each error, there is a command that indicates the occurrence of each error (indicated as "~ error start" in the figure) and a command that indicates that each error has been resolved (indicated as "~ error end" in the figure). , are assigned to the same command storage area.

In addition, various control items and error items are set according to the specifications and functions of the pachinko game machine 100, and a command corresponding to the control item, a command indicating that an error has occurred, and an error resolution depending on the type of error. It may be configured to generate a command or the like indicating that. These commands can be appropriately assigned to the command storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 24-3, commands relating to various errors are individually assigned to areas 024 to 030. FIG. Also, a command for detecting and notifying a specific winning (denoted as "designation of winning notification" in the drawing) is assigned to the area 031. FIG.

As described above, in the command storage area provided in the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200, one type or a plurality of types of commands are associated with one command storage area. Then, in the main control process shown in FIG. 8, the game control unit 200 stores the generated command in the command storage area associated with the command.
Here, in the main control process, not all commands are necessarily generated each time one cycle of processing is executed. For example, when there is no winning to the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122, the commands related to winning to the starting ports 121 and 122 and the "special figure variation" command are not generated. In addition, among the commands related to the normal symbol lottery, the "normal pattern open/close" command and the "special pattern special electric" command are not generated unless these electric accessories are to be operated. Also, a command related to the occurrence of an error is not generated unless an error has occurred in the first place.
Therefore, when the output process of the main control process (see S806 in FIG. 8) is performed, commands are normally stored in some of the command storage areas provided in the RAM 203. No commands are stored in other command storage areas.

[Command output operation]
FIG. 24-4 is a flow chart showing the content of output processing by the output control unit 240. FIG.
In this embodiment, the output control unit 240 sequentially focuses on the command storage areas of the RAM 203 shown in FIG. .

As shown in FIG. 24-4, the output control unit 240 of the game control unit 200 is, first, among the command storage areas provided in the RAM 203, the first command storage area (area 01 in the example shown in FIG. 24-3) (S2411), and checks whether a command is stored (S2412). And if the command is stored (it is Yes at S2412), the output control part 240 will read the command stored and will output it to the production|presentation control part 300 (S2413).

If no command is stored in the command storage area of interest (initially, area 01) (No in S2412), or after outputting the command stored in the command storage area in S2413, the output control unit 240 , whether or not there is a command storage area with the next area number (S2414). If there is a next command storage area (Yes in S2414), the output control unit 240 focuses on that command storage area (S2415), returns to S2412, confirms whether there is a command (S2412), and outputs (S2413). repeat. When the last command storage area (area 031 in the example shown in FIG. 24-3) is processed, there is no command storage area with the next area number (No in S2414), so the output process ends. do.

[Setting the command output order]
In the main control process, when a command is generated in each process described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 19, normally the generated command is immediately stored in the corresponding command storage area of the RAM 203. That is, commands are generally stored in the command storage area in the order in which the commands were generated.
On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 24-4, in the output processing by the output control unit 240, each command storage area is focused on and stored in a certain order (in the above example, in order of area number). Output command. That is, the commands are output in a specific predetermined order regardless of the order in which the commands were generated. This is because there are cases where it is desirable to transmit specific commands to the production control unit 300 in a specific order in order to prevent confusion in the production control of the production control unit 300 based on commands. That is, since the production control unit 300 executes the production control based on the commands in the order received from the game control unit 200, the difference in the order of receiving the commands may cause confusion such as inconsistency in the production control. , it is necessary to prevent this.

[Operation of production control unit]
Next, the operation of the effect control section 300 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing the operation of the effect control section 300. As shown in FIG.
The operation of the effect control section 300 consists of main processing shown in FIG. 25(a) and interrupt processing shown in FIG. 25(b). Referring to FIG. 25(a), the effect control unit 300 performs initial setting at the time of activation (S2501), and after performing cycle setting of CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) (S2502), according to the set cycle. , While updating the random number used in the effect control (S2503), interrupt processing is accepted.

Interrupt processing is performed periodically according to the cycle set in S2502. Referring to FIG. 25(b), in this interrupt process, the effect control unit 300 receives a command from the game control unit 200 and performs command reception processing (S2511). In this command reception process, the effect contents (effect pattern) are selected. In addition, the effect control unit 300 performs effect button processing for accepting the player's operation of the effect button 161B or the like (S2512). Thereafter, the effect control unit 300 performs command transmission processing for transmitting a command including information on the selected effect pattern to the image/sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 (S2513). As a result, effects such as image display and sound output on the image display unit 114, movement of the movable accessory 115, and light emission of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 are performed.

[Command reception processing by effect control unit]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command reception process (S2511 in FIG. 25(b)).
In this command reception process, the effect control unit 300 first determines whether or not the pre-determination result command and the pending number increase command have been received (S2601). It should be noted that the pre-determined result command and the pending number increase command are set in the starting opening switch process shown in FIG. ) is a command transmitted to the effect control unit 300.
Then, when the effect control unit 300 determines that the pre-determination result command and the pending number increase command are received (Yes in S2601), 1 is added to the pending number value held in the RAM 303 (S2602). Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 performs a pre-determination effect selection process based on the pre-determination result command and the reservation number increase command (S2603). The details of the pre-determination effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not the prior determination result command and the pending number increase command (No in S2601), the effect control unit 300 determines whether the received command is the variation start command (S2604). This variation start command is a command that is set in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 11 in the game control unit 200 (S1111) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output processing (S806) shown in FIG.
When the received command is the variation start command (Yes in S2604), the effect control section 300 executes effect selection processing (S2605). In addition, when the fluctuation start command is received, a random number value for effect control used in the effect selection process is acquired. This random number is a random number that is periodically updated in S2503 of the main processing shown in FIG. 25(a). Details of the effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not the pre-determination result command, the pending number increase command and the variation start command (No in S2601 and S2604), the effect control unit 300 determines whether the received command is the variation stop command (S2606). This fluctuation stop command is a command that is set in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 11 in the game control unit 200 (S1114) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process (S806) shown in FIG.
When the received command is the fluctuation stop command (Yes in S2606), the effect control section 300 executes the process during the end of the fluctuation effect (S2607). In addition, in the processing during the end of the variation production, the production control unit 300 analyzes the received variation stop command and sets the fluctuation production end command for instructing the end of the production of the pattern fluctuation in the RAM303.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a pending number increase command, a variation start command and a variation stop command (No in S2601, S2604 and S2606), the effect control unit 300 starts the opening operation of the jackpot game with the received command It is determined whether or not it is an opening command for opening (S2608). This opening command is a command that is set in the stopped process shown in FIG. 14 (S1418) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process (S806) shown in FIG.
When the received command is an opening command (Yes in S2608), the effect control unit 300 executes a jackpot effect selection process (S2609). Details of the jackpot effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a hold number increase command, a variation start command, a variation stop command and an opening command (No in S2601, S2604, S2606 and S2608), the effect control unit 300 determines that the received command is a jackpot game (S2610). This ending command is a command that is set in the big winning opening process shown in FIG. 17 (S1713) and transmitted to the effect control section 300 in the output process (S806) shown in FIG.
If the received command is an ending command (Yes at S2610), the effect control unit 300 executes ending effect selection processing (S2611). Details of the ending effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a pending number increase command, a variation start command, a variation stop command, an opening command and an ending command (No in S2601, S2604, S2606, S2608 and S2610), then the effect control unit 300 , a customer waiting command reception process for shifting the received command to the customer waiting state is executed (S2612). Details of the customer waiting command reception process will be described later.

FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the contents of the preliminary determination effect selection process (S2603) and the effect selection process (S2605) of FIG.
In the pre-determination effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the pre-determination result command received from the game control unit 200 (S2801). Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 analyzes the pending number increase command received from the game control unit 200 (S2802). Then, the effect control unit 300 selects the effect pattern (predetermined effect pattern) used in the predetermined effect based on the predetermination result command and the pending number increase command (S2803).

Here, as the pre-judgment performance pattern, various performance patterns can be provided that give advance notice of the random number determination result by the special symbol processing before the start of variation based on the random number determination result by the special symbol processing. For example, an effect such as a pending display effect or a continuous advance notice effect can be provided as a pre-determination effect pattern. In the present embodiment, when a reserved ball occurs, a display representing the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 218 and the second special symbol reservation display 219 of the display 130 (see FIG. 2). At the same time, the image display unit 114 performs a hold display suggesting the occurrence of a hold and the number of holds (hold display effect). Therefore, in this holding display effect, by reflecting the preliminary judgment result in the display mode of the holding display, etc., the judgment result when the random number judgment by the special symbol processing is performed after that with respect to the holding ball is sent to the player. It can be a pre-judgment production to suggest.

In addition, although the case where the pending display effect is used as a pre-judgment effect is explained here, by reflecting it in the various effect contents performed before the start of the fluctuation based on the random number determination result by the special symbol processing, a variety of notice effects It becomes possible to do For example, production using the production image displayed on the image display unit 114, production by light emission of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, production by the movement of movable accessories, production by sound output such as music and sound effects, etc. It can be set as a judgment production pattern.

Further, the pre-judgment effect is executed along with the symbol variation for the other winning balls performed prior to the symbol variation for the winning ball (reserved ball) for which the pre-determination has been performed. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of retained balls is four per starting port (first starting port 121 or second starting port 122) (see FIG. 9). Also, priority is given to digestion of the ball held in the second starting port 122 . In this case, for example, if the preliminary determination is made for the held ball with the second starting port 122, before the pattern fluctuation for the held ball is performed, including the fluctuation currently fluctuating (referred to as the fluctuation), Symbol variation is performed for a maximum of four winning balls. In the notice effect related to the reserved ball that has been pre-determined, if multiple pattern changes are performed before the pattern change is performed for the reserved ball, the notice effect that spans the multiple pattern changes (continuous notice effect ).

Then, the effect control unit 300 sets the pending number command including the value of the added pending number and the information of the pre-determined effect pattern selected in the pre-determined effect selection process to the RAM 303 (S2804). In order to notify the CPU 311 of the image/sound control unit 310 of the selected pre-determined effect pattern, the number-of-holds command includes information indicating the pattern. By receiving the pending number command, the CPU 311 creates a display list or the like for causing the VDP 314 to draw and output images and sounds corresponding to the selected pre-determined effect pattern. Based on the display list or the like, the VDP 314 reads image data and sound data for representing the selected pre-determination effect pattern from the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316, and expresses the pre-determination effect using the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156. .

In the effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received variation start command (S2811). Also, 1 is subtracted from the number of reservations held in the RAM 303 (S2812). Then, the effect control unit 300 displays on the image display unit 114 based on various setting information (information such as the type of jackpot, the game state after the jackpot game, and the fluctuation pattern) obtained from the analysis result of the fluctuation start command. A variation production pattern for symbol variation by image is selected (S2813).

Finally, the production control unit 300 sets a variable production start command for instructing the execution start of the selected production in the RAM303 (S2814). The variable effect start command includes information indicating the pattern in order to notify the CPU 311 of the selected variable effect pattern. When the CPU 311 receives the variable effect start command, the VDP 314 draws images and sounds corresponding to the selected variable effect pattern, and creates a display list or the like for output processing. Based on the display list or the like, the VDP 314 reads out image data and sound data for representing the selected variable effect pattern from the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316, and expresses the variable effect using the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156.

Although not described in detail, in the process of selecting a variation performance pattern for symbol variation in S2813, a variation performance pattern is determined based on the variation pattern. Based on the variable effect pattern determined here, the variable display of decorative symbols, the background effect, the advance notice effect, etc. are determined. In addition, the variable display of decorative symbols is effect display performed by the image display unit 114 along with the variable display of the special symbols performed by the first special symbol display device 221 or the second special symbol display device 222 . In the variable display of the decorative symbols, a ready-to-win effect or the like is executed. It should be noted that, unlike the present embodiment, when a plurality of variation production patterns are set for the variation pattern, the production random number (one of the random numbers updated in S2503 of FIG. 25 (a) , Acquire production random value when receiving fluctuation start command) may be used to select a fluctuation production pattern by lottery.

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the content of the jackpot effect selection process (S2609) in FIG.
In this jackpot effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received opening command (including information about the type of the jackpot pattern) (S3001), and selects a pattern of effect (jackpot effect pattern) (S3002). . Then, the effect control unit 300 reads out the image data and sound data used for the effect by the selected big win effect pattern from the ROM 302, sets the big win effect start command instructing the selected effect together with these data in the RAM 303, The jackpot effect selection process is terminated (S3003). As a result, the effect during the big hit is determined. It should be noted that in the selection of the jackpot effect pattern (S3002), determination may be made based on a random number obtained when the command is received.

FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the content of the ending effect selection process (S2611) of FIG.
In this ending effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received ending command (including information about the type of jackpot symbol) (S3101), and selects a pattern of effect (ending effect pattern) (S3102). . Then, the effect control unit 300 reads the image data and sound data used for the effect by the selected ending effect pattern from the ROM 302, sets the ending effect start command for instructing the selected effect together with these data in the RAM 303, Ending effect selection processing is terminated (S3103). It should be noted that in the selection of the ending effect pattern (S3102), determination may be made based on a random number obtained when the command is received.

FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the contents of the customer waiting command reception process (S2612) of FIG.
The effect control unit 300 determines whether or not a customer waiting command for shifting to a customer waiting state has been received (S3201). When the customer waiting command is received (Yes in S3201), the effect control section 300 starts measuring the elapsed time (S3202), and turns ON the measurement flag in the RAM 303 (S3203). On the other hand, if the received command is not a customer waiting command (No in S3201), the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the measurement flag held in the RAM 303 is ON (S3204). If the measurement flag is OFF (No in S3204), the customer waiting command reception process is terminated.

When the measurement flag is ON (after turning ON in Yes or S3203 in S3204), the effect control unit 300 next determines whether the measurement time has reached a predetermined time-up time (for example, 10 seconds). is determined (S3205). If the time has not expired (No in S3205), the customer waiting command reception process is terminated. On the other hand, when the time is up (Yes in S3205), the effect control unit 300 turns off the measurement flag held in the RAM 303 (S3206), and transmits a customer waiting effect command for performing a customer waiting effect (demonstration effect) to the RAM 303. is set to end the customer waiting command reception process (S3207).

When the command reception processing is completed as described above, any one of a variation performance start command, a variation performance end command, a big winning performance start command, an ending performance start command, and a customer waiting performance command is set in the RAM 303. - 特許庁

FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the content of the effect button processing (S2512 in FIG. 25(b)).
In this effect button processing, the effect control unit 300 first determines whether or not the operating means such as the effect button 161B is operated by the player during a predetermined acceptance period (effective period) (S3301). Here, the operation of the operating means includes pressing the effect button 161B to turn it ON, and pressing the center key or the peripheral key of the effect keys 162 to turn it ON. In addition, when an operating device other than the effect button 161B and the effect key 162, such as a touch panel, is provided in the pachinko gaming machine 100, it includes detecting the operation of the device. The effect control unit 300 receives operation signals from the controllers of these devices and detects that an operation has been performed.

If the operation means such as the production button 161B is operated (Yes in S3301), the production control unit 300 sets the production button command including the information indicating the operation content of the operation means in the RAM 303, and ends the production button processing. (S3302).

After that, the effect control unit 300 performs the command transmission process (S2513) in FIG. Send to control unit 320 . Based on the received command, the image/sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 display an image on the image display unit 114, output sound, operate the movable accessory 115, emit light from the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, and the like. to execute the set production.

(Direction operating device)
Next, the configuration of the performance operating device will be described.
FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram of the effect operation device 161 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 32(A), the game frame 150 is provided with an effect operation device 161 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation device 161 is provided on the lower side of the game frame 150 and near the upper tray 153 . In addition, the effect operation device 161 is provided with the above-described effect button 161B (see FIG. 2(b)).
In the following description, the front side of the game frame 150 shown in FIG. 32(A) will be referred to as the "front side", the back side of the page as the "rear side", and these directions will be referred to as the "forward and backward direction". In addition, the right side of the game frame 150 shown in FIG. 32(A) is referred to as the "right side", the left side of the page is referred to as the "left side", and these directions are referred to as the "left and right direction". Further, the upper side of the game frame 150 shown in FIG. 32(A) will be referred to as the "upper side", the lower side of the page will be referred to as the "lower side", and these directions will be referred to as the "vertical direction".
Also, the front side of the game frame 150 is the player side facing the player. The relationship of the directions described above corresponds to the relationship of the directions seen from the player playing the pachinko gaming machine 100 .

The effect operation device 161 of this embodiment is provided so as to be movable in the vertical direction as the game progresses. More specifically, the effect operation device 161 is provided so as to be movable upward from the position shown in FIG. 32(A), as shown in FIG. 32(B). It is provided so as to be movable downward from the position. In addition, below, the state of the production|presentation operating device 161 shown to FIG. 32(A), ie, the state where the production|presentation operating device 161 is not moving upwards, is called a "non-protruding state." Also, the state of the effect operating device 161 shown in FIG. 32(B), that is, the state in which the effect operating device 161 has moved upward is referred to as a "protruding state".

As shown in FIG. 32(B), the effect operation device 161 is provided with a effect lever 161L that can be operated by the player. The player can perform an operation of gripping the production lever 161L and pulling it forward.
When the effect operating device 161 is in the projecting state, the player can operate the effect lever 161L. On the other hand, when the effect operating device 161 is in the non-projecting state (see FIG. 32(A)), the player cannot operate the effect lever 161L. On the other hand, the effect button 161B is provided on the upper part of the effect operation device 161, and the player presses the effect button 161B regardless of whether the effect operation device 161 is in the non-projecting state or the projecting state. can be manipulated.

33 is a partial plan view of the game frame 150. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 33, the game frame 150 includes an effect key 162 (see FIG. 2(b)), a ball lending button 163, a return button 164, a ball removing button 165, a light amount adjustment section 166, and a volume adjustment. a portion 167; In addition, a caution sticker 41 is attached to the game frame 150 to draw the player's attention. The ball lending button 163 , the returning button 164 , the ball removing button 165 , the light amount adjusting section 166 , the volume adjusting section 167 , and the warning sticker 41 are all located on the lower side of the game frame 150 , located nearby.

The production key 162 includes a rear button 162a positioned on the rear side of the production key 162, a front button 162b positioned on the front side of the production key 162, a right button 162c positioned on the right side of the production key 162, and a A left button 162d located on the left side is provided.

The ball lending button 163 is a button for lending game balls. When the player presses the ball lending button 163, the balance stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is subtracted and the game balls are lent.
The return button 164 is a button for returning a storage medium such as a card storing the balance. When the player presses the return button 164, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine.
The ball removal button 165 is a button for moving game balls accumulated in the upper tray 153 to the lower tray. When the player presses the ball removal button 165, the game balls accumulated in the upper tray 153 pass through a passage (not shown) connecting the upper tray 153 and the lower tray and fall to the lower tray.

The light intensity adjustment unit 166 is an operation unit for adjusting the light intensity of various lamps. The light amount adjusting section 166 is provided with an increase button 166a for increasing the light amount and a decrease button 166b for decreasing the light amount. When the player presses the increase button 166a of the light intensity adjustment unit 166, the effect control unit 300 increases the light intensity of various lamps. Further, when the player presses the decrease button 166b of the light intensity adjustment unit 166, the effect control unit 300 reduces the light intensity of various lamps.
Volume adjustment unit 167 is an operation unit for adjusting the volume of sound output from speaker 156 . The volume adjuster 167 is provided with an increase button 167a for increasing the volume and a decrease button 167b for decreasing the volume. When the player presses the increase button 167 a of the volume control unit 167 , the effect control unit 300 increases the volume of the sound output from the speaker 156 . Also, when the player presses the decrease button 167b of the volume control unit 167, the effect control unit 300 decreases the volume of the sound output from the speaker 156. FIG.

Each of the effect button 161B, the effect lever 161L, the effect key 162, the light amount adjustment unit 166, and the sound volume adjustment unit 167 described above is an example of an input device for the player to input the effect. When various input devices are operated, the effect control unit 300 receives an operation signal indicating that the input device has been operated, and detects that the input device has been operated.

The effect operating device 161 of the present embodiment is provided in the central portion of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (see FIG. 1) in the horizontal direction. In addition, the production key 162, the ball lending button 163, the return button 164, the ball removal button 165, the light amount adjustment unit 166, the volume adjustment unit 167, and the warning sticker 41 are all provided on the right side of the production operation device 161. ing. That is, the effect key 162, the ball lending button 163, the returning button 164, the ball removing button 165, the light amount adjusting section 166, the volume adjusting section 167, and the attention seal 41 are all provided on the right side of the pachinko gaming machine 100. there is
In addition, the attention-calling sticker 41 of the present embodiment is provided in the vicinity of the effect operation device 161, the effect key 162, the ball lending button 163, the return button 164, the ball removing button 165, the light amount adjusting section 166, and the volume adjusting section 167. ing.

(Attention sticker)
Next, the warning sticker 41 will be described.
34(A) is a diagram showing the front side of the attention calling sticker 41, and FIG. 34(B) is a diagram showing the back side of the attention calling sticker 41. FIG.
The attention calling seal 41 shown in FIG. 34A includes an operation attention calling portion 410 for calling attention to the operation of the production lever 161L, a lever attention calling portion 411 for calling attention to the presence of the production lever 161L, and an upper role. A character object attention calling unit 412 for calling attention to the existence of the object 5 is provided. In addition, the caution seal 41 includes a caution illustration portion 413 showing a drawing for drawing attention, a general warning mark portion 414 showing a mark for drawing attention, and characters for drawing attention. A caution character portion 419 is provided.

Information for calling the player's attention when operating the production lever 161L is displayed in the operation attention calling portion 410 . More specifically, the operation attention calling unit 410 has a warning that the player unintentionally touches a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the player operates the production lever 161L. information is displayed. In the illustrated example, the operation attention caller 410 displays a text saying "Caution for hand pinching when manipulating the production lever".
When the effect operating device 161 changes from the non-protruding state (see FIG. 32(A)) to the protruding state (see FIG. 32(B)), the player unintentionally pushes the effect lever 161L to the lever attention calling portion 411. Information is displayed to call attention to contact with. In the illustrated example, the lever warning section 411 displays the text "Caution for jumping out of the effect lever".
Information for calling attention to the player's unintentional contact with the upper role 5 when the upper role 5 moves upward is displayed in the role attention calling portion 412 . In the illustrated example, the character object attention calling portion 412 displays the text "Beware of the character object jumping out of the upper part of the frame".

In the caution illustration portion 413, there are displayed a target illustration portion 413L that graphically indicates the object of attention, and an impact illustration portion 413I that allows the player to imagine the impact.
The target illustration portion 413L shows a picture simulating the effect lever 161L, which is the target of attention. More specifically, the target illustration portion 413L shows a picture of a structure similar to but not identical to the structure of the effect lever 161L.
The impact illustration section 413I is provided adjacent to the target illustration section 413L. In this case, the player who sees the attention drawing illustration portion 413 can be made to recognize that the target of attention in the attention drawing seal 41 is the effect lever 161L. Furthermore, the player can be made to imagine that the player may collide with the effect lever 161L or structures near the effect lever 161L.

The mark provided in the general warning mark portion 414 has a display form defined by the ISO standard and the JIS standard. More specifically, the mark provided in the general warning mark portion 414 is a mark defined as a safety sign format in ISO3864 and JIS9101 and for prompting the user to warn. The mark shown in the general warning mark portion 414 is hereinafter referred to as a general warning mark. General warning marks are used together with texts, illustrations, etc. to indicate potential danger, and call attention to the user.
The general warning mark portion 414 includes an exclamation mark 415, an outline 416 having a triangular shape and surrounding the exclamation mark 415, a background portion 417 positioned between the exclamation mark 415 and the outline 416, and a triangular shape. An outline 418 is provided surrounding the outline 416 .

An exclamation mark 415 is provided in the central portion of the general warning mark portion 414 . In the illustrated example, the exclamation mark 415 is shown in black.
Outline 416 is shown in black.
The background portion 417 is indicated by yellow.
Outline 418 is indicated by yellow.
In this way, the general warning mark portion 414 has black, yellow, black, and yellow colors in the order of the exclamation mark 415, the background portion 417, the outline 416, and the outline 418 from the center toward the outside. It has become. In this case, the difference in brightness between yellow and black adjacent to each other in the general warning mark portion 414 is conspicuous, and the presence of the general warning mark portion 414 can be easily noticed by the player. make it easier for people to recognize danger.

The attention calling character portion 419 is provided next to the general warning mark portion 414 and together with the general warning mark portion 414 calls the player's attention. In the illustrated example, the caution character portion 419 shows the text of "caution".

In addition, a notch portion 41N is formed by notching one of the four corners of the rectangle in the attention calling seal 41 . As a result, the length L1 of the first side of the left end of the attention calling sticker 41 is longer than the length L2 of the second side of the right end. In addition, the length L3 of the third side of the upper end of the warning seal 41 is longer than the length L4 of the fourth side of the lower end.

As described above, the caution seal 41 is provided with the operation caution portion 410 and the caution illustration portion 413 . In this case, the player who sees the operation attention calling part 410 and the attention calling illustration part 413 can be made to imagine that there is a risk of the player's hand being caught in the effect lever 161L when operating the effect lever 161L.
Further, the caution seal 41 is provided with a lever caution part 411 and a caution illustration part 413 . In this case, the player who sees the lever attention calling part 411 and the attention calling illustration part 413 may imagine that the player may collide with the effect lever 161L when the effect operation device 161 changes from the non-projecting state to the projecting state. can be made

In addition, as described above, the warning seal 41 is located near the effect button 161B, the effect lever 161L, the effect key 162, the ball lending button 163, the return button 164, the ball removing button 165, the light amount adjustment section 166, and the volume adjustment section 167. is provided in
The effect button 161B, the effect lever 161L, the effect key 162, the ball lending button 163, the return button 164, the ball extracting button 165, the light amount adjusting section 166, and the volume adjusting section 167 are operation means that can be operated by the player. . The vicinity of the area where these operating means are provided is easily within the field of vision of the player when the player operates each operating means. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by providing a warning sticker 41 in an area that is easily visible to the player when the player operates each operation means, the player can be alerted when operating each operation means. This makes it easy for the player to notice the presence of the sticker 41.例文帳に追加

In addition, the attention calling seal 41 is provided with a role item attention calling portion 412 . That is, the attention calling seal 41 of the present embodiment not only calls attention to the production lever 161L, but also calls attention to the upper accessory 5. FIG. In other words, the alert sticker 41 includes information for alerting each of a plurality of attention objects. In this case, compared with the case where the pachinko game machine 100 is provided with an attention calling sticker 41 for each object of attention, the pachinko game machine 100 is prevented from being spoiled in terms of the design of the pachinko game machine 100, and the object of caution to the player. A warning can be issued for each

Further, the attention calling seal 41 does not call attention to the performance button 161B of the performance operation device 161, but calls attention to the performance lever 161L. In this case, even if the effect button 161B and the effect lever 161L are integrally provided in the effect operation device 161, the player who sees the caution seal 41 will be notified of the target part of the effect operation device 161. becomes easier to recognize.

Note that the configuration of the alert seal 41 is not limited to the above example. For example, the caution illustration portion 413 may not be provided on the caution seal 41 . In this case, the background color of the caution sticker 41 may be black. In other words, the color of the portion of the caution seal 41 where the operation caution section 410, the lever caution section 411, the character article section 412, the general warning mark section 414, and the caution character section 419 are not provided. may be black. Furthermore, the text shown in the operation attention calling portion 410, the lever attention calling portion 411, the character attention calling portion 412, and the attention calling text portion 419 may be white. In this case, only the general warning mark portion 414 of the caution seal 41 has a yellow portion, and the other portion different from the general warning mark portion 414 is white or black. Therefore, the general warning mark portion 414 is more conspicuous than when the background of the caution seal 41 and the text indicated on the caution seal 41 are yellow, and a general warning is issued to the player who sees the caution seal 41. This makes it easier for the user to notice the presence of the mark portion 414 .

Next, the back side of the attention calling sticker 41 will be described.
One side of the rear surface of the caution seal 41 is an adhesive surface (adhesive surface) for bonding to the game frame 150 . Then, the entire back surface of this alert sticker 41 is attached to the game frame 150 . In other words, the caution seal 41 is stuck to the game frame 150 without sticking the adhesive surfaces to each other.
When the operator who attaches the caution seal 41 to the pachinko game machine 100 views the caution seal 41 from the back side, as shown in FIG. visible to workers. Although the color of the exclamation mark 415 and the outline 416 cannot be seen through to the operator, the exclamation mark 415 is surrounded by the background portion 417 and the outline 416 is sandwiched between the background portion 417 and the outline 418. , exclamation mark 415 and outline 416 are visible to the operator. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the operator who sees the caution seal 41 from the back side to notice that the general warning mark portion 414 is displayed on the caution seal 41 . In this case, it becomes easy for the operator to recognize that the attention-calling sticker 41 is a sticker to be stuck on the pachinko game machine 100 for calling attention, and the operator does not forget to stick the attention-calling sticker 41 to the pachinko game machine 100.例文帳に追加can be suppressed.

The color of the exclamation mark 415 and the color of the outline 416 are set so that the operator can see through the color of the exclamation mark 415 and the color of the outline 416 when the operator views the caution sticker 41 from the back side. may be applied. In other words, when the operator views the caution sticker 41 from the back side, at least the color of the yellow part of the caution sticker 41 can be seen through by the operator.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a configuration of a portion of the game frame 150 to which the caution seal 41 is attached and a portion in the vicinity thereof.
As shown in FIG. 35(A-1), the game frame 150 is provided with an adhered portion 168 to which the caution seal 41 is adhered. The adhered portion 168 is made of a material that does not transmit light. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light from various lamps from penetrating through the attached portion 168 and the caution seal 41 and entering the player's eyes, thereby making it difficult for the player to recognize the display contents of the caution seal 41 .

In addition, the game frame 150 is provided with a concave portion 169 having a hollow. This recessed portion 169 has the same shape as the outer shape of the attention calling seal 41 and is provided slightly wider than the attention calling seal 41 . The adhered portion 168 is provided on the bottom surface of the recess 169 .
When the operator sticks the attention-calling sticker 41 so that the attention-calling sticker 41 fits on the bottom surface of the recess 169, the attention-calling sticker 41 is attached to the attached portion 168 as shown in FIG. 35(A-2). be done. Thus, according to the configuration in which the caution seal 41 is attached to the bottom surface of the recess 169 , the operator can easily position the caution seal 41 with respect to the game frame 150 . In addition, the caution sticker 41 attached to the attached portion 168 is less likely to be peeled off.

Note that the configuration in the vicinity of the adhered portion 168 is not limited to that shown in FIG. 35(A-1).
As shown in FIG. 35(B-1), instead of the concave portion 169, the game frame 150 may be provided with a first convex portion 170 and a second convex portion 171 that protrude. Both the first protrusion 170 and the second protrusion 171 are L-shaped. Also, the first convex portion 170 is provided so as to surround the left end and the front end of the adhered portion 168 . Furthermore, the second convex portion 171 is provided so as to surround the right end and the rear end of the adhered portion 168 .
When the worker attaches the attention-calling sticker 41 so that the attention-calling sticker 41 fits between the first convex portion 170 and the second convex portion 171, the attention-calling sticker 41 is shown in FIG. 35(B-2). As shown, it is attached to the attached portion 168 . Thus, even with the configuration in which the caution seal 41 is attached between the first convex portion 170 and the second convex portion 171, the operator can easily position the caution seal 41 with respect to the game frame 150. can be made

Further, as shown in FIG. 35(C-1), the game frame 150 may be provided with a projecting third convex portion 172 . The third convex portion 172 is formed so as to surround the adhered portion 168 .
When the worker attaches the caution seal 41 so that the caution seal 41 is fitted in the area surrounded by the third convex portion 172, the caution seal 41 is as shown in FIG. 35(C-2). It is attached to the attached portion 168 . Thus, even with the configuration in which the caution seal 41 is affixed to the area surrounded by the third convex portion 172 , the operator can easily position the caution seal 41 with respect to the game frame 150 . . In addition, the caution sticker 41 attached to the attached portion 168 is less likely to be peeled off.

In particular, according to the configuration of the concave portion 169 shown in FIG. 35A-1 and the configuration of the third convex portion 172 shown in FIG. affixed so as to fit inside the Further, as described above, the attention calling sticker 41 has a first side length L1 (see FIG. 34A) longer than a second side length L2, and a third side length L3. is longer than the length L4 of the fourth side. In this case, for example, when the worker tries to attach the attention-calling sticker 41 in a state in which the top, bottom, left, and right of the attention-calling sticker 41 are reversed, the attention-calling sticker 41 does not fit inside the area where the unevenness is provided. The warning sticker 41 cannot be attached. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the caution seal 41 from being attached to a region deviated from the attached portion 168 .

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example in which the worker sticks the caution seal 41 to the game frame 150 using a jig.
As shown in FIG. 36A, the warning sticker 41 may be attached to the attached portion 168 provided on a flat surface having no irregularities around it. In this case, the worker may use a jig J to attach the caution seal 41 as shown in FIG. 36(B).

The jig J has a first fixing portion J1 and a second fixing portion J2 for fixing the jig J to the game frame 150, and a flat surface which is movable with respect to the first fixing portion J1 and the second fixing portion J2. and a part J3. In addition, an opening J4 having an opening in the shape of the attention-calling sticker 41 is formed in the plane portion J3.
When the operator uses the jig J to attach the caution seal 41 to the attached portion 168, the first fixing portion J1 is fixed to the right end portion of the game frame 150, and the second fixing portion J2 is placed in the game frame. It is fixed to the front end of the frame 150 . Then, in a state in which the flat portion J3 is positioned so that the opening portion J4 overlaps the portion to be stuck 168, the operator sticks the attention-calling sticker 41 to the game frame 150 through the opening portion J4. 4, the caution seal 41 is attached to the attached portion 168. As shown in FIG. Even in this case, the operator can easily position the caution sticker 41 with respect to the game frame 150 .

Next, the positional relationship between the production lever 161L, the handle 151, and the attention calling sticker 41 will be described.
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the effect lever 161L, the handle 151, and the caution seal 41. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 37(A), the attention calling sticker 41 is located on the right side of the production lever 161L and on the left side of the handle 151. As shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, the caution seal 41 is provided at a position between the effect lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, for example, even when the player operates the handle 151 with the right hand and operates the effect lever 161L with the left hand, the player's body is placed between the player's eyes and the caution sticker 41. It becomes difficult to enter, and the attention-calling seal 41 easily enters the field of view of the player. Therefore, when the player looks at the production lever 161L to operate the production lever 161L during the operation of the handle 151, the player is easily made aware of the existence of the attention calling seal 41, and the attention calling seal to the player. 41 can be alerted.

Here, "between the production lever 161L and the handle 151" includes the space between the left end 161LL of the production lever 161L and the right end 151R of the handle 151. That is, "between the production lever 161L and the handle 151" includes between the tip of one side and the tip of the other side of the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the horizontal direction. In this embodiment, the attention calling seal 41 is provided at a position between the central portion 161LC of the production lever 161L in the horizontal direction and the central portion 151C of the handle 151 in the horizontal direction.

Also, the position where the caution seal 41 is attached is not limited to the position shown in FIG. 37(A).
For example, the attention calling seal 41 may be provided so as to be positioned between the right tip 161LR of the production lever 161L and the left tip 151L of the handle 151 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 37(B), a part 41P of the caution seal 41 may be provided between the left tip 161LL of the effect lever 161L and the right tip 151R of the handle 151. . In other words, "the attention calling seal 41 is provided at a position between the production lever 161L and the handle 151" means that the part 41P of the attention calling seal 41 is positioned between the production lever 161L and the handle 151, and the attention is paid. It is also included that another part of the evocation seal 41 is provided so as not to be located between the production lever 161L and the handle 151. - 特許庁Even in this case, when the player looks at the effect lever 161L in order to operate the effect lever 161L during operation of the handle 151, the part 41P of the attention calling sticker 41 becomes easily visible to the player. . Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to notice the existence of the attention-calling sticker 41, and the player's attention can be called by the attention-calling sticker 41.例文帳に追加
Further, the attention calling seal 41 may be provided at a position above the production lever 161L and the handle 151 as long as it is between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction.

Further, the two operation means provided on both sides of the attention calling seal 41 in the left-right direction are not limited to the production lever 161L and the handle 151 . For example, in the horizontal direction, between each of the production key 162, the ball lending button 163, the return button 164, the ball removal button 165, the light amount adjustment unit 166, and the volume adjustment unit 167, and the production lever 161L, a warning sticker 41 is placed. may be provided. Also, the take-out button 155 (see FIG. 1) may be provided on the right side of the pachinko game machine 100, and the caution seal 41 may be provided between the take-out button 155 and the production lever 161L in the horizontal direction.

Here, the production lever 161L can be regarded as first operating means that can be operated by the player. Also, each of the handle 151, take-out button 155, production button 161B, production key 162, ball lending button 163, return button 164, ball removal button 165, light amount adjustment unit 166, and volume adjustment unit 167 can be operated by the player. and can be regarded as a second operation means different from the first operation means. Furthermore, when the production lever 161L is regarded as the first operation means and the production button 161B is regarded as the second operation means, the handle 151, the take-out button 155, the production key 162, the ball lending button 163, the return button 164, the ball removal button 165, the light amount adjustment unit 166, and the volume adjustment unit 167 can be regarded as third operation means that can be operated by the player and that is different from the first operation means and the second operation means.
Also, the attention-calling sticker 41 can be regarded as an attention-calling means for calling the player's attention.

(Modified example of alerting means)
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a modified example of alerting means.
In the present embodiment, it has been described that the player is alerted by the alert sticker 41, which is an example of the alerting means. Here, the alerting means is not limited to the alerting sticker 41 .

Instead of the caution seal 41, the game frame 150 may be provided with a caution part 42 as shown in FIG. 38(A). The alert section 42 is provided by printing on the game frame 150 . Thus, the alerting means may not be a sticker.

The attention calling part 42 is provided near each of the production lever 161L, the production key 162, the ball lending button 163, the return button 164, the ball removal button 165, the light amount adjustment part 166, and the volume adjustment part 167. The attention calling part 42 includes a lever attention calling part 421 calling attention to the operation of the production lever 161L, a damage attention calling part 422 calling attention to damage to the production lever 161L, and a general warning with a general warning mark. A mark portion 423 is provided. Further, the attention calling portion 42 is provided with a laminate portion 427 laminated on one surface of the attention calling portion 42 .

Information for calling the player's attention when operating the production lever 161L is displayed in the lever attention calling portion 421 . In the illustrated example, the lever warning section 421 displays a text "Caution for effect lever operation".
Information for calling attention that the production lever 161L will be damaged is displayed in the damage alert section 422 . More specifically, the breakage warning unit 422 is provided with a message for calling attention to the possibility that the effect lever 161L may be damaged when the player operates the effect lever 161L without paying attention to it. information is displayed. In the illustrated example, the breakage warning section 422 displays a text saying "If you operate it too hard, you may break it." In this case, if the player sees the lever attention calling part 421 and the breakage attention calling part 422 and operates without paying attention to the effect lever 161L, the effect lever 161L may be damaged. You can imagine something.

The general warning mark portion 423 includes an exclamation point 424, an outline 425 having a triangular shape and surrounding the exclamation mark 424, and a background portion 426 positioned between the exclamation point 424 and the outline 425. . Thus, the general warning mark provided on the alert means may not be provided with an outline surrounding the outline 425 .

An exclamation point 424 is shown in black at the center of the general warning mark portion 423 .
Outline 425 is shown in black.
The background portion 426 is indicated by the same color as the game frame 150 .
In addition, portions of the attention calling portion 42 where the lever attention calling portion 421, the breakage attention calling portion 422, and the general warning mark portion 423 are not provided are shown in the same color as the game frame 150. FIG. Furthermore, the laminate portion 427, which will be described later, is colorless. In this case, the presence of the attention calling part 42 in the pachinko gaming machine 100 becomes less conspicuous, and the attention of the player can be called while suppressing the deterioration of the design of the pachinko gaming machine 100 .

The laminate part 427 of this embodiment is made of a resin material. By laminating the laminated part 427 on one surface of the attention calling part 42, for example, when the attention calling part 42 is scratched by the player, the information displayed on the attention calling part 42 is suppressed from being erased. can.
Note that the configuration of the laminated portion 427 may be provided on the caution seal 41 (see FIG. 34(A)). More specifically, a protective layer for protecting the information displayed on the caution seal 41 may be laminated on one surface of the layer on which the information is displayed on the caution seal 41 . That is, not only the protective layer is provided on the attention calling means having a configuration in which the game frame 150 is printed, but also the attention calling means as a sticker may be provided with the protective layer.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38(B), the game slot 150 may be provided with a role product attention calling sticker 43 for calling attention to the upper role product 5 . The role item attention calling sticker 43 is attached to a position between the speaker 156 (see FIG. 1) and the frame lamp 157 in the game frame 150 . That is, the role object attention calling sticker 43 is attached near the upper role object 5 (see FIG. 1).
The role object attention calling seal 43 includes an attention calling character portion 431 showing characters calling attention, a role object attention calling portion 432 calling attention to the existence of the upper role object 5, and general warning marks respectively. Two general warning mark portions 433 are provided. Also, the character attention calling sticker 43 is provided with a frame line portion 438 surrounding the attention calling character portion 431 , the character attention calling portion 432 , and the two general warning mark portions 433 .

The caution character portion 431 is provided at a position between two general warning mark portions 433 in the left-right direction. The attention calling character portion 431 together with the general warning mark portion 433 calls the player's attention. In the illustrated example, the text of "caution" is displayed in the caution character portion 431 .
Information for calling attention to the player's unintentional contact with the upper role 5 when the upper role 5 moves is displayed in the role attention calling portion 432 . In the illustrated example, the character object warning portion 432 displays the text "A character object will pop out from the top of the frame. Be careful not to hit your head."

The general warning mark portion 433 includes an exclamation mark 434, an outline 435 having a triangular shape and surrounding the exclamation mark 434, a background portion 436 positioned between the exclamation mark 434 and the outline 435, and a triangular shape. An outline 437 is provided surrounding the outline 435 .

An exclamation point 434 is shown in black at the center of the general warning mark portion 433 .
Outline 435 is shown in black.
The background portion 436 is indicated by yellow.
Outline 437 is shown in white. Thus, the color of the outline in the general warning mark portion is not limited to yellow like the outline 418 in the warning sticker 41 (see FIG. 34(A)).

A border 438 is shown in white. The frame line portion 438 surrounds the attention calling character portion 431, the character object attention calling portion 432, and the two general warning mark portions 433, so that the information shown inside the frame line portion 438 can be displayed as the character object attention calling sticker 43. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the information is for calling attention.

Both the attention calling part 42 (see FIG. 38(A)) and the character attention calling sticker 43 can be regarded as an attention calling means for calling the player's attention. In the modified example, the attention calling part 42 is attached near the production lever 161L, and the character attention calling sticker 43 is attached near the upper accessory 5 . In addition, the attention calling part 42 makes the production lever 161L the object of attention, but does not make the upper accessory 5 the object of attention. Furthermore, the role object attention calling sticker 43 makes the upper role object 5 the object of attention, but does not make the production lever 161L the object of attention. In this way, in the case where an alerting means corresponding to the vicinity of each attention object is provided, and in which one attention alerting means includes information for alerting each of a plurality of attention objects Compared to , it is easier for the player to recognize the attention object of the attention calling means.

Note that the texts displayed on the caution seal 41, the caution part 42, and the character object caution seal 43 are all displayed in a gothic style.
In addition, when using the attention calling means, any one of the components such as the text, picture, general warning mark, etc. shown in the attention calling sticker 41, the attention calling part 42, and the character attention calling sticker 43 should be used as a warning. It may be displayed on the alerting means. In this case, the display mode of the components displayed on the attention calling means is any one of the display modes of the components indicated by the attention caller sticker 41, the attention caller 42, and the character object attention caller sticker 43. It may be an aspect.

(Displacement amount of operating means)
Next, the amount of displacement of the production button 161B and the amount of displacement of the production lever 161L will be described.
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the amount of displacement of the production button 161B and the amount of displacement of the production lever 161L.
The effect button 161B shown in FIG. 39(A-1) is in a state where it is not touched by the player. In this state, when the player presses the effect button 161B, the effect button 161B can be displaced by a distance M1 as shown in FIG. 39(A-2).

The production lever 161L shown in FIG. 39(B-1) is in a state where it is not in contact with the player. In this state, when the player grabs the effect lever 161L and pulls it forward, the effect lever 161L can be displaced by a distance M2 as shown in FIG. 39(B-2).

Thus, in this embodiment, the distance over which the effect lever 161L can be displaced by the player's operation is longer than the distance over which the effect button 161B can be displaced by the player's operation.
In this case, since the effect lever 161L has a longer displaceable distance than the effect button 161B, the player's operation of the effect lever 161L is more likely to gain momentum. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution seal 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the effect lever 161L in order to operate the effect lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the attention call sticker 41, and the attention call sticker 41 is displayed on the player. You can call attention by Therefore, even when the displaceable distance of the effect lever 161L is long, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally contacting a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

Although illustration is omitted, in this embodiment, the distance by which the effect lever 161L can be displaced by the player's operation is the distance by which the takeout button 155 can be displaced by the player's operation, and the effect key 162 by the player's operation. can be displaced, the distance that the ball lending button 163 can be displaced by the player's operation, the distance that the return button 164 can be displaced by the player's operation, the distance that the ball withdrawal button 165 can be displaced by the player's operation, It is longer than both the distance over which the light amount adjustment unit 166 can be displaced by the player's operation and the distance over which the volume adjustment unit 167 can be displaced by the player's operation.

(Modified example of production lever 161L)
Next, an effect lever 161L of a modified example will be described.
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a modification lever 161L.
As shown in FIG. 40, the effect button 161B is provided in the central portion of the game frame 150 in the horizontal direction. On the other hand, the effect lever 161L is provided on the left side of the effect button 161B in the horizontal direction. Thus, the effect lever 161L may be provided as a separate body from the effect button 161B. Even in this case, the caution seal 41 is provided at a position between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction.

(Variation effect pattern table)
41 and 42 are diagrams showing setting examples of the variable effect patterns and tables used in the variable effect pattern selection (S2813) in the effect selection process of FIG. 27(b). In addition, FIG. 41 shows a variation effect pattern table for big hits in the low probability time saving no-game state, and FIG.

A plurality of variable performance patterns are set in the variable performance pattern table for big win shown in FIG. For the variation patterns “PA1” to “PA6”, “PB1” to “PB14”, and “PC1 to PC2” set using FIG. 21 above, the variation production patterns “EA1” to “EA6”, “ EB1” to “EB14” and “EC1 to EC2” are associated on a one-to-one basis.
In addition, a plurality of variable performance patterns are set in the variable performance pattern table for small hits and losses shown in FIG. With respect to the variation patterns "PD1 to PD2" and "PR1" to "PR10" set using FIG. are mapped.

Here, the variable performance is a performance for visually notifying the determination result of the special symbol lottery (that is, whether or not the player has won a big hit) by displaying the decorative symbols in a variable manner and then stopping the display.
In addition, in the variable production pattern shown, "Pseudo continuous number", "Normal", "SP reach", "SPSP reach", "Final display color", "Promotion", "Production button", "Production lever" An effect is executed while combining one or more of them. In addition, "-" in each column of the illustrated table indicates that the corresponding effect is not executed. Also, descriptions different from "-" in each column of the illustrated table indicate that the corresponding effect is executed.

Here, the "pseudo-continuous number" is the number of pseudo-continuous effects (pseudo-runs). This pseudo-continuous production is a production that makes it appear as if a plurality of times of variable display of the decorative symbols is being performed in the variable display of the special symbols for one variation. In the pseudo-continuous effect, the effect control section 300 temporarily stops the decorative symbols after varying the decorative symbols before entering the ready-to-win state, and then restarts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In other words, in the pseudo-continuous effect, after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, the temporary stop and re-fluctuation of the decorative pattern are repeated for the set pseudo-continuous number of times, and then the fixed stop is performed. End the variable display. Here, the term "temporary stop" refers to a pseudo-stopped state in which the decorative patterns appear to be stopped at first glance, but actually the patterns are slightly swaying. In other words, the temporary stop of the decorative symbols is treated as a continuous variation in terms of game control. Further, the determination and stoppage of the decorative symbols means a state in which the special symbols are determined as the stopped symbols in the variable display for one variation of the special symbols.
In the illustrated example, the "pseudo-continuous number" is set to "-", "1", "2", "3", that is, between 0 and 3 times. In addition, the pseudo-continuous number of times is set in association with the degree of expectation (reliability), which is the degree of expectation for a big win. That is, the degree of expectation is set to be higher as the number of pseudo consecutive times is larger.

"Normal" indicates the type of ready-to-win effect. In the illustrated example, one of "N1", "N2", and "N3" is executed as the type of ready-to-win effect.
"SP reach" indicates the type of SP reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3" is executed as the type of SP ready-to-win effect. In addition, the order of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3" is set such that the higher the number, the higher the degree of expectation.
"SPSP reach" indicates the type of SPSP reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "SPSP1", "SPSP2" and "SPSP3" is executed as the type of SPSP ready-to-win effect. In addition, the order of "SPSP1", "SPSP2", and "SPSP3" is set such that the higher the number, the higher the degree of expectation.

"Final display color" indicates the final display color of a variable image (described later) by the change effect. The change effect is a effect that changes the display mode of the variable image. More specifically, the change effect is a effect of changing the display color, pattern, shape, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “display color, etc.”) of the variable image. In this embodiment, by changing the display color of the variable image, the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot is notified or suggested to the player. The change effect of the variable image can be executed based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process. In the illustrated example, one of "blue", "green" and "red" is selected as the final display color. For example, in the order of blue, green, and red, the final display color of the variation image may be set such that the later the order, the higher the degree of expectation.

"Promotion" means that after temporarily stopping the decorative pattern that informs that the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a big hit, the effect is changed to a decorative pattern that informs that the game state will be more advantageous for the player ( Promotion production, re-lottery production). In this promotion effect, for example, after the decorative symbol "444" is temporarily stopped, the decorative symbol "777" is displayed as the stop symbol.

"Production button" indicates the type of button operation production. The button operation effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 161B. In the illustrated example, either "BU1" or "BU2" is executed as the type of button operation effect.

The production button 161B has a plurality of production modes. The effect mode of the effect button 161B includes, for example, a luminescent color mode of the effect button 161B, a blinking light emission mode of the effect button 161B, a vibration mode of the effect button 161B, and the like. Examples of the mode of the emission color of the effect button 161B include a mode in which the effect button 161B emits red light, a mode in which the effect button 161B emits white light, and the like. As a mode of flashing light emission of the production button 161B, there is a mode in which the production button 161B flashes light in one of a plurality of flashing patterns. As a mode of vibrating the effect button 161B, for example, there is a mode of vibrating the effect button 161B according to any one of a plurality of vibration patterns.
The production button 161B becomes a production mode according to the type of button operation production during execution of the button operation production.

Further, as execution timings of the button operation presentation, "before temporary stop", "in normal", "at SP reach", "at SP SP reach", and "at promotion promotion" are provided.
"Before temporary stop" means the timing after the start of variation of the decorative symbols and before any of the decorative symbols is temporarily stopped.
"Normal time" means the timing when the ready-to-win effect is being executed and neither the SP ready-to-win effect nor the SPSP ready-to-win effect is being executed.
"At the time of SP reach" means the timing during execution of SP reach performance.
"At the time of SPSP reach" means the timing during execution of the SPSP reach performance.
“At the time of the promotion-inciting effect” means the timing during execution of the promotion-inciting effect. The promotion-inciting production is a production to incite whether or not to be promoted.

"Production lever" indicates the type of lever operation production. The lever operation effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect lever 161L. In the illustrated example, "LE1" is executed as the lever operation effect. That is, while a plurality of types of presentation modes are provided as the button operation presentation, one type of presentation mode is provided as the lever operation presentation. The effect lever 161L becomes a specific effect mode during execution of the lever operation effect. Specific production modes include, for example, a mode in which the production lever 161L emits light in a specific color, a mode in which the production lever 161L flashes and emits light in a specific flashing pattern, and a mode in which the production lever 161L vibrates in a specific vibration pattern. .
In addition, as the execution timing of the lever operation presentation, "at the time of SPSP reach" and "at the time of promotion fanning presentation" are provided.

Now, the effect control section 300 determines a variable effect pattern based on the tables shown in FIGS. 41 and 42. FIG. Specifically, the effect control unit 300 selects a variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 13) based on the tables shown in FIGS.
For example, in FIG. 41, when the "big win symbol" is "high probability symbol A" and the variation pattern is "PB1", "EB1" is selected as the variation effect pattern. In this variable effect pattern "EB1", the "pseudo-continuous number" is "-", that is, the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed. Also, "N1" is executed as "normal", "SP1" is executed as "SP reach", and "SPSP1" is executed as "SPSP reach". Also, the "final display color" is red, "promotion" is executed, "BU1" is executed as the "production button" in "normal", and "BU2" is executed as the "production button" in "SPSP reach". is executed, and "LE1" is executed as the "production lever" at the time of "during promotion promotion production".
In this embodiment, it has been described that "-" in each column of the tables shown in FIGS. 41 and 42 indicates that the corresponding effect is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Depending on the model of the pachinko gaming machine 100, even when "-" is shown in the column of the table shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the corresponding effect may be executed.

(Directed image)
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing one aspect of the variable production of the decorative pattern 61 performed by the production control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. As shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 43 , the effect image is displayed on the image display unit 114 under the control of the effect control unit 300 . In this embodiment, the effect images include a decorative pattern 61, a variable image 51, a pending image 52, a pending number display 55, and a small pattern 56. FIG. Further, the image display unit 114 displays a change tilt image 530 , a button operation image 531 , an expected image 532 , a pseudo consecutive number image 533 , an SP reach image 534 , an SPSP reach image 535 , a lever tilt pre-stage image 536 , and a lever tilt post-stage image 537 . , a lever operation image 538, a promotion image 539, a button image 540, and a right hitting image 542 may be displayed.
Each of these effect images will be described below.

(Decorative pattern 61)
As shown in FIG. 43(1), three decorative designs 61 are displayed on the image display section 114 . The three decorative patterns 61 are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. When the three decorative patterns 61 are individually described, the pattern arranged on the left side is the "left decorative pattern 61", the pattern arranged in the center is the "middle decorative pattern 61", and the pattern arranged on the right side. The pattern is called a "right decorative pattern 61".

The effect control unit 300 , in the variable effect of the decorative symbols 61, variably displays the three decorative symbols 61 by, for example, vertical scrolling, and then temporarily stops the left decorative symbol 61 (for example, the number "4"). Next, the right decorative pattern 61 (for example, the number "6") is temporarily stopped, then the middle decorative pattern 61 (for example, the number "5") is temporarily stopped, and finally all the decorative patterns 61 are fixed and stopped. Incidentally, the combination "456" of the decorative symbols 61 that are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the display mode of the decorative pattern 61, a highly decorative display mode (see FIG. 43 (1)) in which characters such as numbers and images of characters are displayed, and a display mode in which numbers and the like are displayed. There is also a low-decorative display mode (see FIG. 48-1(1)) in which characters are mainly displayed. Here, the display mode of the decorative pattern 61 is switched according to the change of the game state, the progress of the production, or the like. Although details will be described later, for example, the decorative pattern 61 with low decorativeness is displayed in SP reach production, SPSP reach production, and high probability time-saving game state etc., and the decorative pattern 61 with low decorativeness is displayed in cases other than these be done.

(Variation image 51)
As shown in FIG. 43(1), the image display unit 114 displays that the special symbol is fluctuating (decorative symbol 61 is displayed fluctuating) by the special symbol variation control unit 233 (see FIG. 5, etc.). A variation image 51 shown is displayed. Then, the variable image 51 starts to be displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed (in the illustrated example, the lower central portion of the display area of the image display unit 114) when the variable display of the special symbol is started. The display disappears when the fluctuation of the pattern stops. A variable pedestal is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed.

Here, the display mode of the variation image 51 is determined based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process. In addition, the variation image 51 may inform or suggest the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot based on the result of preliminary determination by the preliminary determination process by changing the display mode such as the display color.

(Holding image 52)
As shown in FIG. 43(1), the image display unit 114 displays a pending image 52 based on the information in the storage area corresponding to the current pending ball in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3 and the like). In other words, the pending image 52 is an image indicating that the right to judge the jackpot is suspended. Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the pending image 52 on the screen is determined based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process.
In addition, a variable pedestal is displayed in the area where the reserved image 52 is displayed. The variable pedestal of the variable image 51 and the variable pedestal of the reserved image 52 are displayed in different modes.

In addition, the pending image 52 notifies or suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot by changing the display mode such as the display color based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process. Here, the display mode such as the display color of the pending image 52 is set to be a type of display mode with a higher degree of expectation in the case where the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination process is a big hit than in the case of a loss. ing. For example, when white, blue, green, and red are set as the colors of the pending image 52, the expectations may be set higher in this order.

Further, in the present embodiment, the suspended image 52 and the variable image 51 are basically configured in the same or similar form. However, the form may differ between the reserved image 52 and the variable image 51 or between the plurality of reserved images 52 according to the content of the effect or the progress of the effect.

(hold number display 55)
As shown in FIG. 43(1), the image display unit 114 displays a pending number display 55 based on the information in the storage area corresponding to the pending ball in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3, etc.). This pending number display 55 is an image showing the pending number. Here, the number of pending images 52 displayed on the image display unit 114 changes according to the number of pending prizes for the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 .

(small pattern 56)
Here, the display position, display size, design, etc. of the decorative pattern 61 may change, for example, as the variable effect progresses. Also, the decorative pattern 61 may be entirely or partially hidden by the movable accessory 115 that is movable with respect to the display screen of the image display section 114 . In such a case, it may be difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbols originally intended to inform the player that the special symbols are being variably displayed.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, by displaying the small pattern 56 on the display screen of the image display unit 114, the player is informed that the special pattern is being variably displayed. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, by displaying the small pattern 56, the notification of the determination result of the big hit by the decorative pattern 61 and the type of the big winning pattern indicated by the decorative pattern 61 are assisted. .
In the embodiment, the small pattern 56 is displayed on the display screen of the image display section 114 in such a manner that the player can always see it. In other words, the small pattern 56 is not entirely or partially hidden by other images, the movable accessory 115, or the like.

As shown in FIG. 43 ( 1 ), the small pattern 56 is composed of three patterns corresponding to the decorative pattern 61 . The three small patterns 56 are arranged in the vertical direction at the right corner of the image display area of the image display section 114 . The small pattern 56 is displayed as an image whose display size is smaller than that of the decorative pattern 61.例文帳に追加Further, as described above, the decorative pattern 61 may be displayed in a highly decorative display mode or in a low decorative display mode, but the small pattern 56 may be displayed in a low decorative display mode. Only displayed in
It should be noted that the small patterns 56 are not limited to one pair provided in the image display section 114 with three patterns as one pair. For example, two or more pairs of small patterns 56 may be displayed simultaneously on the image display section 114 .

(Change fanning image 530)
As shown in FIG. 44( 2 ), the image display section 114 displays a change hint image 530 that indicates whether or not the display mode of the variation image 51 will change. The variation image 530 is displayed in part of the display area of the variation image 51 . Variation image 530 may be displayed in any color, including colors that may be displayed as variation image 51 . In addition, when the change-over image 530 is displayed, the display area of the change-over image 530 may be widened or narrowed. Further, the change-inducing image 530 is not limited to an image of a specific color as long as it is an effect image that acts on the changing image 51 in order to change the display mode such as the display color of the changing image 51 . In addition, the change-stirring image 530 may act not only on the change image 51 but also on the pending image 52 .

(Button operation image 531)
As shown in FIG. 44(5), the image display section 114 displays a button operation image 531 prompting the player to operate the effect button 161B. By displaying this button operation image 531, the player can recognize that it is time to operate the effect button 161B. In the illustrated example, as the button operation image 531, an image imitating the effect button 161B is displayed. Also, in the button operation image 531, a gauge is displayed that indicates the period during which the operation of the effect button 161B is valid.

(Expected image 532)
As shown in FIG. 44(6), the image display section 114 displays an expectation image 532 that makes the player expect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery will be a big win. In the illustrated example, as the expected image 532, an image of a character appearing in the content that is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is displayed.

(Pseudo continuation count image 533)
As shown in FIG. 45-1(7), the image display unit 114 displays a pseudo-continuous count image 533 indicating the pseudo-continuous count. In the illustrated example, since this is the second variable display, the pseudo consecutive number image 533 includes an image of "x2".

(SP reach image 534)
As shown in FIG. 45-2 (11), the image display section 114 displays an SP ready-to-win image 534 indicating that the SP ready-to-win effect is being executed. This SP reach image 534 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 100 plays a mini game.

(SPSP reach image 535)
As shown in FIG. 45-2 (12), the image display section 114 displays an SPSP ready-to-win image 535 indicating that the SPSP ready-to-win effect is being executed. This SPSP reach image 535 is, for example, a moving image in which characters appearing in the content that is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 100 fight.

(Image 536 before lever tilting)
As shown in FIG. 45-2 (13), the image display section 114 displays a lever-tilting front-stage image 536 that prompts that the lever operation presentation will be performed. As the lever-tilting front-stage image 536, an image imitating a part of the production lever 161L is displayed. In the illustrated example, an image simulating a part of the production lever 161L and an image simulating another part of the production lever 161L are displayed as the lever-tilting front-stage image 536 .

(Image 537 in the latter stage of lever fanning)
As shown in FIG. 45-2 (14), the image display section 114 displays a lever-tilting post-stage image 537 that prompts that the lever operation presentation will be performed. The post-lever-tilting image 537 is displayed after the pre-lever-tilting image 536 is displayed. As the lever-tilting post-stage image 537, an image imitating the production lever 161L is displayed. Further, as the lever-tilting post-stage image 537, an image simulating a flame is displayed in the background of the image simulating the effect lever 161L.

(Lever operation image 538)
As shown in FIG. 45-2 (15), the image display section 114 displays a lever operation image 538 prompting the player to operate the effect lever 161L. By displaying this lever operation image 538, the player can recognize that it is time to operate the effect lever 161L. In the illustrated example, as the lever operation image 538, an image simulating the production lever 161L and an image simulating a flame are displayed. Also, in the lever operation image 538, a gauge indicating a period during which the operation of the effect lever 161L is valid is displayed. Further, in the lever operation image 538, a text of "Close!!" is displayed to prompt the player to operate the production lever 161L. Further, the display size of the lever operation image 538 of this embodiment is larger than the display size of the button operation image 531 (see FIG. 44(5)).

(Promotional image 539)
As shown in FIG. 45-3 (18), the image display section 114 displays a promotion-inviting image 539 that indicates whether or not promotion will be carried out.

(Button fanning image 540)
As shown in FIG. 46-2(9), the image display section 114 displays a button promotion image 540 for promoting that the button operation effect will be performed. As button bias image 540, an image is displayed in which an image simulating effect button 161B moves from the right side toward the center in the display area of image display section 114. FIG.

(Right shot image 542)
As shown in FIG. 48-1(1), the image display unit 114 displays a right-handed shot image 542 prompting the player to shoot the game ball to the right in the game area 111 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the variation effect of the decorative pattern 61 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 will be specifically described.
In addition, FIG. 43 shows a variable effect executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG. When "ER1" is selected as this "fluctuation effect pattern", effects such as "normal" are not executed.

(Variation production example 1)
First, as shown in FIG. 43(1), the effect control unit 300 stops the highly decorative decorative design 61 on the screen of the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special design is completed. It shall be Also, at this time, the image display unit 114 displays a variation image 51 , a pending image 52 , a pending number display 55 , and a small pattern 56 . Further, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 indicates "1", and the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 indicates "0". Also, at this time, the effect operating device 161 is in the non-protruding state (see FIG. 32(A)), and the player cannot operate the effect lever 161L.

Then, as shown in FIG. 43(2), the variation of the decorative design 61 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. In this way, when the variable display of the next special symbol is started, the pending image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51 . In the drawing, when the decorative pattern 61 and the small pattern 56 are shown to be fluctuating (scrolling) at a particularly high speed, the decorative pattern 61 and the small pattern 56 are indicated by arrows (↓) for easy understanding. . In addition, the pending number display 55 of the first start port 121 indicates "0".

Then, as shown in FIG. 43(3), the left decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped at the fixed stop position until the start of fluctuation after being scrolled at a low speed. More specifically, the number "1", which is the left decorative pattern 61, is temporarily stopped. In addition, when representing that the decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped in the drawing, it is expressed by using a display similar to a double quotation mark around the decorative pattern 61 in order to make it easy to understand.
Next, as shown in FIG. 43(4), the right decorative pattern 61 is scrolled at a low speed, and then temporarily stopped at the fixed stop position until the start of fluctuation. More specifically, the number "3" which is the right decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 43(5), the middle decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped at the fixed stop position until the start of fluctuation after being scrolled at a low speed. More specifically, the number "2", which is the middle decorative pattern 61, is temporarily stopped.
Then, along with the stop of fluctuation of the special symbols, the three decorative symbols 61 are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 43(6). The number combination "123" of this decorative pattern 61 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is lost. In addition, the small symbols 56 are also stopped along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols. At this time, the combination “123” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 61 .

(Variation production example 2)
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing one aspect of an effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. As shown in FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 2) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 61 will be described with reference to FIG.
In addition, FIG. 44 shows a variable effect executed when "ER2" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG. When "ER2" is selected as this "fluctuation effect pattern", "N1" is executed as "normal" and "final display color" is "blue". In addition, "BU1" is executed as the "effect button" in the "normal time". In addition, in the following description, points different from example 1 of variable effect will be mainly described, and description of points that are identical to example 1 of variable effect may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 44(1), the effect control section 300 stops the highly decorative decorative design 61 in the image display section 114 in accordance with the end of the variation of the previous special design. It is assumed that there is
Then, as shown in FIG. 44(2), the variation of the decorative design 61 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, at this time, a change effect is started. During execution of this change effect, a change image 530 is displayed. In the illustrated example, a blue image is displayed as the change image 530 .

Then, as shown in FIG. 44(3), the display color of the variable image 51 changes to blue due to the change effect.
Next, as shown in FIG. 44(4), a ready-to-win effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "4", which is the left decorative pattern 61, is temporarily stopped, the number "4", which is the right decorative pattern 61, is temporarily stopped to enter the ready-to-win state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44(5), an operation presentation is performed. A button operation image 531 is displayed during execution of this operation effect.
When the player operates the effect button 161B while the button operation image 531 is being displayed, an expectation image 532 is displayed as shown in FIG. 44(6).

Next, as shown in FIG. 44(7), the middle decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped at the number "5" after being scrolled at a low speed.
Then, along with the stop of fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 44(8), the three decorative symbols 61 are fixed and stopped. The number combination "454" of this decorative pattern 61 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is lost. In addition, the small symbols 56 are also stopped along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols. At this time, the combination “454” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 61 .

(Variation production example 3)
FIGS. 45-1 to 45-3 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 300 using the image display section 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 3) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 61 will be described with reference to FIGS. 45-1 to 45-3.
Incidentally, FIGS. 45-1 to 45-3 are variable effects executed when "EA3" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG. When "EA3" is selected as the "fluctuation effect pattern", the "pseudo-consecutive number" is "2", "N2" is executed as "normal", and "SP2" is executed as the "SP reach". 'SPSP2' is executed as 'SPSP reach' and 'final display color' is 'red'. Also, "BU1" is executed as the "effect button" at "before temporary stop" and "at the time of promotion promotion effect", and "LE1" is executed as the "effect lever" at "at the time of SPSP reach". In addition, in the following description, points different from the respective effects described above will be mainly described, and descriptions of points identical to the respective variable effects described above may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 45-1 (1), the effect control unit 300 stops the determination of the highly decorative decorative design 61 in the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special design is completed. It shall be Also, at this time, the pending image 52 is displayed in blue.

Then, as shown in FIG. 45-1(2), the variation of the decorative design 61 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. In this way, when the variable display of the next special symbol is started, the pending image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51 . Also, at this time, a change effect is performed. During execution of this change effect, a change image 530 is displayed. In the illustrated example, a red image is displayed as the change image 530 .
Next, as shown in FIG. 45-1(3), the display color of the variation image 51 changes to red by the change effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45-1(4), a button operation effect is executed. A button operation image 531 is displayed during execution of this button operation effect.
When the player operates the effect button 161B while the button operation image 531 is being displayed, the character effect is performed as shown in FIG. 45-1(5).
The character effect is an effect in which the movable accessory 115 moves to the front side of the image display section 114 to cover all or part of the image display section 114 . In the illustrated example, the movable accessory 115 arranged on the left side of the three movable accessories 115 (see FIG. 1) partially covers the image display section 114 . Also, the role production in which the movable accessory 115 arranged in the center moves is more convenient than the role production in which the movable accessory 115 arranged on the left side of the three movable accessories 115 moves. The expectations are set high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45-1 (6), a pseudo continuous effect is executed. More specifically, for example, after the number "6" which is the left decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped, the number "4" which is the right decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped, and a pseudo continuous effect is performed in the middle decorative pattern 61. Stop the icon described as "NEXT" which means to do.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45-1(7), the variation of the decorative pattern 61 is started again. Also, at this time, a pseudo consecutive number image 533 is displayed. In the illustrated example, since this is the second variable display, the pseudo consecutive number image 533 includes an image of "x2".
Next, as shown in FIG. 45-1(8), after the number "4" which is the left decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped, the number "1" which is the right decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped, and the middle The "NEXT" icon in the decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45-2(9), the variation of the decorative pattern 61 is started again. That is, the variable display of the decorative pattern 61 for the third time is started. Also, on the screen of the image display unit 114, a pseudo consecutive number image 533 indicating “×3” is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (10), the ready-to-win effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "4", which is the left decorative pattern 61, is temporarily stopped, the number "4", which is the right decorative pattern 61, is temporarily stopped to enter the ready-to-win state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (11), the SP ready-to-win effect is executed. During execution of the SP reach effect, an SP reach image 534 is displayed. Further, when the SP ready-to-win effect is executed, the decorative pattern 61 is displayed in a small display mode and a low decorative display mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (12), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed. An SPSP ready-to-win image 535 is displayed during execution of the SPSP ready-to-win effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (13), a lever-tilting pre-stage image 536 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (14), a lever-tilting post-stage image 537 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (15), a lever operation presentation is performed. A lever operation image 538 is displayed during execution of this lever operation effect. Also, at this time, the effect operation device 161 changes from the non-protruding state (see FIG. 32(A)) to the protruding state (see FIG. 32(B)), and the player can operate the effect lever 161L.

Then, when the player operates the effect lever 161L while the lever operation image 538 is being displayed, the character effect is performed as shown in FIG. 45-2 (16). In the illustrated example, the movable accessory 115 placed in the center of the three movable accessories 115 covers part of the image display section 114 as the accessory effect. Also, at this time, the effect operating device 161 changes from the projecting state to the non-projecting state, and the player cannot operate the effect lever 161L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45-3 (17), the double stitch decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the decorative symbols 61 are displayed in a combination of "444" to inform the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. Also, at this time, the display size of the decorative pattern 61 is larger than the display mode during execution of the SPSP ready-to-win effect (see FIG. 45-2 (11)). In addition, the small pattern 56 maintains the state in which three patterns are variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45-3 (18), a promotion promotion effect is performed. During execution of this promotion promotion effect, a promotion promotion image 539 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 45-3 (19), a button operation presentation is performed. A button operation image 531 is displayed during execution of this button operation effect.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 161B while the button operation image 531 is being displayed, the decorative pattern 61 is again displayed in the combination of "444" as shown in FIG. 45-3 (20). In other words, as a result of the performance inciting promotion, the player is not promoted.
Then, along with the stop of the variation of the special symbol, the variation of the decorative symbol 61 is stopped as shown in FIG. 45-3 (21). The combination of numbers "444" of this decorative pattern 61 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. Also, “444” is displayed as the small pattern 56 . That is, the display of the decorative pattern 61 and the small pattern 56 are matched with the combination of "444".

As described above, in the variable production example 3, first, the production using the production button 161B is performed, and then the production using the production lever 161L is performed. Here, in this embodiment, a variable performance pattern in which the performance button 161B is used earlier than the performance lever 161L and a variable performance pattern in which the performance lever 161L is used earlier than the performance button 161B are provided. ing. Furthermore, the probability of selecting the variable performance pattern using the performance button 161B first is higher than the probability of selecting the variable performance pattern using the performance lever 161L first. That is, in the present embodiment, the variable effect includes a special variable effect in which both the effect lever 161L and the effect button 161B are used. The effect control unit 300 can more easily execute the special variation effect in which the effect button 161B is used first than the special change effect in which the effect lever 161L is used first.
In this case, the player can easily operate the effect lever 161L after gaining interest by operating the effect button 161B. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution seal 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the effect lever 161L in order to operate the effect lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the attention call sticker 41, and the attention call sticker 41 is displayed on the player. You can call attention by Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally contacting a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

Note that the special variation effect in which the effect lever 161L is used first may be easier to execute than the special change effect in which the effect button 161B is used first. That is, a configuration opposite to that of the present embodiment may be employed.
In this case, the player may not be accustomed to operating the operating means when operating the effect lever 161L, which is used first among the effect lever 161L and the effect button 161B. Therefore, the player violently operates the production lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. . On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the caution seal 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, when the player operates the production lever 161L, the attention calling sticker 41 is easily visible to the player, and the player can be alerted to the operation of the production lever 161L. Therefore, even if the player is not accustomed to the operation of the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally contacting a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the performance lever 161L.

Also, in the special variation effect, the effect button 161B may always be used first without using the effect lever 161L first. That is, the special variation effect in which the effect button 161B is used first is easier to execute than the special change effect in which the effect lever 161L is used first. It also includes not doing (0%) and always executing (100%) a special variation effect in which the effect button 161B is used first.

Further, in both the variation production example 2 and the variation production example 3, the production using the production button 161B is performed. On the other hand, in the variation production example 3, the production using the production lever 161L is performed, but in the variation production example 2, the production using the production lever 161L is not performed. Here, in the present embodiment, a variable effect pattern using the effect button 161B and a variable effect pattern using the effect lever 161L are provided. Furthermore, the probability of selecting the variable performance pattern using the performance lever 161L is lower than the probability of selecting the variable performance pattern using the performance button 161B. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 is more difficult to execute the variable effect using the effect lever 161L than the variable effect using the effect button 161B.
In this case, the player is more likely to feel that the effect using the effect lever 161L is more valuable than the effect using the effect button 161B, and the player is more likely to get excited when operating the effect lever 161L. Become. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution seal 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the effect lever 161L in order to operate the effect lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the attention call sticker 41, and the attention call sticker 41 is displayed on the player. You can call attention by Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally contacting a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.
It should be noted that the variation performance using the performance button 161B may be made more difficult to execute than the variation performance using the performance lever 161L. That is, a configuration opposite to that of the present embodiment may be adopted.

In addition, in the variation production example 2, the production button 161B is used without using the production lever 161L, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery related to this variation production is lost. On the other hand, in the variation production example 3, the production lever 161L is used, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery related to this variation production is a big win. Here, in the present embodiment, as the variable performance pattern for the big win, a variable performance pattern in which the performance button 161B is used without using the performance lever 161L and a variable performance pattern in which the performance lever 161L is used are provided. . In addition, as the variation performance pattern for losing, a variation performance pattern in which the performance button 161B is used without using the performance lever 161L and a variation performance pattern in which the performance lever 161L is used are provided. Then, as the variation performance pattern for losing, the probability of selecting the variation performance pattern using the performance button 161B without using the performance lever 161L is higher than the probability of selecting the variation performance pattern using the performance lever 161L. is higher. Further, as the variable performance pattern for big win, the probability of selecting the variable performance pattern using the performance lever 161L is higher than the probability of selecting the variable performance pattern using the performance button 161B without using the performance lever 161L. is higher. That is, in the present embodiment, the variation effect using the effect lever 161L is higher than the variation effect using the effect button 161B without using the effect lever 161L.
In this case, the player is more likely to get excited when operating the production lever 161L due to the high degree of expectation. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution seal 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the effect lever 161L in order to operate the effect lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the attention call sticker 41, and the attention call sticker 41 is displayed on the player. You can call attention by Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally contacting a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.
It should be noted that the variation effect using the effect button 161B without using the effect lever 161L may have a higher degree of expectation for the execution of the jackpot game than the variation effect using the effect lever 161L. That is, a configuration opposite to that of the present embodiment may be adopted.

In addition, the variable production example 2 is a variable production in which the normal reach production is executed without executing the SP ready-to-win production, and the production lever 161L is not used during execution of this variable production. On the other hand, the variable production example 3 is a variable production in which the SP ready-to-win production is executed, and the production lever 161L is used during execution of this variable production. Here, in the present embodiment, as the variable effect pattern using the effect lever 161L, a variable effect pattern in which the normal reach effect and the SP reach effect are executed, and a variation in which the normal reach effect is executed without executing the SP reach effect Production patterns are provided respectively. Further, as the variable performance pattern in which the performance lever 161L is not used, there are respectively a variable performance pattern in which the normal reach performance and the SP ready-to-reach performance are executed, and a variable performance pattern in which the normal reach performance is executed without executing the SP ready-to-reach performance. are provided. Then, as the variable performance pattern in which the performance lever 161L is not used, the normal reach performance is executed without executing the SP ready-to-win performance, rather than the variable performance pattern in which the normal reach performance and the SP ready-to-reach performance are executed. The probability of selecting the variable performance pattern that is Furthermore, as the variable performance pattern using the performance lever 161L, the normal reach performance and the SP ready-to-win performance are executed rather than the probability of selecting the variable performance pattern in which the normal ready-to-win performance is executed without executing the SP ready-to-reach performance. The probability that the variable performance pattern is selected is made higher. That is, in the present embodiment, the variable effects include the first variable effect in which the normal reach effect and the SP reach effect are executed, and the second variable effect in which the normal reach effect is executed without executing the SP reach effect. . And the production|presentation control part 300 is easier to perform the production|presentation which uses the production|presentation lever 161L in the 1st variation production|presentation rather than the 2nd variation production|presentation.
In this case, the player has a higher expectation of winning the jackpot in the variable performance in which the SP ready-to-win performance is executed than in the variable performance in which the normal ready-to-win performance is executed without executing the SP ready-to-win performance. , it becomes easier to get excited when operating the production lever 161L. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution seal 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the effect lever 161L in order to operate the effect lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the attention call sticker 41, and the attention call sticker 41 is displayed on the player. You can call attention by Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally contacting a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

It should be noted that the effect lever 161L is not used during the execution of the variable effect in which the normal reach effect is executed without the SP reach effect being executed, and the effect lever 161L is not used during the execution of the variable effect in which the SP reach effect is executed. may be used. That is, in the first fluctuation production, it is easier to execute the production using the production lever 161L than in the second fluctuation production. ), and in the first variable production, the production lever 161L is always used (100%).
In addition, the variable performance in which the SPSP ready-to-win performance is executed is made easier to execute the performance using the performance lever 161L than the variable performance in which the SP ready-to-win performance is executed without executing the SPSP ready-to-win performance. good too.

In addition, even if the variable performance in which the normal ready-to-win performance is executed without executing the SP ready-to-win performance is easier to execute the performance using the performance lever 161L than the variable performance in which the SP ready-to-win performance is executed. good. That is, a configuration opposite to that of the present embodiment may be adopted. In this case, the player expects to win the jackpot by performing the effect using the effect lever 161L even during the execution of the variable effect in which the normal reach effect is executed without executing the SP ready-to-win effect. This makes it easier for the player to get excited when operating the effect lever 161L. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution seal 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the effect lever 161L in order to operate the effect lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the attention call sticker 41, and the attention call sticker 41 is displayed on the player. You can call attention by Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally contacting a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

In addition, the variation production example 2 is a variation production with a variation time of 60.01 seconds (see FIG. 21), and the production lever 161L is not used in this variation production. On the other hand, the variable production example 3 is a variable production with a variable time of 90.13 seconds, and the production lever 161L is used in this variable production. Here, in this embodiment, as the variable effect pattern using the effect lever 161L, a variable effect pattern with a variable time of 90.00 seconds or less and a variable effect pattern with a variable time longer than 90.00 seconds are respectively provided. are provided. Further, as the variable performance pattern in which the performance lever 161L is not used, a variable performance pattern whose variable time is 90.00 seconds or less and a variable performance pattern whose variable time is longer than 90.00 seconds are provided. Then, as the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is not used, the variable effect pattern whose variable time is 90.00 seconds or less is higher than the probability that the variable effect pattern whose variable time is longer than 90.00 seconds is selected. Increases the probability of being selected. Furthermore, as a variable performance pattern using the performance lever 161L, a variable performance pattern with a variable time longer than 90.00 seconds is selected rather than a variable performance pattern with a variable time of 90.00 seconds or less. It increases the probability that it will be done. That is, in the present embodiment, the variable effect includes a first time variable effect in which variable display is performed for a first time period, and a second time variable effect in which variable display is performed for a second time period different from the first time period. The effect control unit 300 can more easily execute the effect using the effect lever 161L in the second time-varying effect than in the first time-varying effect. Here, the first time may be any time, but for example, time of 15.00 seconds or less, time of 30.00 seconds or less, time of 60.00 seconds or less, Examples include time.
In this case, the second time-varying effect makes the player more excited when operating the effect lever 161L than the first time-varying effect, as the interest of the player increases as the game progresses. Become. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution seal 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the effect lever 161L in order to operate the effect lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the attention call sticker 41, and the attention call sticker 41 is displayed on the player. You can call attention by Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally contacting a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

In this embodiment, if the first time is 90.00 seconds, the effect lever 161L is not used during the execution of the first time variable effect (FIGS. 21, 41, 42), but is not limited to this. If the second time-varying effect makes it easier to execute the effect using the effect lever 161L than the first time-varying effect, it is possible to execute the effect using the effect lever 161L during the execution of the first time-varying effect. good. Also, the effect lever 161L may not be used during execution of the first time-varying effect, and the effect lever 161L may be used during execution of the second time-varying effect. That is, the second time-varying effect makes it easier to execute the effect using the effect lever 161L than the first time-varying effect. is not executed (0%), and the production using the production lever 161L is always executed (100%) during the execution of the second time-varying production.

Also, it may be possible to make it easier to execute an effect using the effect lever 161L during execution of the first time-varying effect than during execution of the second time-varying effect. That is, a configuration opposite to that of the present embodiment may be adopted. In this case, even during the execution of the variable performance with a short variable time, the performance using the performance lever 161L is performed, so that the player expects to win a big win and gets excited when operating the performance lever 161L. becomes easier. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution seal 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the effect lever 161L in order to operate the effect lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the attention call sticker 41, and the attention call sticker 41 is displayed on the player. You can call attention by Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

In addition, the variable effect example 2 is a variable effect in which the "final display color" (see FIG. 42) of the variable image 51 is "blue", and the effect lever 161L is not used in this variable effect. On the other hand, the variable effect example 3 is a variable effect in which the "final display color" (see FIG. 41) of the variable image 51 is "red", and the effect lever 161L is used in this variable effect. Here, in this embodiment, as the variable effect pattern using the effect lever 161L, a variable effect pattern in which the variable image 51 is in the first display mode and a variable effect pattern in which the variable image 51 is in the second display mode are respectively used. are provided. Further, as the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is not used, a variable effect pattern in which the variable image 51 is in the first display mode and a variable effect pattern in which the variable image 51 is in the second display mode are provided. As for the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is not used, the variable effect pattern in which the variable image 51 is in the first display mode is more likely to be selected than the variable effect pattern in which the variable image 51 is in the second display mode. Increases the probability of being selected. Further, as the variable effect pattern using the effect lever 161L, the variable effect pattern in which the variable image 51 is in the second display mode is selected rather than the probability that the variable effect pattern in which the variable image 51 is in the first display mode is selected. It increases the probability that it will be done. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 is more sensitive during the execution of the variable display according to the variable image 51 in the second display mode than during the execution of the variable display according to the variable image 51 in the first display mode. It is easy to execute an effect using the effect lever 161L. In addition, as a 1st display mode, white, blue, green, etc. are mentioned, for example. Further, as the second display mode, for example, a display mode such as blue, green, red, or the like, which makes the user expect that the big win game will be executed more than the first display mode can be mentioned.
In this case, the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher during execution of the variable display according to the variable image 51 in the second display mode than during execution of the variable display according to the variable image 51 in the first display mode. , the player is likely to get excited when operating the effect lever 161L. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution seal 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the effect lever 161L in order to operate the effect lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the attention call sticker 41, and the attention call sticker 41 is displayed on the player. You can call attention by Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

Note that it is easier to execute the effect using the effect lever 161L during the execution of the variable display related to the variable image 51 in the first display mode than during the execution of the variable display related to the variable image 51 in the second display mode. You may do so. That is, a configuration opposite to that of the present embodiment may be employed. In this case, even during execution of a variable performance with a low expectation of winning a big win, the performance using the performance lever 161L is performed so that the player expects to win a big win and operates the performance lever 161L. becomes easily aroused when Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution seal 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the effect lever 161L in order to operate the effect lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the attention call sticker 41, and the attention call sticker 41 is displayed on the player. You can call attention by Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

In addition, the variation production example 2 is a variation production in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, and the production lever 161L is not used in this variation production. On the other hand, the example 3 of variable performance is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, and the performance lever 161L is used in this variable performance. Here, in the present embodiment, a variable performance pattern using the performance lever 161L and a variable performance pattern not using the performance lever 161L are provided as the variable performance pattern for the big hit. Also, as the variation performance pattern for losing, a variation performance pattern in which the performance lever 161L is used and a variation performance pattern in which the performance lever 161L is not used are provided. As the variable performance pattern for losing, the probability of selecting the variable performance pattern in which the performance lever 161L is not used is higher than the probability of selecting the variable performance pattern in which the performance lever 161L is used. . Furthermore, as the variable performance pattern for big win, the probability of selecting the variable performance pattern using the performance lever 161L is higher than the probability of selecting the variable performance pattern not using the performance lever 161L. . That is, in the present embodiment, when the variation production corresponding to the determination result determined to execute the jackpot game is executed, and when the variation production corresponding to the judgment result not determined to execute the jackpot game is executed , the execution probability of the effect using the effect lever 161L is different.
In this case, when the variable performance is executed according to the judgment result determined to execute the jackpot game, and when the variable performance is executed according to the judgment result not judged to execute the jackpot game, the production The player's interest in the effect using the effect lever 161L increases as compared with the case where the probability of executing the effect using the lever 161L is the same. Therefore, when the player operates the production lever 161L, the player becomes excited and easily operates the production lever 161L violently, and the player unintentionally touches a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when operating the production lever 161L. or the effect lever 161L may be damaged. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution seal 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the effect lever 161L in order to operate the effect lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the attention call sticker 41, and the attention call sticker 41 is displayed on the player. You can call attention by Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation performance is executed according to the determination result determined to execute the jackpot game rather than the case where the variation performance is executed according to the determination result that it is not determined to execute the jackpot game. In the case, it is easier to execute the effect using the effect lever 161L.
In this case, when an effect using the effect lever 161L is performed, the player expects to win a big win and easily gets excited when operating the effect lever 161L. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution seal 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the effect lever 161L in order to operate the effect lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the attention call sticker 41, and the attention call sticker 41 is displayed on the player. You can call attention by Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

In addition, the case where the variation performance is executed according to the determination result that it is not determined to execute the jackpot game is better than the case where the variation performance is executed according to the judgment result that it is determined that the jackpot game is executed. You may make it easy to perform the production|presentation which uses the production|presentation lever 161L. That is, a configuration opposite to that of the present embodiment may be adopted.
In this case, even if the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed, the performance using the performance lever 161L is performed, so the variable performance that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a lose is performed. In such a case, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming less interested. Furthermore, by calling the player's attention to the operation of the effect lever 161L using the caution seal 41, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100, or the effect lever 161L may You can prevent it from getting damaged.

In addition, the variation production example 2 is a variation production in which the pseudo-continuous production is not performed, and the production lever 161L is not used in this variation production. On the other hand, the variation production example 3 is a variation production in which a pseudo-continuous production is performed, and the production lever 161L is used in this variation production. Here, in the present embodiment, as the variable performance pattern using the performance lever 161L, a variable performance pattern in which pseudo-continuous performance is not performed and a variable performance pattern in which pseudo-continuous performance is performed are provided. In addition, a variable performance pattern in which pseudo-continuous performance is not performed and a variable performance pattern in which pseudo-continuous performance is performed are provided as variable performance patterns in which the performance lever 161L is not used. Then, as the variable performance pattern in which the performance lever 161L is not used, the probability of selecting the variable performance pattern in which the pseudo continuous performance is not performed is higher than the probability of selecting the variable performance pattern in which the pseudo continuous performance is performed. Raise. Furthermore, as the variable performance pattern using the performance lever 161L, the probability of selecting the variable performance pattern in which the pseudo continuous performance is performed is higher than the probability of selecting the variable performance pattern in which the pseudo continuous performance is not performed. are doing. That is, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can execute a pseudo-continuous effect in which the plurality of decorative symbols 61 are pseudo-varied. Then, it is easier to execute the effect using the effect lever 161L in the variable effect in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed than in the variable effect in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed.
In this case, in the variable performance in which the pseudo-continuous performance is performed, the player is more likely to get excited when operating the performance lever 161L as much as she expects to win the jackpot, as compared to the variable performance in which the pseudo-continuous performance is not performed. . Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution seal 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the effect lever 161L in order to operate the effect lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the attention call sticker 41, and the attention call sticker 41 is displayed on the player. You can call attention by Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally contacting a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.
It should be noted that the variation effect in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed may make it easier to execute the effect using the effect lever 161L than the variable effect in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. That is, a configuration opposite to that of the present embodiment may be adopted.

Further, the effect lever 161L may not be used for the variable effect in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not performed, and the effect lever 161L may be used in the variable effect in which the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. That is, it is easier to execute the effect using the effect lever 161L in the variable effect that executes the pseudo-continuous effect than in the variable effect that does not execute the pseudo-continuous effect. It is also included that the effect using the lever 161L is not executed (0%) and the effect using the effect lever 161L is always executed (100%) in the variable effect that executes the pseudo-continuous effect.

In addition, the variable effect example 1 is a variable effect related to the variable image 51 whose display color is white, and the effect lever 161L is not used in this variable effect. On the other hand, the variation effect example 3 is a variation effect related to the variation image 51 whose display color is red, and the effect lever 161L is used in this variation effect. Here, in the present embodiment, as the variable effect patterns using the effect lever 161L, a variable effect pattern related to the variable image 51 whose display color is white and a variable effect pattern related to the variable image 51 whose display color is red are respectively used. are provided. Further, as the variable effect patterns in which the effect lever 161L is not used, a variable effect pattern related to the variable image 51 whose display color is white and a variable effect pattern related to the variable image 51 whose display color is red are provided. As for the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is not used, the variable effect pattern related to the variable image 51 whose display color is white is higher than the probability that the variable effect pattern related to the variable image 51 whose display color is red is selected. Increases the probability of being selected. Further, as the variable effect pattern using the effect lever 161L, the variable effect pattern related to the variable image 51 whose display color is red is selected rather than the probability that the variable effect pattern related to the variable image 51 whose display color is white is selected. It increases the probability that it will be done. That is, in the present embodiment, it is easier to execute the effect using the effect lever 161L during execution of the second variable effect than during execution of the first variable effect. Here, examples of the first variable effect include a variable effect related to the variable image 51 whose display color is white. Also, the second variable effect is a variable effect that makes the player expect that the big win game will be executed more than the first variable effect. As the second variable effect, for example, a variable effect related to the variable image 51 whose display colors are blue, green, red, or the like can be given. Note that the first variable effect may be, for example, a variable effect in which no ready-to-win effect is performed. The second variable effect may be, for example, a variable effect in which a ready-to-win effect is performed.
In this case, in the second variable performance, the player is more likely to get excited at the time of operating the performance lever 161L than in the first variable performance as much as the player expects to win a big win. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution seal 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the effect lever 161L in order to operate the effect lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the attention call sticker 41, and the attention call sticker 41 is displayed on the player. You can call attention by Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally contacting a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.
It should be noted that it may be easier to execute the effect using the effect lever 161L during the execution of the first variable effect than during the execution of the second variable effect. That is, a configuration opposite to that of the present embodiment may be adopted.

Further, in this embodiment, the display size of the lever operation image 538 (see FIG. 45-2 (15)) is larger than the display size of the button operation image 531 (see FIG. 45-1 (4)). That is, in this embodiment, the display area of the lever operation image 538 is larger than the display area of the button operation image 531 .
In this case, the player is more likely to get excited when operating the production lever 161L because the lever operation image 538 feels more powerful than the button operation image 531 does. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution seal 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the effect lever 161L in order to operate the effect lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the attention call sticker 41, and the attention call sticker 41 is displayed on the player. You can call attention by Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally contacting a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

Further, in this embodiment, before the operation of the effect lever 161L can be accepted, first, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (13), an image simulating a part of the effect lever 161L is displayed. Furthermore, after that, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (14), after an image simulating the entire production lever 161L is displayed, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (15), the operation of the production lever 161L can be accepted. become.
In this case, compared to the case where the image simulating the entire production lever 161L is displayed without displaying the image simulating a part of the production lever 161L, the operation of the production lever 161L can be accepted. The player is further aroused as to whether or not the operation presentation will be performed. Therefore, when the player operates the production lever 161L, the player becomes excited and easily operates the production lever 161L violently, and the player unintentionally touches a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when operating the production lever 161L. or the effect lever 161L may be damaged. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution seal 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally contacting a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45-2(15), the lever operation image 538 displays an image imitating a flame as an image prompting the player to operate the effect lever 161L. That is, in the present embodiment, an image decorated differently from the effect lever 161L is displayed as an image prompting the player to operate the effect lever 161L in the instruction image prompting the operation of the effect lever 161L. .
In this case, the player is more likely to get excited when operating the effect lever 161L, compared to the case where an image different from the effect lever 161L is not displayed in the instruction image. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution seal 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the effect lever 161L in order to operate the effect lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the attention call sticker 41, and the attention call sticker 41 is displayed on the player. You can call attention by Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally contacting a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the production button 161B is operated, a role production is executed in which the movable role 115 arranged on the left side of the three movable roles 115 moves. On the other hand, when the production lever 161L is operated, a role production is executed in which the movable role 115 arranged in the center of the three movable roles 115 moves. That is, in this embodiment, the movable accessory 115 that moves when the production button 161B is operated does not move when the production lever 161L is operated. In other words, the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed is higher in the role product presentation performed when the presentation lever 161L is operated than in the role product presentation performed when the presentation button 161B is operated.
In this case, the player has a higher degree of expectation for the role product presentation performed when the presentation lever 161L is operated than for the role product presentation performed when the presentation button 161B is operated. It becomes easy to get excited when operating 161L. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution seal 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the effect lever 161L in order to operate the effect lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the attention call sticker 41, and the attention call sticker 41 is displayed on the player. You can call attention by Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally contacting a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

In addition, the variation production example 1 is a variation production in which the production button 161B is not used, and the production lever 161L is not used in this variation production. On the other hand, the variation production example 3 is a variation production using the production button 161B, and in this variation production, the production lever 161L is used. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 is more during execution of the variable effect in which the effect using the effect button 161B is performed than during the execution of the variable effect in which the effect using the effect button 161B is not performed. , it is easy to execute an effect using the effect lever 161L.

In addition, the variation production example 1 is a variation production in which the ready-to-win production is not executed, and the production lever 161L is not used in this variation production. On the other hand, the variable effect example 3 is a variable effect in which a ready-to-win effect is executed, and the effect lever 161L is used in this variable effect. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 executes the effect using the effect lever 161L during the execution of the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is executed rather than during the execution of the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. easy to do Note that the ready-to-win effect is not executed because it is easier to execute the effect using the effect lever 161L during the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is executed than during the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. During the execution of the variable performance, the performance using the performance lever 161L is not executed (0%), and the performance using the performance lever 161L is always executed (100%) during the execution of the variable performance in which the ready-to-win performance is executed. ) is also included.

In addition, in the variable production example 3, the production using the production lever 161L is executed after the start of the ready-to-win production. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 is more likely to execute the effect using the effect lever 161L after the start of the ready-to-win effect than before the start of the ready-to-win effect in the variable effect. It should be noted that, in the variable production, it is easier to execute the production using the production lever 161L after the start of the ready-to-win production than before the start of the ready-to-win production. 161L is not executed (0%), and after the ready-to-win production is started in the variable production, the production using the production lever 161L is always executed (100%).

Further, in the variable effect example 3, as shown in FIGS. 45-1(4) and 45-1(5), even if the effect button 161B is operated, the special symbol lottery result is not reported. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 45-2 (15) to 45-3 (17), when the production lever 161L is operated, the lottery result of the special symbol is notified. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 is more likely to execute the effect of notifying the lottery result of the special symbol according to the operation of the effect lever 161L than the effect button 161B. In other words, the production lever 161L tends to shorten the time from the operation until the decorative pattern 61 is fixed and stopped than the production button 161B.

In addition, in the variable production example 3, the production button 161B is used twice, while the production lever 161L is used once. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 tends to reduce the number of executions in the effect using the effect lever 161L rather than the effect using the effect button 161B in the variable effect.

Further, in the variation production example 3, the production button 161B is used when none of the decorative symbols 61 are temporarily stopped in the variation production. On the other hand, the production lever 161L is used when the decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300, rather than the effect using the effect button 161B, the effect using the effect lever 161L, when none of the decorative symbols 61 are temporarily stopped in the variable effect difficult to implement. It should be noted that the effect using the effect lever 161L is more difficult to execute than the effect using the effect button 161B when none of the decorative symbols 61 are temporarily stopped in the variable effect. When none of the patterns 61 are temporarily stopped, the performance using the performance lever 161L is not executed (0%), and when none of the decorative patterns 61 are temporarily stopped in the variable performance, the performance using the performance button 161B. is always executed (100%).

(Variation production example 4)
FIGS. 46-1 to 46-3 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 300 using the image display section 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 4) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 61 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46-1 to 46-3.
Incidentally, FIGS. 46-1 to 46-3 are variable effects executed when "EB1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG. When "EB1" is selected as the "fluctuation effect pattern", the "pseudo-continuous number" is "-", that is, the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed. Also, "N1" is executed as "normal", "SP1" is executed as "SP reach", "SPSP1" is executed as "SPSP reach", and "final display color" is "red". In addition, "promotion" is executed, "BU1" is executed as "production button" in "normal time", "BU2" is executed as "button production" in "SPSP reach time", and "promoting promotion production"``LE1'' is executed as a ``effect lever''. In addition, in the following description, points different from the respective effects described above will be mainly described, and descriptions of points identical to the respective variable effects described above may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 46-1 (1), the effect control unit 300 stops the determination of the highly decorative decorative design 61 in the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special design is completed. It shall be Also, at this time, the pending image 52 is displayed in blue.

Then, as shown in FIG. 46-1(2), the variation of the decorative design 61 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. In this way, when the variable display of the next special symbol is started, the pending image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51 . Also, at this time, a change effect is performed. During execution of this change effect, a change image 530 is displayed. In the illustrated example, a red image is displayed as the change image 530 .
Next, as shown in FIG. 46-1(3), the display color of the variable image 51 changes to red due to the change effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46-1(4), a ready-to-win effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "4", which is the left decorative pattern 61, is temporarily stopped, the number "4", which is the right decorative pattern 61, is temporarily stopped to enter the ready-to-win state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 46-1 (5), a button operation effect is executed. In this button operation effect, a button operation image 531 is displayed.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161B while the button operation image 531 is being displayed, the character effect is performed as shown in FIG. 46-1(6). In this role production, the movable role 115 arranged on the left side of the three movable roles 115 (see FIG. 1) partially covers the image display section 114 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 46-1 (7), the SP ready-to-win effect is executed. During execution of the SP reach effect, an SP reach image 534 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 46-1 (8), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed. An SPSP ready-to-win image 535 is displayed during execution of the SPSP ready-to-win effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46-2(9), a button-flashing image 540 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 46-2 (10), a button operation presentation is performed. In this button operation effect, a button operation image 531 is displayed. Also, at this time, the button operation image 531 is displayed in a display mode different from the button operation image 531 (see FIG. 46-1 (5)) displayed during execution of the normal ready-to-win effect. More specifically, as the button operation image 531, an image imitating the effect button 161B emitting red light is displayed.

When the player operates the effect button 161B while the button operation image 531 is being displayed, the character effect is performed as shown in FIG. 46-2(11). In this role production, the movable role 115 arranged in the center of the three movable roles 115 partially covers the image display section 114 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 46-2 (12), the decorative pattern 61 with double stitches is temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the decorative symbols 61 are displayed in a combination of "444" to inform the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.
Next, as shown in FIG. 46-2 (13), a promotion promotion effect is performed. During execution of this promotion promotion effect, a promotion promotion image 539 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46-2 (14), a lever-tilting pre-stage image 536 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 46-2 (15), a lever-tilting post-stage image 537 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 46-2 (16), a lever operation presentation is performed. A lever operation image 538 is displayed during execution of this lever operation effect. Also, at this time, the effect operating device 161 changes from the non-projecting state to the protruding state, and the player can operate the effect lever 161L.

Then, when the player operates the effect lever 161L while the lever operation image 538 is being displayed, the decoration pattern 61 is displayed in a combination of "777" as shown in FIG. 46-3 (17). In other words, as a result of the performance inciting promotion, the player is promoted. Also, at this time, the effect operation device 161 changes from the projecting state to the non-projecting state, and the player cannot operate the effect lever 161L.
Then, along with the stop of the variation of the special symbol, the variation of the decorative symbol 61 is stopped as shown in FIG. 46-3 (18). The combination “777” of the stationary decorative symbols 61 shown in FIG. 46-3 (18) is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. Also, “777” is displayed as the small pattern 56 . That is, the display of the decorative pattern 61 and the small pattern 56 are matched with the combination of "777".

As described above, in the variable production example 4, the production mode of the production button 161B is a plurality of types (see FIG. 41), whereas the production mode of the production lever 161L is one type. That is, in this embodiment, the number of effect modes of the effect lever 161L and the number of effect modes of the effect button 161B are different.
In this case, compared to the case where the number of effect modes of the effect lever 161L and the number of effect modes of the effect button 161B are the same, the player for the effect lever 161L and the effect button 161B which has the greater number of effect modes can increase their interest. Furthermore, by calling the player's attention to the operation of the effect lever 161L using the caution seal 41, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100, or the effect lever 161L may You can prevent it from getting damaged.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of effect modes of the effect lever 161L is smaller than the number of effect modes of the effect button 161B. In this case, the player's interest in the effect button 161B can be enhanced.
Also, the number of effect modes of the effect lever 161L may be larger than the number of effect modes of the effect button 161B. In this case, the player's interest in the effect lever 161L can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the effect mode of the effect lever 161L is one type, but the present invention is not limited to this. The effect mode of the effect lever 161L may be two or more. Also, the effect mode of the effect button 161B may be three or more.
Further, the effect mode of the effect button 161B is not limited to the effect mode of the effect button 161B during execution of the button operation effect. That is, the effect mode of the effect button 161B may include the effect mode of the effect button 161B when the operation of the effect button 161B is not valid. Moreover, the effect mode of the effect lever 161L is not limited to the effect mode of the effect lever 161L during execution of the lever operation effect. That is, the effect mode of the effect lever 161L may include the effect mode of the effect lever 161L when the operation of the effect lever 161L is not effective.

Further, the display mode of the button operation image 531 may be included in the presentation mode of the presentation button 161B. That is, the effect mode of the effect button 161B may include the effect mode related to the effect button 161B.
Moreover, the display mode of the lever operation image 538 may be included in the presentation mode of the presentation lever 161L. That is, the effect mode of the effect lever 161L may include the effect mode related to the effect lever 161L.

In addition, the variation production example 3 is a variation production in which the production button 161B is used in promotion-inducing production, and promotion is not performed in this variation production. On the other hand, the variable effect example 4 is a variable effect in which the effect lever 161L is used in the promotion-inflicting effect, and promotion is performed in this variable effect. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 uses the effect lever 161L for the variable effect in which the promotion is performed after the promotion-inflicting effect, rather than the variable effect in which the promotion is not performed after the promotion-inflicting effect. easy to implement.

(Effective period of operation)
Next, the period during which the operation of the effect lever 161L is effective and the period during which the operation of the effect button 161B is effective will be described.
FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram of a period during which the operation of the production lever 161L is valid in the variation production example 3, and a period in which the operation of the production button 161B is valid in the variation production example 4. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 47(A), in the variable effect example 3, during the execution of the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the lever-tilt pre-stage image 536 (see FIG. 45-2 (13)) is displayed. Further, when the time T1 has passed since the lever-tilting front-stage image 536 was displayed, the lever operation image 538 (see FIG. 45-2 (15)) is displayed, and the operation of the effect lever 161L becomes effective. Here, a period T2 is set as a period during which the operation of the production lever 161L is valid. An effect (see FIG. 45-2 (16)) is performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47(B), in the variable effect example 4, a button push image 540 (see FIG. 46-2 (9)) is displayed during execution of the SPSP ready-to-win effect. Further, when the time T3 has passed since the button-flashing image 540 was displayed, the button operation image 531 (see FIG. 46-2 (10)) is displayed, and the operation of the effect button 161B becomes effective. Here, time T3 is a time shorter than time T1. Further, a period T4 is set as a period during which the operation of the production button 161B is valid, and if the production button 161B is operated before this period T4 elapses, the operation of the production button 161B is accepted, and the character production is performed. (See FIG. 46-2 (11)) is performed. Here, the period T4 is shorter than the period T2.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation of the effect lever 161L after the lever-tilt front image 536 is displayed is longer than the time T3 from when the button-tilt image 540 is displayed until the operation of the effect button 161B becomes effective. The time T1 to become valid is longer. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the first suggestion effect suggesting that the operation of the effect lever 161L can be accepted before the operation of the effect lever 161L can be accepted. Moreover, before the operation to the production button 161B can be accepted, it is possible to execute a second suggestion production that suggests that the operation to the production button 161B can be accepted. Then, the time from the start of the first suggestion effect to the time it becomes possible to accept the operation to the effect button 161B is longer than the time from the start of the second suggestion effect to the time it becomes possible to accept the operation to the effect button 161B. time is longer.
In this case, the effect lever 161L is longer than the effect button 161B in suggesting that the operation can be accepted, so the player gets excited when the effect lever 161L can be operated. becomes easier. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution seal 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the effect lever 161L in order to operate the effect lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the attention call sticker 41, and the attention call sticker 41 is displayed on the player. You can call attention by Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally contacting a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

Further, in the present embodiment, the period T2 during which the operation to the effect lever 161L is effective is longer than the period T4 during which the operation to the effect button 161B is effective. That is, in this embodiment, there are a first valid period during which the operation to the effect lever 161L is valid and a second valid period during which the operation to the effect button is valid. The first valid period is longer than the second valid period.
In this case, since the effect lever 161L has a longer effective period of operation than the effect button 161B, the player is likely to get excited when operating the effect lever 161L as the effective period of operation elapses. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution seal 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the effect lever 161L in order to operate the effect lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the attention call sticker 41, and the attention call sticker 41 is displayed on the player. You can call attention by Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally contacting a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

(Variation production example 5)
FIGS. 48-1 and 48-2 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114. FIG.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 5) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 61 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48-1 and 48-2.
Note that, in the following description, points different from the respective effects described above will be mainly described, and descriptions of points identical to the respective variable effects described above may be omitted.

First, in the variation production example 5, the game state is a high probability time-saving gaming state, and the variable pedestal and the holding number display 55 are displayed in a display mode different from the low probability time-saving no-game state (for example, see FIG. 43).
Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the electric tulip 123 is arranged on the right side of the game area 111 . Therefore, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, a right-handed image 542 is displayed on the display screen of the image display unit 114 in order to instruct the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side in the game area 111. be.

As shown in FIG. 48-1(1), the decorative pattern 61 (“777”) with low decorativeness is confirmed and stopped on the image display section 114 . The decorative pattern 61 displayed at this time corresponds to the row of numbers finally fixed and stopped before the big win game is executed, that is, when the big win is won. And the small pattern 56 is fixed and stopped by the row of the numbers "777" like the decorative pattern 61. - 特許庁

Then, as shown in FIG. 48-1(2), the variation of the decorative design 61 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design.
Next, as shown in FIG. 48-1(3), a ready-to-win effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "5", which is the left decorative pattern 61, is temporarily stopped, the number "5", which is the right decorative pattern 61, is temporarily stopped to enter the ready-to-win state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48-1(4), a pre-lever-tilting image 536 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 48-1(5), a lever-tilting post-stage image 537 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 48-1(6), a lever operation presentation is performed. A lever operation image 538 is displayed during execution of this lever operation effect. Also, at this time, the effect operating device 161 changes from the non-projecting state to the protruding state, and the player can operate the effect lever 161L.

Then, when the player operates the production lever 161L while the lever operation image 538 is being displayed, a role product production is performed as shown in FIG. 48-1(7). In the illustrated example, the movable accessory 115 placed in the center of the three movable accessories 115 covers part of the image display section 114 as the accessory effect. Also, at this time, the effect operation device 161 changes from the projecting state to the non-projecting state, and the player cannot operate the effect lever 161L.
Next, as shown in FIG. 48-1(8), the double stitch decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the decorative symbols 61 are displayed in a combination of "555" to inform the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48-2(9), a promotion promotion effect is performed. During execution of this promotion promotion effect, a promotion promotion image 539 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 48-2 (10), a button operation presentation is performed. A button operation image 531 is displayed during execution of the button operation effect.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161B while the button operation image 531 is being displayed, as shown in FIG. In other words, as a result of the performance inciting promotion, the player is promoted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 48-2 (12), the variation of the decorative symbol 61 is stopped along with the stop of the variation of the special symbol. The number combination "777" of this decorative pattern 61 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. Also, “777” is displayed as the small pattern 56 . That is, the display of the decorative pattern 61 and the small pattern 56 are matched with the combination of "777".

Thus, example 5 of fluctuation production is fluctuation production in high probability time saving game state, production lever 161L is used in this fluctuation production. In addition, the variable production example 2 is a variable production in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, and the production lever 161L is not used in this variable production. Here, in the present embodiment, a variable performance pattern in a high-probability time-saving gaming state and a variable performance pattern in a low-probability time-saving no-game state are provided as the variable performance pattern in which the performance lever 161L is used. And, the direction of high probability time saving game state, than low probability time saving no game state, has made the probability that the fluctuation production pattern which production lever 161L is used is chosen high. That is, in the present embodiment, the execution probability of the effect using the effect lever 161L is different between when the variable effect of the first mode is executed and when the variable effect of the second mode is executed. In addition, as a 1st mode, for example, a low-probability time-saving non-game state is mentioned, and as a 2nd mode, for example, a high-probability time-saving game state is mentioned. In this case, the game control unit 200 can be regarded as mode control means capable of controlling a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode. The first mode includes, for example, a normal production mode, and the second mode includes, for example, a specific production mode different from the normal production mode, such as a zone. In this case, the effect control unit 300 can be regarded as mode control means capable of controlling a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode.
In this case, when the variable performance of the first mode is executed and when the variable performance of the second mode is executed, the performance is more efficient than the case where the execution probability of the performance using the performance lever 161L is the same. The player's interest in the effect using the lever 161L increases. Therefore, when the player operates the production lever 161L, the player becomes excited and easily operates the production lever 161L violently, and the player unintentionally touches a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when operating the production lever 161L. or the effect lever 161L may be damaged. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution seal 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the effect lever 161L in order to operate the effect lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the attention call sticker 41, and the attention call sticker 41 is displayed on the player. You can call attention by Therefore, even when the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally contacting a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

In addition, for example, when the variable performance of the first mode is executed, it may be easier to execute the performance using the performance lever 161L than when the variable performance of the second mode is executed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing when the variable effect of the first mode is executed.
Also, for example, when the variable performance of the second mode is executed, it may be easier to execute the performance using the performance lever 161L than when the variable performance of the first mode is executed. In this case, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player when the second mode variable effect is executed.

Further, for example, the execution probability of the effect using the effect lever 161L may be changed for each scene (stage) in the effect. That is, when the variable effect of the first mode is executed and when the variable effect of the second mode is executed, the execution probability of the effect using the effect lever 161L is different. The execution probability of the performance using the performance lever 161L is different between when the performance is executed and when the variable performance of the second stage which is the same game state as the first stage and is different from the first stage is executed. is also included.

(Example of production settings)
Next, a description will be given of an example of setting an effect by a player's operation. In the following description, as shown in FIG. 40, the effect lever 161L is provided separately from the effect button 161B, and the player can operate the effect lever 161L regardless of the progress of the game. and
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a setting example of an effect by a player's operation.

As shown in FIG. 49(1), it is assumed that the highly decorative decorative pattern 61 is fixed and stopped in the image display section 114 . Moreover, at this time, the reservation number display 55 of the first start port 121 and the reservation number display 55 of the second start port 122 both indicate "0". A menu display image 570 is displayed on the image display unit 114 . The menu display image 570 is an image showing a method for displaying the menu screen. The menu screen is a screen on which items of effects that can be set by the player's operation of the operating means are displayed. In the illustrated example, the menu display image 570 displays the text "display menu screen with effect button". Also, in the menu display image 570, an image imitating the effect button 161B is displayed. That is, in the menu display image 570, text and pictures indicate that the menu screen is displayed when the player operates the effect button 161B.

Here, when the player operates the production lever 161L, for example, the menu screen is not displayed. On the other hand, when the player operates the effect button 161B, a menu screen 571 is displayed as shown in FIG. 49(2).
A light amount adjustment item image 572 , a volume adjustment item image 573 , an effect explanation item image 574 , a mode setting item image 575 and an end item image 576 are displayed on the menu screen 571 . A cursor image 577 , an instruction method image 578 , and a determination method image 579 are also displayed on the menu screen 571 .

The light amount adjustment item image 572 is an image showing the light amount adjustment item. A light amount adjustment item is an item for adjusting the light amount of various lamps.
The volume adjustment item image 573 is an image showing volume adjustment items. A volume adjustment item is an item for adjusting the volume of sound output from the speaker 156 .
The effect explanation item image 574 is an image showing the effect explanation item. The effect explanation item is an item for explaining the contents of various effects to the player.
The mode setting item image 575 is an image showing an effect mode setting item. The production mode setting item is an item for setting the production mode. The effect mode is, for example, a setting of a plurality of types of effects such as a setting of BGM that flows during execution of a variable effect in a low-probability time-saving non-playing state, a setting of a background image displayed on the image display unit 114, and the like.

End item image 576 is an image in which an end item is shown. The end item is an item for hiding the menu screen 571 .
A cursor image 577 is an image indicating the item being pointed. In the illustrated example, the light amount adjustment item is indicated, and the cursor image 577 is associated with the light amount adjustment item image 572 .

The instruction method image 578 is an image showing how the player instructs each item shown on the menu screen 571 . The instruction method image 578 shows an image simulating the effect key 162 (see FIG. 33) in which the rear button 162a and the front button 162b of the effect key 162 (see FIG. 33) are painted black. That is, the instruction method image 578 indicates that the player can instruct each item displayed on the menu screen 571 by operating the rear button 162a or the front button 162b of the production key 162. is indicated by
A determination method image 579 is an image showing a method for determining the item of the indicated menu screen 571 . The determination method image 579 displays an image simulating the effect button 161B. That is, in the determination method image 579, the picture of the effect button 161B indicates that the player can determine the item of the menu screen 571 by operating the effect button 161B.

Here, when the player operates the front button 162b button of the effect key 162, as shown in FIG. 49(3), the cursor image 577 is associated with the volume adjustment item image 573, and the volume adjustment item is indicated. .
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161B, a volume adjustment screen 580 is displayed as shown in FIG. 49(4). Volume adjustment screen 580 is a screen for adjusting the volume of sound output from speaker 156 . The volume adjustment screen 580 displays a volume gauge image 581 indicating the current volume, an adjustment method image 582 indicating a method for adjusting the volume, and a determination method image 583 indicating a method for determining the volume. there is

The volume gauge image 581 shows the currently set level of volume among a plurality of levels that can be output as the volume level. In the illustrated example, the currently set volume level is shown as 3 levels out of 5 levels.
The adjustment method image 582 is an image showing how the player adjusts the volume. The adjustment method image 582 shows an image simulating the effect key 162 with a mode in which the rear button 162a and the front button 162b of the effect key 162 are painted black. That is, in the adjustment method image 582, a picture of the effect key 162 indicates that the player can adjust the volume by operating the rear button 162a and the front button 162b of the effect key 162. FIG.
The determination method image 583 is an image showing a method for determining the volume. In the determination method image 583, an image imitating the effect button 161B is displayed. That is, in the determination method image 583, the picture of the effect button 161B indicates that the player can determine the volume by operating the effect button 161B.

Here, when the player operates the production lever 161L, for example, the volume does not change. On the other hand, when the player operates the rear button 162a of the effect key 162, as shown in FIG. 49(5), the volume gauge image 581 shows the volume level as 4 out of 5 levels. . Also, at this time, the speaker 156 outputs a notification sound of "pico" indicating that the volume has been adjusted. This notification sound is output according to the adjusted volume level, ie, the volume level of 4 levels out of 5 levels.

Here, when the player operates the production lever 161L, for example, the volume adjustment is not completed. On the other hand, when the player operates the effect button 161B, a volume adjustment completion image 584 is displayed as shown in FIG. 49(6). The volume adjustment completion image 584 is an image indicating that the volume adjustment has been completed. In the illustrated example, the volume adjustment completion image 584 displays the text "volume adjusted".

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 49(7), the menu screen 571 is displayed again. Then, when the player operates the effect button 161B in a state in which the cursor image 577 is associated with the end item image 576 by operating the front button 162b of the effect key 162, as shown in FIG. 49(8), The menu screen 571 is hidden.

Although illustration is omitted, the amount of light of various lamps can be adjusted by a method similar to the method for adjusting the sound volume. That is, when the player operates the effect button 161B in a state where the cursor image 577 is associated with the light amount adjustment item image 572 on the menu screen 571 (see FIG. 49(2)), a screen for adjusting the light amount appears. Is displayed. Then, while the screen for adjusting the amount of light is displayed, the player operates the production key 162 to adjust the amount of light, and then operates the production button 161B to adjust the amount of light. is completed. Even if the player operates the effect lever 161L while the screen for adjusting the amount of light is displayed, the amount of light is not adjusted and the adjustment of the amount of light is not completed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the menu screen 571 is not displayed even if the effect lever 161L is operated, and the menu screen 571 is displayed when the effect button 161B is operated. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control section 300 can display a selection image that allows selection of any one of a plurality of items. Then, the selected image is not displayed according to the operation of the effect lever 161L, but the selected image is displayed according to the operation of the effect button 161B.
In this case, since the effect lever 161L is not used to display the selected image, the player is likely to become unfamiliar with the operation of the effect lever 161L and to operate the effect lever 161L violently. When the player violently operates the production lever 161L, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution seal 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the effect lever 161L in order to operate the effect lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the attention call sticker 41, and the attention call sticker 41 is displayed on the player. You can call attention by Therefore, even if the player is unfamiliar with operating the performance lever 161L, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally contacting a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the performance lever 161L.

Further, in this embodiment, the volume is not changed even if the effect lever 161L is operated, and the volume is changed if the effect key 162 or the effect button 161B is operated. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 does not change the setting related to the effect according to the operation of the effect lever 161L, but can change the setting related to the effect according to the operation of the effect key 162 or the effect button 161B.
In this case, since the effect lever 161L is not used to change the setting related to the effect, the player is likely to become unfamiliar with the operation of the effect lever 161L and to operate the effect lever 161L violently. When the player violently operates the production lever 161L, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution seal 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the effect lever 161L in order to operate the effect lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the attention call sticker 41, and the attention call sticker 41 is displayed on the player. You can call attention by Therefore, even if the player is unfamiliar with operating the performance lever 161L, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally contacting a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the performance lever 161L.

Further, in the present embodiment, the volume is not set by operating the effect lever 161L, and the volume is set by operating the effect key 162 or the effect button 161B. That is, in this embodiment, the production control unit 300 can set the volume according to the operation of the production key 162 or the production button 161B without setting the volume according to the operation of the production lever 161L.
In this case, since the production lever 161L is not used for setting the volume, the player is likely to become unfamiliar with the operation of the production lever 161L and to operate the production lever 161L violently. When the player violently operates the production lever 161L, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution seal 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the effect lever 161L in order to operate the effect lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the attention call sticker 41, and the attention call sticker 41 is displayed on the player. You can call attention by Therefore, even if the player is unfamiliar with operating the performance lever 161L, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally contacting a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the performance lever 161L.

Further, in the present embodiment, the light amount is not set by operating the effect lever 161L, and the light amount is set by operating the effect key 162 or the effect button 161B. That is, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can set the light amount according to the operation of the effect key 162 or the effect button 161B without setting the light amount according to the operation of the effect lever 161L.
In this case, since the effect lever 161L is not used for setting the amount of light, the player is likely to become unfamiliar with the operation of the effect lever 161L and to operate the effect lever 161L violently. When the player violently operates the production lever 161L, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution seal 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the effect lever 161L in order to operate the effect lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the attention call sticker 41, and the attention call sticker 41 is displayed on the player. You can call attention by Therefore, even if the player is unfamiliar with operating the performance lever 161L, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally contacting a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the performance lever 161L.

Further, in this embodiment, after an item is indicated by operating the effect key 162, the item is determined by operating the effect button 161B. On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 48-1 (6) of example 5 of variable production, the production lever 161L is used alone without being used together with other operating means different from the production lever 161L. That is, the effect button 161B is used together with other operation means different from the effect button 161B, whereas the effect lever 161L is not used together with other operation means different from the effect lever 161L.
In this case, the player can easily operate the effect lever 161L in a state in which the player is unfamiliar with operating the operating means. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player may violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is a risk of On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution seal 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the effect lever 161L in order to operate the effect lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the attention call sticker 41, and the attention call sticker 41 is displayed on the player. You can call attention by Therefore, even if the player is unfamiliar with operating the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the effect lever 161L.

Note that the operation means used for volume adjustment and light amount adjustment are not limited to the effect key 162 and the effect button 161B.
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing another adjustment example of volume and amount of light.
FIG. 50(1) displays a light amount adjustment image 585 whose light amount can be adjusted and a volume adjustment image 586 whose volume can be adjusted.

In the light amount adjustment image 585, the currently set level of the light amount is indicated by a gauge, out of a plurality of levels that can be output as the light amount. In the illustrated example, the magnitude of the currently set amount of light is shown as 3 steps out of 5 steps. A light amount adjustment image 585 shows a method for adjusting the light amount. In the illustrated example, the light amount adjustment image 585 shows an image simulating the light amount adjustment unit 166 . That is, in the light amount adjustment image 585, a picture of the light amount adjustment section 166 indicates that the light amount can be adjusted by operating the light amount adjustment section 166 by the player.

In the volume adjustment image 586, the level of the currently set volume level among a plurality of levels that can be output as the volume level is indicated by a gauge. In the illustrated example, the currently set volume level is shown as 4 levels out of 5 levels. A volume adjustment image 586 also shows how to adjust the volume. In the illustrated example, the volume adjustment image 586 shows an image simulating the volume adjustment section 167 . That is, in the volume adjustment image 586 , a picture of the volume adjustment section 167 indicates that the volume can be adjusted by the player operating the volume adjustment section 167 .

Here, when the player operates the production lever 161L, for example, the display contents of the light amount adjustment image 585 and the volume adjustment image 586 remain unchanged, and neither the light amount nor the volume is adjusted. On the other hand, when the player operates, for example, the increase button 166a of the light amount adjustment section 166, as shown in FIG. is shown as Also, at this time, the amount of light from various lamps increases.

Next, when the player operates, for example, the decrease button 167b of the volume adjustment section 167, as shown in FIG. shown. Also, at this time, the speaker 156 outputs a notification sound of "pico" indicating that the volume has been adjusted. This notification sound is output with the adjusted volume, that is, three levels of volume out of five levels.

Thus, the effect control section 300 may be able to set the light amount according to the operation of the light amount adjustment section 166 . Moreover, the production control section 300 may be able to set the volume according to the operation of the volume adjustment section 167 . Furthermore, the effect control unit 300 may be able to change settings related to effects according to the operation of the light amount adjustment unit 166 and the volume adjustment unit 167 .

49 and 50, the player can operate the effect button 161B, the effect key 162, the light amount adjustment section 166, and the volume adjustment section 167 at any timing. On the other hand, the operation of the effect lever 161L is limited to a period during which the operation of the effect lever 161L is valid, as shown in FIG. 47(A). Further, when the player operates the effect lever 161L, the operation of the effect lever 161L is encouraged by the lever operation image 538, as shown in FIG. 48-1(6), for example.
In this case, the player can easily operate the production lever 161L in a hurry. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player may violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is a risk of On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the caution seal 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the effect lever 161L in order to operate the effect lever 161L, it is easy for the player to notice the existence of the attention call sticker 41, and the attention call sticker 41 is displayed on the player. You can call attention by Therefore, even if the player hurriedly tries to operate the performance lever 161L, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally contacting the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the performance lever 161L.

(Modified example of selected image)
Next, the selected image in the modification will be described.
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a setting example of automatic operation.
As shown in FIG. 51(1), the image display section 114 displays a setting screen display image 587 . The setting screen display image 587 is an image showing a method of displaying the automatic operation setting screen. The automatic operation setting screen is a screen for the player to set automatic operation. The automatic operation is a setting in which the effect control unit 300 performs an effect according to the operation of the effect lever 161L or the effect button 161B without the player operating the effect lever 161L or the effect button 161B. In the illustrated example, the setting screen display image 587 displays the text "display automatic operation setting screen with effect button". Also, in the setting screen display image 587, an image imitating the effect button 161B is displayed. That is, the setting screen display image 587 displays text and a picture that the automatic operation setting screen is displayed when the player operates the effect button 161B.

Here, when the player operates the production lever 161L, for example, the automatic operation setting screen is not displayed. On the other hand, when the player operates the effect button 161B, an automatic operation setting screen 588 is displayed as shown in FIG. 51(2). The automatic operation setting screen 588 displays a content explanation portion 588a, a determination portion 588b, a negation portion 588c, a cursor image 588d, an instruction method image 588e, and a determination method image 588f.

Information for explaining the setting content in the automatic operation setting screen 588 is displayed in the content explanation portion 588a. In the illustrated example, the content explanation section 588a displays a text saying "The production buttons and production levers are automatically operated."
The determination unit 588b is a button for enabling automatic operation.
The denial portion 588c is a button for invalidating the automatic operation.
The cursor image 588d is an image that indicates the button that is being pointed out of the determination portion 588b and the negation portion 588c. In the illustrated example, the negation portion 588c is indicated, and the cursor image 588d is associated with the negation portion 588c.

The instruction method image 588e is an image showing a method for the player to instruct the determination portion 588b or the negation portion 588c. The instruction method image 588e shows an image simulating the effect key 162, with the right button 162c and the left button 162d of the effect key 162 painted black. That is, in the instruction method image 588e, a picture of the production key 162 indicates that the player can instruct the determination part 588b or the negation part 588c by operating the production key 162. FIG.
The determination method image 588f is an image showing a method for the player to determine whether the automatic operation is enabled or disabled. An image imitating the production button 161B is displayed in the determination method image 588f. That is, in the determination method image 588f, the picture of the effect button 161B indicates that the player can determine whether the automatic operation is valid or invalid by operating the effect button 161B.

Here, when the player operates the production lever 161L, for example, the cursor image 588d does not move, and the setting of enabling or disabling the automatic operation is not determined. On the other hand, when the player operates the left button 162d of the effect key 162, as shown in FIG. 51(3), the determination section 588b is indicated and the cursor image 588d is associated with the determination section 588b.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161B, as shown in FIG. 51(4), a setting completion image 588g indicating that the setting for enabling the automatic operation has been determined is displayed. In the illustrated example, the setting completion image 588g displays the text "automatic operation has been set."

In this way, the player may decide one of the determination section 588b and the negation section 588c on the automatic operation setting screen 588. FIG. That is, the selection image from which any one of a plurality of items can be selected includes an image from which any of a plurality of items related to one setting can be selected, such as the automatic operation setting screen 588 .

(Modified example of effect setting)
Next, a setting example of effects in the modified example will be described.
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a setting example of effects in the modified example.
As shown in FIG. 52(1), when a jackpot is won, the decorative symbols 61 are determined and stopped on the image display section 114 in combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52(2), an opening image 589 is displayed on the image display section 114 . The opening image 589 is an image for informing the player of the start of the jackpot game. More specifically, the text "BIG Bonus! Configurations" is displayed in the opening image 589 of the present embodiment. The opening image 589 has contents suggesting the type of jackpot (for example, the total number of rounds) and the gaming state after the jackpot game ends. In the illustrated example, the opening image 589 suggests that the total number of rounds is 8 rounds, and that the high-probability time-saving gaming state is reached after the jackpot game ends. A right-handed shot image 542 is also displayed on the image display section 114 .

Then, as shown in FIG. 52(3), when the jackpot game is started, a round image 591 and a music selection image 590 are displayed on the image display section 114 .
The round image 591 is an image for notifying the player of the number of rounds currently being executed in the jackpot game. For example, in the round image 591, when the jackpot of 8 rounds is won, "Round 1" to "Round 8" are displayed in order.
The song selection image 590 is an image for selecting a song to be output from the speaker 156 during the jackpot game being executed. In the illustrated example, “song A” is selected in the song selection image 590 .

Here, for example, when the player operates the effect lever 161L, the music output from the speaker 156 is not changed. On the other hand, when the player operates the front button 162b of the effect key 162, the text of "music B" is displayed in the music selection image 590 as shown in FIG. 52(4). Also, at this time, “song B” is output from the speaker 156 .

Thereafter, when the jackpot game progresses, a character instruction image 592 is displayed as shown in FIG. 52(5). The character instruction image 592 is an image for the player to instruct the character that appears in the production in the high-probability time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game. In the character instruction image 592, a first character image 593, a second character image 594, an instruction method image 595, and a determination method image 596 are displayed.

The first character image 593 is an image showing a first character that can be instructed by the player in the character instruction image 592 .
The second character image 594 is an image showing a second character that can be instructed by the player in the character instruction image 592 . In the illustrated example, a first character image 593 is indicated, and the display size of the first character image 593 is larger than that of the second character image 594 .

The pointing method image 595 is an image showing a method of pointing the character. In the instruction method image 595, an image imitating the effect key 162 is displayed with the right button 162c and the left button 162d of the effect key 162 painted black. That is, in the instruction method image 595, the picture of the production key 162 indicates that the player can instruct the character by operating the right button 162c or the left button 162d of the production key 162. FIG.
A determination method image 596 is an image showing a method for determining a character. In the determination method image 596, an image imitating the effect button 161B is displayed. That is, in the determination method image 596, the picture of the effect button 161B indicates that the player can determine the character by operating the effect button 161B.

Here, when the player operates, for example, the effect lever 161L, the designated character is not changed and the character is not determined. On the other hand, when the player operates the right button 162c of the production key 162, as shown in FIG. Larger display size.

Then, when the player operates the production button 161B, as shown in FIG. 52 (7), the first character image 593 is hidden, and appears in the production in the high-probability time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. The character to play is determined as the second character.

Thus, in this embodiment, the player can change the music output from the speaker 156 during execution of the jackpot game by operating the effect key 162 . Also, the player can change the character that appears in the game state after the big win game by operating the performance key 162 or the performance button 161B. In other words, the ability to change the settings related to the production includes the ability to change the settings related to the production during the execution of the jackpot game, and the settings related to the production in the high probability state such as the high probability time saving game state and the time saving state. is also included.
In addition, the change target of the setting related to the effect is not limited to the example described above. For example, it may be possible to change the setting of the frequency with which a specific effect is executed in the variable effect.

Also, in the present embodiment, the effect lever 161L is not used during execution of the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this. The production lever 161L may be used during execution of the jackpot game. Even in this case, the effect lever 161L is not used except during the execution of the variable effect and during the execution of the jackpot game. On the other hand, as described above, the effect button 161B is used even when the variable effect is being executed and the jackpot game is not being executed.

(Modified example of pseudo continuous production)
Next, a modification of the pseudo-continuous effect will be described.
In this embodiment, it has been explained that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed in the variable effect. Here, the pseudo-continuous effect is not limited to the above example.
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a modification of the pseudo-continuous effect.

As shown in FIG. 53(1), above the image display section 114, there is provided an upper movable accessory 115A that operates on the game board 110 to perform various effects. The upper movable accessory 115A is a frame-shaped member and has the shape of the upper half of a star. Further, below the image display section 114, there is provided a lower movable accessory 115B that operates on the game board 110 to perform various effects. The lower movable accessory 115B is a frame-shaped member and has the shape of the lower half of a star. In addition, after the movement of the decorative design 61 is started, the number "6" which is the left decorative design 61 is temporarily stopped, and the number "4" which is the right decorative design 61 is temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53(2), the upper movable accessory 115A moves downward and the lower movable accessory 115B moves upward. It comes into contact with the lower movable accessory 115B. The upper movable accessory 115A and the lower movable accessory 115B in contact with each other form a star shape. Also, at this time, in the area surrounded by the upper movable accessory 115A and the lower movable accessory 115B in the image display section 114, an icon written as "NEXT" is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 53(3), the decorative pattern 61 starts to change again. Also, at this time, a pseudo consecutive number image 533 is displayed. In the illustrated example, since this is the second variable display, the pseudo consecutive number image 533 includes an image of "x2".
In this way, a pseudo-continuous effect may be performed by combining the operable movable member and the effect image.

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing another modified example (modified example 2) of the pseudo continuous effect.
As shown in FIG. 54(1), the effect control section 300 stops the highly decorative decorative design 61 in the image display section 114 as the variation of the previous special design ends. and Also, at this time, two left decorative patterns 61 indicating consecutive numbers (the numbers "4" and "5" in the illustrated example) are displayed. Also, at this time, two middle decorative patterns 61 indicating consecutive numbers (in the illustrated example, numbers "5" and "6") are displayed. Also, at this time, two right decorative patterns 61 indicating consecutive numbers (in the illustrated example, the numbers "6" and "7") are displayed. That is, a plurality of sets of three decorative patterns 61 are displayed. Also, the three decorative patterns 61 of each set are displayed on a horizontal straight line.

Then, as shown in FIG. 54(2), the variation of the decorative design 61 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design.
Next, as shown in FIG. 54(3), the numbers "5" and "6" which are the left decorative symbols 61 are temporarily stopped. Also, the numbers "4" and "5", which are the right decorative symbols 61, are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(4), the numbers "5" and "6", which are the middle decorative patterns 61, are temporarily stopped. At this time, the three decorative patterns 61 of each set are displayed out of alignment with each other. More specifically, in each set, the right decorative design 61 is displayed shifted downward from the left decorative design 61 and the middle decorative design 61 . Also, at this time, a line image 543 crossing a set of three decorative patterns 61 is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 54(5), the decorative pattern 61 starts to change again. Also, at this time, a pseudo consecutive number image 533 is displayed. In the illustrated example, since this is the second variable display, the pseudo consecutive number image 533 includes an image of "x2".
In this way, a pseudo-continuous effect may be performed in which the decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped at a position different from that when the pseudo-continuous effect is not performed.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing another modification (modification 3) of the pseudo continuous effect.
As shown in FIG. 55(1), the decorative pattern 61 starts to change. In addition, at this time, a role object inciting effect is performed to incite whether or not the role object effect is to be performed. The movable accessory 115 operates on the upper side of the image display section 114 in the role-flashing effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55(2), a character effect is performed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 55(3), the decorative pattern 61 starts to change again. Also, at this time, a pseudo consecutive number image 533 is displayed. In the illustrated example, since this is the second variable display, the pseudo consecutive number image 533 includes an image of "x2". Incidentally, when the role object effect (see FIG. 55(2)) is not performed after the role object effect (see FIG. 55(1)) is performed, the decorative pattern 61 is not changed again.
In this way, a pseudo-continuous effect using a role object effect may be performed.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing another modification (modification 4) of the pseudo continuous effect.
As shown in FIG. 56(1), the decorative pattern 61 starts to change.
Next, as shown in FIG. 56(2), the number "6" which is the left decorative design 61 is temporarily stopped, and the number "6" which is the right decorative design 61 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 56(3), the number "5" which is the middle decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 56(4), the decorative pattern 61 starts to change again.
In this way, the pseudo-continuous effect may be performed without performing the effect such as displaying the icon (see FIG. 45-1(6)) described as "NEXT" or displaying the pseudo-continuous number image 533, or the like.

Incidentally, in the pseudo-continuous effect in any of the above-described effect modes, the decorative pattern 61 may change again when none of the three decorative patterns 61 are temporarily stopped. Further, when one of the three decorative patterns 61 is temporarily stopped, the decorative pattern 61 may change again, or two of the three decorative patterns 61 may be temporarily stopped. The decorative pattern 61 may change again while it is stopped. Furthermore, the decorative design 61 may change again when all the three decorative designs 61 are temporarily stopped.

Also, in the pseudo-continuous effect in any of the above-described effect modes, the pseudo-continuous number image 533 may be displayed after the decorative pattern 61 changes again, or the pseudo-continuous number image 533 may not be displayed.
In addition, in the pseudo-continuous effect in any of the above-described effect modes, before the decorative pattern 61 starts to change again, a pseudo- An effect image that means performing a continuous effect may or may not be displayed.
Also, the pseudo continuous effect is not limited to the above example. That is, the quasi-continuous production may be one in which the decorative pattern 61 starts to fluctuate again, and any production is performed from when the decorative pattern 61 starts to fluctuate until it fluctuates again. good too.

In addition, in the variable effect example of the present embodiment, the number of movable accessories 115 that move is one when the effect button 161B is operated and when the effect lever 161L is operated. It is not limited to this. When the production button 161B is operated and when the production lever 161L is operated, the number of movable accessories 115 that move may be two or more. Also, the number of movable accessories 115 that move may be larger when the production lever 161L is operated than when the production button 161B is operated. In this case, the movable accessory 115 that moves when the production button 161B is operated may not move when the production lever 161L is operated.

Further, the seals provided in the pachinko game machine 100 are not limited to the caution seal 41 (see FIG. 34(A)) and the character item caution seal 43 (see FIG. 38(B)). The pachinko gaming machine 100 may be provided with a spec seal 73 (see FIG. 65) or a voltage seal 87 (see FIG. 75), which will be described later in the second embodiment.
Further, the alert means provided in the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not limited to the example described above. The alerting means may be, for example, an alerting image 93 (see FIG. 85) described later in the second embodiment.

<Embodiment 2>
FIG. 57 is an overall view of the pachinko gaming machine 100 of Embodiment 2. FIG.
First, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment is the same as that of the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment.
Here, in describing the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment, supplementary descriptions of various structures will be given. In the following description, the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is called the front side, and the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is called the back side.

The game board 110 of the second embodiment has a transparent game board 118 in which game nails are embedded and which forms a game area 111 . The transparent game board 118 is made of a transparent resin material and can transmit visible light. Further, the transparent game board 118 of the second embodiment allows the structural parts arranged behind the transparent game board 118, such as the image display part 114 and the movable accessory 115, to be seen through the transparent game board 118. It has become.
The game area 111 in the second embodiment is an area on the surface of the game board 110 through which game balls can pass. The game balls in this case do not include the game balls that have passed through the discharge port 117 after being shot from the launching device 151p (see FIG. 61, which will be described later), and the game balls that have entered various winning ports.

A transparent cell 118C (see FIG. 77 described later) is attached to the surface of the transparent game board 118 of this embodiment. The transparent cell 118C is formed in the shape of a transparent sheet, and the transparent game board 118 is decorated with, for example, a decoration 118d (see FIG. 77 which will be described later) that is the motif (that is, theme) of the pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment.

The rail member 112 has an inner rail member 112a provided inside and an outer rail member 112b provided outside the inner rail member 112a. In addition, a return rubber 112G, which is a buffer member for receiving a right-handed game ball, is arranged on the right and upper side of the outer rail member 112b.

A predetermined motif is set in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment.
The model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment is "CR Pachinko Star 777 ~ Dream Dome Performance ~ V3B". The motif of the pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is a star. Then, as shown in FIG. 57, the pachinko gaming machine 100 displays “CR Pachinko Star 777 ~ Dream Dome Performance ~” on the image display section 114, which is part of the model name.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 57, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has a movable accessory 115 decorated with a character string "star 777" which is part of the model name.
The movable accessory 115 is arranged on the front side of the image display section 114 and on the rear side of the transparent game board 118 in the front-rear direction. That is, the movable accessory 115 is arranged between the image display section 114 and the transparent game board 118 in the front-rear direction.

The movable accessory 115 in the second embodiment is movable in the vertical direction of the pachinko gaming machine 100 . In the second embodiment, the movable accessory 115 can move between a standby position located on the upper side of the game board 110 and an appearance position located in the center of the game board 110 .
Further, the movable accessory 115 has an accessory light emitting portion 115L. The character object light emitting unit 115L emits red light, green light, and blue light by itself, or by combining a plurality of them, so that it can emit light in any one of a plurality of colors. It's becoming

Further, the game slot 150 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment will be explained in detail.
FIG. 58 is a side view of the pachinko gaming machine 100 of Embodiment 2. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 58(A), the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment has an upper protruding portion 150P provided on the upper side of the game frame 150 and protruding toward the player's front side.
Then, as shown in FIG. 58(B), the upper accessory 5 of the second embodiment is provided on the upper projecting portion 150P. The upper accessories 5 are in a non-protruding state housed inside the upper projecting portion 150P as shown in FIG. 58(A) and a protruding state protruding from the upper projecting portion 150P as shown in FIG. 58(B). It can be in any state between.

It should be noted that the upper accessory 5 has, for example, a shape or decoration that serves as a motif of the pachinko gaming machine 100 . Further, the upper accessory 5 is provided with a light-emitting lamp (not shown). The light-emitting lamp of the upper accessory 5 emits light together with other light-emitting lamps of the game board 110 and the game frame 150, thereby making it possible to execute a predetermined effect.
Further, in the game frame 150, an upper protruding portion 150P is provided, and when the upper accessory 5 is in the protruding state, the player operates it to shift the upper accessory 5 to the non-protruding state. It has a storage button (not shown). Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of Embodiment 1, the upper accessory 5 is an object to be operated by the player, and the storage button serves as a receiving means for receiving an operation.

FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram of the game frame 150 of the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 59, the game frame 150 includes an inner frame 150U that holds the game board 110, a glass door frame 150G that holds the glass plate 119, which is a transparent member separating the game board 110 from the player, and an inner frame. 150U and an outer frame 150S that holds the glass door frame 150G.

The outer frame 150S is a frame that forms the outermost outer shell of the pachinko gaming machine 100. As shown in FIG. The inner frame 150U is rotatably connected to the outer frame 150S. Also, the glass door frame 150G is rotatably connected to the inner frame 150U.

In the following description, the state in which the glass door frame 150G and the inner frame 150U are combined is called the state in which the glass door frame 150G is closed, and the state in which the glass door frame 150G and the inner frame 150U are separated. This is called a state in which the glass door frame 150G is open. A state in which the inner frame 150U and the outer frame 150S are joined together is called a closed state of the inner frame 150U, and a state in which the inner frame 150U and the outer frame 150S are separated is called an open state of the inner frame 150U. call.

Next, the first starting port 121 provided on the game board 110 of Embodiment 2 will be described in detail.
FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram of the first starting port unit 20 provided with the first starting port 121 of the second embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 60(A) and 60(B), the pachinko gaming machine 100 of Embodiment 2 has a first starting port unit 20 including a first starting port 121. As shown in FIG. The first starting port unit 20 includes a first starting port 121, a first starting port switch 211, a decorative main body portion 22, a decorative seal 23 that decorates the decorative main body portion 22, and a light emitting portion 24 that emits light. are doing.

The decoration main body 22 is made of a transparent material that transmits visible light. In the second embodiment, the decoration main body portion 22 allows the light of the light emitting portion 24 to pass therethrough so that the player can see the light of the light emitting portion 24 through the decoration main body portion 22 . Furthermore, the decoration main body part 22 of the second embodiment has a pasting part R22 on the part where the decorative seal 23 is pasted. The adhered portion R22 is recessed more than the other regions. Further, the adhered portion R22 of the second embodiment has a positioning portion r22 for positioning the adhered position of the decorative sticker 23. As shown in FIG. The positioning portion r22 protrudes at the adhered portion R22. Further, the positioning portion r22 has a shape corresponding to a slit portion 23K (described later) provided in the decorative seal 23. As shown in FIG.

The decorative seal 23 has a circular shape as a whole. The decorative seal 23 is provided near the light emitting section 24 . The decoration sticker 23 is the sticker closest to the light emitting part 24 among various decoration stickers provided in the pachinko gaming machine 100 . The decorative sticker 23 is decorated on one side and provided with an adhesive on the opposite side for sticking to an object. Also, the decorative sticker 23 of the second embodiment has a star pattern as a decoration corresponding to the motif of the pachinko gaming machine 100. FIG. The decorative seal 23 is configured to be transparent so as to transmit visible light. In the second embodiment, the decorative seal 23 allows the light from the light emitting section 24 to pass therethrough so that the player can see the light from the light emitting section 24 through the decorative seal 23 .
Further, the decorative seal 23 has a slit portion 23K that is cut from the end portion toward the center portion. The slit portion 23K of the decorative seal 23 is formed so that the positioning portion r22 is fitted therein when the decorative seal 23 is adhered to the adhered portion R22.

The light emitting section 24 has an LED 241 and a substrate 242 on which the LED 241 is mounted. The LED 241 includes a red element that emits red light, a green element that emits green light, and a blue element that emits blue light. The LED 241 emits red light, green light, and blue light by itself, or by combining a plurality of them, so that the LED 241 can emit light in any one of a plurality of colors. there is For example, the LEDs 241 emit light in various colors such as white, blue, green, red, and purple. The substrate 242 is also electrically connected to the lamp controller 320 (see FIG. 4). The substrate 242 causes the LED 241 to emit light based on the current received from the lamp control section 320 .
Then, as shown in FIG. 60B, the light-emitting portion 24 is arranged behind the decorative seal 23 in the front-rear direction. Then, the light emitting unit 24 irradiates the player with light from the game board 110 side. Thereby, the light emitting part 24 illuminates the decoration seal 23 and the decoration body part 22 provided on the front side from the rear side in the front-rear direction.
Also, in the second embodiment, the light emitting part 24 is provided in the vicinity of the first starting port 121 . It should be noted that the light-emitting section 24 is the light-emitting section closest to the first start port 121 among the various light-emitting sections provided in the pachinko gaming machine 100 .

Then, as shown in FIG. 60(C), the first starting port unit 20 of the present embodiment emits light from the light emitting portion 24 so that the player can tell that the decoration body portion 22 and the decoration sticker 23 are emitting light. visible.

Although the first starter unit 20 of the present embodiment expresses the motif of the pachinko gaming machine 100 with the decorative seal 23, it is not limited to this aspect. For example, the shape of the first starter unit 20 itself may represent the motif of the pachinko gaming machine 100 . When the motif of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is a star as in the second embodiment, the decoration main body 22 itself may be star-shaped. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the decoration main body 22 is decorated using the decoration sticker 23, but the decoration main body 22 may be decorated by printing directly on the decoration main body 22. can be

Next, seals used in this embodiment will be described.
Here, in the description of the present embodiment, a sticker is a piece of paper or plastic film having information such as characters and graphics on one side and an adhesive substance such as glue on the other side. . Also, the seal is attached to the object with the glue provided on the other surface. By being attached to the surface of an object, the sticker attaches information related to the object such as the name, content, number, etc., to the object, or gives the object a design such as decoration. A sticker may also be called a label or a sheet.
In this embodiment, characters include kanji, hiragana, katakana, alphanumeric characters and punctuation marks.

As shown in FIG. 57, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has a contact caution seal 71 and an operation caution seal 72 provided on the game frame 150, respectively. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has spec seals 73, display seals 74, optical caution seals 75, fraud prevention seals 76, board number seals 77, and certificate stamp seals 78 provided on the game board 110, respectively.

Here, the contact caution seal 71 and the operation caution seal 72 are provided on the surface of the game frame 150 . A spec seal 73 , a display seal 74 , an optical caution seal 75 , a fraud prevention seal 76 , a board number seal 77 and a certificate stamp seal 78 are provided on the surface of the game board 110 .
The contact caution seal 71, the operation caution seal 72, the spec seal 73, the indicator seal 74, the light caution seal 75, the fraud prevention seal 76, the board number seal 77, and the certificate stamp seal 78 are the pachinko machine 100 All or at least a part of them can be visually recognized by a player or a manager when they are installed on the island of the hall and the glass door frame 150G is closed.
In the second embodiment, the administrator can be exemplified by a store clerk in a hall where the pachinko gaming machine 100 is installed, an employee of a company that manufactures and sells the pachinko gaming machine 100, and the like.

FIG. 61 shows the pachinko gaming machine 100 with the glass door frame 150G open.
As shown in FIG. 61, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has the following stickers that can be visually recognized mainly by the administrator when the glass door frame 150G is open.
As shown in FIG. 61 , the pachinko gaming machine 100 has a frame warning sticker 79 provided on the game frame 150 . In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has a board caution seal 80 provided on the game board 110 .

Here, the frame warning sticker 79 is provided on the surface of the game frame 150 . Also, the board caution seal 80 is provided on the surface of the game board 110 .
When the glass door frame 150G is closed (see FIG. 57), the frame caution seal 79 and the board caution seal 80 cannot or cannot be visually recognized by the manager or the player.

FIG. 62 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is viewed from the rear side.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 62, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has frame number stickers 81, handling caution stickers 82 and voltage stickers 87 provided on the game frames 150, respectively. The pachinko gaming machine 100 also has a sub-ROM seal 83, a main board management seal 84, a main board seal 85 and a main ROM seal 86 provided on the game board 110, respectively.

Here, the frame number seal 81 , handling caution seal 82 and voltage seal 87 are provided on the back surface of the game frame 150 . A sub-ROM seal 83 , a main board management seal 84 , a main board seal 85 and a main ROM seal 86 are provided on the back surface of the game board 110 .
Then, as shown in FIG. 57, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed on the island of the hall and the inner frame 150U is closed, the frame number sticker 81, the handling caution sticker 82, the sub-ROM sticker 83, the main The board management seal 84, the main board seal 85, the main ROM seal 86, and the voltage seal 87 are invisible or difficult for administrators and players to visually recognize.

Each of the seals described above will be specifically described below.

(Contact warning sticker 71)
FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram of the contact alert seal 71 of the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 63A, the contact warning sticker 71 is attached to the upper side of the game frame 150 on the surface of the game frame 150 to call attention to the player's contact with the game frame 150 . That is, the contact alert sticker 71 mainly displays information directed to the player.

The game frame 150 of the second embodiment has an upper projecting portion 150P on the upper side of the game frame 150. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, the game frame 150 of the second embodiment has the upper accessory 5 on its upper projecting portion 150P. The contact warning sticker 71 is attached to the upper protruding portion 150P to prevent the player's head, for example, from contacting the game frame 150, and prevent the player from contacting the protruding upper accessory 5. Call attention to prevent tampering.

In this manner, the contact attention alert sticker 71 of the second embodiment is directly attached to the upper protruding portion 150P, which is the target of attention, and alerts the upper protruding portion 150P. Further, the contact attention alert sticker 71 of the second embodiment is provided in the vicinity of the upper role item 5 to be alerted, and alerts the upper role item 5 . In addition, the contact attention alert sticker 71 of the second embodiment has the shortest linear distance from the upper accessory 5 to be alerted compared to other stickers.

As shown in FIG. 63(B), the contact caution sticker 71 of the second embodiment has a rectangular shape. Furthermore, one of the four corners of the contact alert seal 71 has a notch, which is different from the shape of the other corners. That is, the contact alert seal 71 is not point-symmetrical. Then, the contact warning sticker 71 is attached to the first attached portion R<b>1 provided on the game board 110 .

The first adhered portion R1 of the present embodiment is red. Further, the first adhered portion R1 has a positioning portion r1 for positioning the contact alert sticker 71. As shown in FIG. The positioning portion r1 is a recess recessed from the surroundings and has a flat bottom. The shape of the positioning portion r1 corresponds to the contact caution sticker 71. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, the shape of the positioning portion r1 is different from that of the portion to be pasted to which other stickers are pasted.
Therefore, when the worker sticks the contact caution seal 71 to the game frame 150, the worker can stick the contact caution seal 71 to the correct position.

Furthermore, as described above, the shape of the contact alert sticker 71 corresponds to the positioning portion r1 of the first adhered portion R1 and is not point-symmetrical. Therefore, when the worker sticks the contact caution seal 71 to the positioning portion r1, the worker can stick the contact caution seal 71 in the correct direction.

The contact attention alert seal 71 includes a character portion 711 that alerts the player to the game frame 150, a caution illustration 712 that is an illustration to call attention, a general warning mark portion 713 that indicates that attention is being called, It has a frame line 714 enclosing a character portion 711 , a caution illustration 712 and a general warning mark portion 713 . Further, the contact caution sticker 71 has a character portion 711 , a caution illustration 712 , a general warning mark portion 713 and a base portion 715 which is a portion other than the frame line 714 .

The character part 711 prevents the player from colliding with the upper protruding part 150P of the game frame 150, such as "Be careful of the upper part of the frame, be careful of jumping out", or the upper accessory 5 protrudes. The contents are such as to prevent the player from touching the upper accessory 5 when the state is reached.
It should be noted that Gothic characters are used for the characters used for the sticker in this embodiment. The sticker of this embodiment uses a Gothic typeface with relatively thick lines so that the players and administrators can easily see and notice the stickers in order to attract the attention of the players and administrators.

The caution illustration 712 simply expresses the game frame 150 (upper protruding portion 150P) and the upper accessory 5 . The caution illustration 712 expresses the attention to the player's contact with the game frame 150 or the upper accessory 5 by an illustration instead of text information.

The general warning mark portion 713 expresses with an illustration that the contact caution seal 71 itself calls the player's attention. The basic configuration of the general warning mark portion 713 is the same as that of the general warning mark portion 414 of the first embodiment.

A frame line 714 is provided along the outer circumference of the contact alert seal 71 . As a result, the contact caution seal 71 is conspicuous by, for example, indicating the boundary portion between the contact caution seal 71 and the first adhered portion R1.

The base portion 715 makes the character portion 711, the caution illustration 712 and the general warning mark portion 713 stand out so that the player can easily see them. For example, the background portion 715 is black, the character portion 711 is white, the caution illustration 712 is white and yellow, the general warning mark portion 713 is yellow, and the frame line 714 is white. In this way, the contact caution seal 71 has a strong contrast in brightness between the base portion 715 and the character portion 711 other than the base portion 715, the caution illustration 712, the general warning mark portion 713, and the frame line 714. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the color of the base portion 715 (black in this example) is different from the color of the first adhered portion R1 (red in this example). As a result, the contact caution seal 71 itself is conspicuous on the game frame 150 .

(Operation warning sticker 72)
FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram of the operation caution label 72 of the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 64(A), the operation caution sticker 72 is attached to the surface of the game frame 150 and is attached to the lower side of the game frame 150. Call attention. In other words, the operation alert sticker 72 mainly displays information directed to the player.

The game frame 150 of this embodiment includes a production lever 161L near the upper tray 153. As shown in FIG. Then, the operation attention calling seal 72 is provided in the vicinity of the production lever 161L. Then, the operation attention calling seal 72 calls attention to the player when the performance lever 161L moves, and cautions against pinching the hand in the performance lever 161L.

Then, as shown in FIG. 64(A), the operation warning sticker 72 of the present embodiment is attached to the second attached portion R2 provided on the game frame 150. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 64(B), the operation caution seal 72 includes a character portion 721 for drawing the player's attention regarding the game slot 150, a warning illustration 722 for drawing attention, and a general warning indicating that the attention is being drawn. It has a mark portion 723 and a frame line 724 surrounding the character portion 721 , the caution illustration 722 and the general warning mark portion 723 . Further, the operation caution seal 72 has a character portion 721 , a caution illustration 722 , a general warning mark portion 723 and a base portion 725 which is a portion other than the frame line 724 .

For example, the character portion 721 displays the text "Caution for pinching hands when operating the effect lever", and the effect operation device 161 changes from the non-protruding state (see FIG. 32A) to the protruding state (see FIG. 32B). ), the player's attention is drawn to the fact that the player unintentionally touches the effect lever 161L. In addition, the character portion 721 displays the text "Caution for popping out the production lever", and when the production operation device 161 changes from the non-protruding state (see FIG. 32(A)) to the protruding state (see FIG. 32(B)), A player's unintentional contact with the effect lever 161L is called. Further, the character portion 721 displays the text "Caution for popping out the character object at the upper part of the frame" to prevent the player from unintentionally touching the upper character object 5 when the upper character object 5 moves upward. Call attention.

The basic configuration of the operation caution seal 72 is the same as the caution seal 41 (see FIG. 34 and the like) of the first embodiment. In Embodiment 2, the detailed description is omitted.

(spec seal 73)
FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram of the spec seal 73 of the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 65(A), the spec sticker 73 is attached to the upper and right side of the game board 110 on the surface of the game board 110 to indicate the game specifications of the pachinko game machine 100 . That is, the spec sticker 73 mainly displays information directed to the player.

The spec seal 73 of this embodiment is provided outside the game area 111 . Also, the spec seal 73 is provided near the rail member 112 . Here, the game ball moves along the rail member 112 when shot by the shooting device 151p (see FIG. 61). Therefore, by arranging the spec seal 73 near the rail member 112, when the player shoots a game ball, the player's line of sight is thrown at the spec seal 73 arranged near the rail member 112.例文帳に追加I'm trying

Also, the spec seal 73 of the present embodiment is provided adjacent to the return rubber 112G. In the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, hitting a game ball in the right area of the game area 111 by hitting a jackpot makes a right-hand shot that gives an advantage to the player. In this right-handed state, the game ball is shot so as to collide with the return rubber 112G. As described above, right-handed hitting is performed, for example, when a jackpot is won, and the player cares about the probability of winning the jackpot and the gaming state after the jackpot game becomes, for example, a high probability time-saving gaming state. It's time to. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a spec sticker 73 is provided near the return rubber 112G, thereby making it easier for the player to confirm the game specifications.

In addition, the spec seal 73 is not limited to being provided in the vicinity of the return rubber 112G as in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment. For example, the spec seal 73 may be provided on the upstream side of the rail member 112 on the firing device 151p side. Also, the spec seal 73 may be configured integrally with a display seal 74 to be described later. That is, the spec seal 73 may be provided near the display 130 .

As shown in FIG. 65(B), the spec seal 73 of this embodiment has a trapezoidal shape. That is, the spec seal 73 has a shape that is not point-symmetrical. Then, the spec sticker 73 is attached to the third attached portion R3 provided on the game board 110 .

The 3rd pasting part R3 of this embodiment is comprised transparently. The third pasting portion R3 has a positioning portion r3 for positioning the spec sticker 73. As shown in FIG. The positioning portion r3 is a recess recessed from the surroundings and has a flat bottom. The shape of the positioning portion r3 corresponds to the spec sticker 73. As shown in FIG.
Therefore, when the worker sticks the spec seal 73 to the game board 110, the spec seal 73 can be pasted in a correct position and pasting direction.

The spec sticker 73 is a sticker containing information indicating game specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 100 . The spec seal 73 has jackpot probability information 731, prize ball number information 732, and probability variable entry rate information 733 as an example of game specifications. The spec sticker 73 also has manufacturer information 734 , model name 735 , and version display 736 . Furthermore, the spec seal 73 has a base portion 737 other than the jackpot probability information 731 , the number of prize balls information 732 , the probability variable entry rate information 733 , the manufacturer information 734 , the model name 735 and the version display 736 .

The big-hit probability information 731 includes characters (numbers) indicating the winning probability of the big-hit lottery in the low-probability state.
The prize ball number information 732 includes characters (numbers) indicating the number of prize balls when game balls enter the first starting hole 121, the second starting hole 122, the big winning hole 125 and the normal winning hole 126, respectively.
The variable probability entry rate information 733 includes characters (numbers) indicating the probability that the type of jackpot that will be in the high probability game state after the jackpot game is selected.
The manufacturer information 734 includes characters indicating the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko gaming machine 100 .
The model name 735 indicates the official model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100 in characters. In the present embodiment, the model name 735 displays "CR Pachinko Star 777 - Dream Dome Performance - V3B".

The version display 736 is information indicating which version of the configuration of the game area 111 provided on the surface of the game board 110 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (hereinafter referred to as board configuration). The version information of this embodiment is displayed in a predetermined color determined for each of a plurality of versions. The version indicator 736 of this embodiment is drawn by an orange circle, for example.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 100 includes a game nail in a game area 111 provided on the surface of the game board 110, a first start port 121, a second start port 122, a large winning port 125 and a normal winning port 126. The playability of the pachinko game machine 100 as a whole is determined by adjusting the winning probability of the jackpot lottery and the game specifications such as the number of prize balls. Then, for example, when developing the pachinko gaming machine 100, a plurality of combinations of board configuration and game specifications are prepared, and one of the versions is finally determined. Therefore, the version of the board configuration and the version of the game specifications must correspond. Therefore, in this embodiment, the version display 736 is provided on the spec sticker 73 so that the version of the game board 110 can be confirmed at least on the surface of the game board 110 .

The background portion 737 highlights the jackpot probability information 731, the number of prize balls information 732, the variable probability entry rate information 733, the manufacturer information 734, the model name 735 and the version display 736 so that the player can easily see them. For example, the spec seal 73 of the present embodiment has a black base portion 737, and displays the jackpot probability information 731, the winning ball number information 732, the probability variable entry rate information 733, the manufacturer information 734, and the model name 735 in white. , version display 736 is displayed in orange. In this way, the spec sticker 73 includes the base portion 737, the jackpot probability information 731 other than the base portion 737, the winning ball number information 732, the probability variable entry rate information 733, the manufacturer information 734, the model name 735, and the version display 736. Increased brightness contrast.

In addition, in this embodiment, the color of the base portion 737 is made different from the color of the third adhered portion R3. The presence of the spec seal 73 is made conspicuous. However, if it is based on the viewpoint that, for example, it is not necessary to make the seal as conspicuous as that for calling attention, the color of the base portion 737 of the specification seal 73 may be the same color as that of the third pasting portion R3.

(Display seal 74)
FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram of the indicator seal 74 of the second embodiment.
The indicator sticker 74 of this embodiment is attached to the left side and lower side of the game board 110 on the surface of the game board 110 (see FIG. 57), and displays an explanation about the types of LEDs used as the indicator 130. do. That is, the display sticker 74 mainly displays information directed to the player.

The game board 110 of Embodiment 2 has a display 130 outside the rail member 112 (see FIG. 57). Then, the indicator seal 74 is provided for the indicator 130 .
As shown in FIG. 66, the indicator seal 74 is generally rectangular in shape. Furthermore, the indicator seal 74 has one of the four corners which is a notch, unlike the shape of the other corners. That is, the indicator seal 74 is not point-symmetrical. Then, the indicator seal 74 is attached to the fourth attached portion R<b>4 provided at the position of the indicator 130 .

The fourth adhered portion R4 of the present embodiment is black. In addition, the fourth pasting portion R4 has a positioning portion r4 for positioning the indicator sticker 74. As shown in FIG. The positioning portion r4 is a recess recessed from the surroundings and has a flat bottom. The shape of the positioning portion r4 corresponds to the indicator seal 74. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, the shape of the positioning portion r4 is different from that of the portion to be pasted to which other stickers are pasted.
Therefore, when the operator sticks the indicator sticker 74 on the game board 110, the operator can stick the indicator sticker 74 in the wrong place and sticking direction.

The indicator sticker 74 includes each indicator (first special symbol reservation indicator 218, second special symbol reservation indicator 219, normal symbol reservation indicator 220, first special symbol indicator 221, second 2 Special symbol display device 222, normal symbol display device 223, state display device 224, round number display device 225). For example, the indicator seal 74 has a transparent window portion 741 that transmits the light of the LED of the indicator, a window frame line 742 that surrounds the window portion, and an explanation portion 743 that explains the lighting mode of the LED. . Furthermore, the indicator seal 74 has a base portion 744 which is a portion other than the transparent window portion 741 , the window frame line 742 and the explanatory portion 743 .

A transparent window 741 is provided for each of a plurality of LEDs constituting various indicators. The transparent window portion 741 is configured to be colorless and transparent, and allows the emitted light of the LED to pass therethrough. The indicator seal 74 of the present embodiment prevents the transparent window portion 741 from being coated with an adhesive as a seal.
Window frame line 742, each indicator (first special symbol reservation display 218, second special symbol reservation display 219, normal symbol reservation display 220, first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222 , normal symbol indicator 223, state indicator 224, and round number indicator 225), each of which has a different color. The window frame line 742 is, for example, red for the first special symbol display 221 and blue for the second special symbol display 222 .

The explanation part 743 specifically explains the relationship between the lighting mode of the round number indicator 225 and the number of operation rounds of the jackpot game in this embodiment. For example, the explanation part 743 specifically displays the lighting mode of the LED for each number of operation rounds (2R, 4R, 8R and 15R).
The base portion 744 makes the window frame line 742 stand out so that the player can easily see the window frame line 742 . For example, in the indicator seal 74 of the present embodiment, the color of the base portion 744 is black.

(Light warning sticker 75)
67A and 67B are explanatory diagrams of the optical warning sticker 75, the fraud prevention alert sticker 76, and the board number sticker 77 of the second embodiment.
The light warning sticker 75 is affixed to the left side and lower side of the game board 110 on the surface of the game board 110 (see FIG. 57). Call the player's attention to the light. In other words, the optical warning sticker 75 mainly displays information directed to the player.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 of Embodiment 2 has the light emitting part 24 (see FIG. 60) of the first starting unit 20 and the role light emitting part 115L (see FIG. 57) of the movable role 115 on the game board 110. FIG. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment has a frame lamp 157 (see FIG. 57) in the game frame 150. As shown in FIG. In the following description, the light emitting section 24, the character object light emitting section 115L and the frame lamp 157 may be collectively referred to as "light emitting lamp".
The light warning sticker 75 is attached to the game board 110 to call attention to the light of the light-emitting lamps provided on the game board 110 and the game frame 150 . In particular, the optical warning sticker 75 of the present embodiment is arranged between the light emitting section 24, the character object light emitting section 115L, and the frame lamp 157 in the board surface direction of the game board 110. FIG. In this way, the optical attention calling seal 75 is arranged between the plurality of light-emitting lamps in the board surface direction of the game board 110 , thereby making it easier for the player to pay attention to the optical attention calling seal 75 .

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 67(A), the optical attention-calling seal 75 of this embodiment is located behind the transparent game board 118 of the game board 110, and is positioned between the inner rail member 112a and the outer rail member 112b (see FIG. 57). ) are provided at positions facing each other. A game ball shot by a player first moves along the rail member 112 . Therefore, the rail member 112 is an area that the player can easily pay attention to. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by arranging the optical caution seal 75 on the rail member 112 , the player can easily draw attention to the optical caution seal 75 .

Then, as shown in FIG. 67(B), the optical alert seal 75 has a rhombic shape. Furthermore, one of the four corners of the optical warning seal 75 has a notch that differs from the other corners in shape. That is, the optical caution seal 75 is not point-symmetrical. The optical warning sticker 75 is attached to the fifth attached portion R5 provided on the game board 110. As shown in FIG.

The fifth adhered portion R5 of the present embodiment is black and made of a material that hardly transmits light. The pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is capable of showing through the transparent game board 118 the light of the light-emitting lamps arranged on the rear side of the transparent game board 118, for example. Therefore, the fifth pasting portion R5 is made difficult to transmit light so that the light from the light-emitting lamp does not obscure the optical warning sticker 75 that calls attention.

In addition, the fifth sticking portion R5 has a positioning portion r5 for positioning the optical warning sticker 75. As shown in FIG. The positioning portion r5 is a recess recessed from the surroundings and has a flat bottom. The shape of the positioning portion r5 corresponds to the optical warning sticker 75. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, the shape of the positioning portion r5 is different from the positioning portion of the adhered portion to which other seals are adhered.
Therefore, when the worker attaches the optical caution seal 75 to the game board 110, the location and direction of attachment of the optical caution seal 75 are not mistaken.

The light warning sticker 75 includes a character portion 751 for calling the player's attention to light, a general warning mark portion 752 indicating that this is a warning, and a frame line surrounding the character portion 751 and the general warning mark portion 752. 753 and have. Furthermore, the optical warning sticker 75 has a base portion 754 which is a portion other than the character portion 751 , the general warning mark portion 752 and the frame line 753 .

The character part 751 is written so that the player can watch the light of the light-emitting lamps provided on the game board 110 and the light of the light-emitting lamps provided on the game frame 150 for a long time, such as "Please do not stare at the same light for a long time." It is a content that calls attention not to continue. That is, the character portion 751 mainly indicates information directed to the player.

The general warning mark portion 752 is similar to the general warning mark portion 414 of the first embodiment.
Also, the frame line 753 is provided along the outer periphery of the optical warning sticker 75 . As a result, the optical caution seal 75 is conspicuous by, for example, indicating the boundary portion between the optical caution seal 75 and the fifth adhered portion R5.

The background portion 754 makes the character portion 751 and the general warning mark portion 752 stand out so that the player can easily see them. For example, the optical warning sticker 75 of the present embodiment displays the base portion 754 in white, the character portion 751 in black, the general warning mark portion 752 in yellow and black, and the frame line 753 in black. it's shown. In this way, the optical warning seal 75 enhances the brightness contrast between the base portion 754 and the character portion 751 other than the base portion 754 , the general warning mark portion 752 and the frame line 753 . Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the color of the base portion 754 is made different from the colors of the fifth adhered portion R5 and the surroundings of the fifth adhered portion R5. As a result, the optical caution seal 75 is conspicuous on the game board 110. - 特許庁

The optical warning seal 75 configured as described above is arranged so as to have the following relationship with respect to the distance from the player who sits in front of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and plays the game. As described above, the optical warning sticker 75 calls attention to the light from the light emitting section 24, for example. Here, for example, if the distance between the optical warning sticker 75 and the light emitting part 24 is exactly the same for the player, it is difficult for the player to recognize the order of priority between the light emitting part 24 and the optical attention calling sticker 75. Become. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 100 of the second embodiment, the distance between the light warning seal 75 and the light emitting portion 24 is determined with the glass plate 119 as a reference. Specifically, in the second embodiment, the distance between the optical caution seal 75 and the glass plate 119 in the front-rear direction is different from the distance between the light-emitting portion 24 and the glass plate 119 in the front-rear direction.

For example, the distance between the glass plate 119 facing from the front side to the rear side and the optical alert seal 75 is made longer than the distance between the glass plate 119 facing from the front side to the rear side and the light emitting portion 24 . As a result, the distance between the light warning sticker 75 and the player becomes longer than the distance between the light emitting section 24 and the player. As a result, the optical warning sticker 75 can be made less conspicuous than at least the light emitting portion 24 . The optical warning sticker 75 may discourage the player due to its characteristic of calling attention. Therefore, as described above, by arranging the optical warning sticker 75 at a position farther from the light emitting unit 24, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to lose interest.

On the other hand, for example, the distance between the glass plate 119 and the optical alert seal 75 from the front side to the rear side is made shorter than the distance between the glass plate 119 and the light emitting section 24 from the front side to the rear side. As a result, the distance between the light warning sticker 75 and the player becomes shorter than the distance between the light emitting section 24 and the player. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to notice the existence of the optical alert seal 75 . For example, there is a case where the game board 110 has no space for installing the optical caution seal 75 , and the caution seal 75 must be installed on a place other than the game board 110 . In such a case, for example, an optical warning sticker 75 is provided on the surface of the game frame 150 at a position closer to the player than the light emitting section 24 is. This makes it possible for the player to easily notice the light warning sticker 75 .

The optical warning seal 75 may be provided at a position closer to the display 130 than the light emitting section 24, for example. The optical alert seal 75 alerts the player, for example, not to stare at the light emitting section 24 for a long time. Then, when the player stops staring at the light-emitting part 24 according to the warning of the optical warning sticker 75, the player may be puzzled as to what part of the pachinko game machine 100 should be viewed. Therefore, if the display 130 is provided at a position close to the optical caution seal 75, the display 130 will be arranged near the optical caution seal 75 when the player looks at the optical caution seal 75. The game can be continued while referring to. Therefore, it is preferable to provide the optical alert seal 75 at a position close to the display 130 .

(Anti-fraud warning sticker 76)
The anti-fraud warning sticker 76 is attached to the left and lower side of the game board 110 on the surface of the game board 110 (see FIG. 57), and calls attention to the player's cheating on the game board 110 . That is, the anti-fraud alert sticker 76 displays information directed to the player.

The game board 110 of Embodiment 2 has a magnetic detection sensor to prevent illegal manipulation of game balls using magnets, for example. An anti-fraud warning sticker 76 is provided in the vicinity of this magnetic detection sensor. In Embodiment 2, the magnetic detection sensor is provided behind the first starting port 121, for example. The tamper-evident reminder seal 76 is provided on the lower side of the rail member 112 , which is closer to the first start port 121 . A game ball shot by a player first moves along the rail member 112 . Therefore, the rail member 112 is an area that the player can easily pay attention to. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by arranging the anti-tampering reminder sticker 76 in the vicinity of the first starting port 121 on the rail member 112 , the player can easily pay attention to the anti-tampering reminder sticker 76 .

Note that the anti-fraud alert sticker 76 may be attached to a position where, for example, the magnetic detection sensor is difficult for the player to see. For example, if the magnetic detection sensor becomes easily visible to the player, the player who is legally playing the game may notice the presence of the magnetic detection sensor more than necessary, and may not be able to enjoy the game. Therefore, for example, the magnetic detection sensor or the like may be configured so as to be provided at a position where it is difficult to see due to the anti-fraud warning sticker 76 .

Then, as shown in FIG. 67(B), the anti-tampering reminder sticker 76 has a rhombic shape. Furthermore, one of the four corners of the anti-fraud warning sticker 76 has a notch, unlike the shape of the other corners. That is, the anti-tampering reminder sticker 76 has a shape that is not point-symmetrical. The anti-fraud alert seal 76 is attached to the sixth attached portion R6 provided on the game board 110. As shown in FIG.

The sixth pasted portion R6 is black and made of a material that does not easily transmit light.
In addition, the sixth pasting portion R6 has a positioning portion r6 for positioning the tamper-evident seal 76. As shown in FIG. The positioning portion r6 is a recess recessed from the surroundings and has a flat bottom. The shape of the positioning portion r6 corresponds to the tamper-evident seal 76. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, the shape of the positioning portion r6 is different from that of the portion to be pasted to which other stickers are pasted.
Therefore, when the worker sticks the tamper-prevention callout sticker 76 to the game board 110, the place and sticking direction of the tamper-proof callout sticker 76 are not mistaken.

The anti-fraud alert seal 76 has a character portion 761 for alerting the player to the fraudulent game, and a frame line 762 surrounding the character portion 761 . Further, the anti-fraud alert seal 76 has a base portion 763 which is a portion other than the character portion 761 and the frame line 762 .

The character part 761 clearly states that a sensor capable of detecting fraud related to the game is provided, such as "Equipped with a fraud detection sensor", and has a content to prevent fraudulent games from being played. there is That is, the character portion 761 indicates information directed to the player.
A frame line 762 is provided along the outer circumference of the tamper-evident seal 76 . As a result, for example, by indicating the boundary portion between the fraud prevention alert seal 76 and the sixth affixed portion R6, the fraud prevention alert seal 76 is conspicuous.

The background portion 763 makes the character portion 761 and the frame line 762 stand out so that the player can easily see them. For example, the anti-tampering reminder sticker 76 of the present embodiment displays a background portion 763 in red, a character portion 761 in white, and a frame line 762 in white. In this manner, the anti-tampering reminder sticker 76 enhances the brightness contrast between the base portion 763 and the character portion 761 and the frame line 762 other than the base portion 763 .
Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the color of the base portion 763 is made different from the color of the sixth adhered portion R6 and the surrounding color of the sixth adhered portion R6. As a result, the anti-fraud prompting seal 76 is conspicuous on the game board 110. - 特許庁
Further, in the present embodiment, the color of the base portion 763 of the tamper prevention alert seal 76 is made different from the color of the base portions of the other seals. The anti-fraud prompting seal 76 gives a strong impression to the player that it is a particularly important warning in the pachinko gaming machine 100 to prevent fraud in the game.

(Board number sticker 77)
The board number sticker 77 is attached to the left side and lower side of the game board 110 on the surface of the game board 110 (see FIG. 57), and displays information regarding the management of the game board 110 . In other words, the board number sticker 77 displays information for the manager who manages the game board 110 .

The board number sticker 77 is arranged on the rear side of the transparent game board 118 of the game board 110 and at a position facing between the inner rail member 112a and the outer rail member 112b. The board number sticker 77 of this embodiment displays the model number assigned to the game board 110 .

As shown in FIG. 67(B), the board number sticker 77 of this embodiment has a generally rectangular shape. The board number sticker 77 is attached to the seventh attached portion R7 provided on the game board 110. As shown in FIG.
The 7th pasting part R7 of this embodiment is exhibiting black. Further, the seventh pasted portion R7 has a positioning portion r7 for positioning the board number sticker 77. As shown in FIG. The positioning portion r7 is a recess recessed from the surroundings and has a flat bottom. The shape of the positioning portion r7 corresponds to the board number seal 77. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, the shape of the positioning portion r7 is different from that of the portion to be pasted to which other stickers are pasted.
Therefore, when the operator sticks the board number sticker 77 to the game board 110, the operator can stick the board number sticker 77 to the wrong place.

As shown in FIG. 67B, the board number seal 77 has a character portion 771 and a code image 772 for managing the game board 110 . Furthermore, the board number seal 77 has a base portion 773 which is a portion other than the character portion 771 and the code image 772 .

The character portion 771 is alphanumeric characters used to manage the game board 110, such as “PL123456”. Alphanumeric characters common to the game board 110 of the same model are used for the character portion 771 of the present embodiment.
Also, the code image 772 is obtained by encoding information corresponding to the character portion 771 . In this example, the code image 772 is obtained by encoding “PL123456”, which is the content of the character portion 771 . Then, for example, the administrator can obtain the same information as the character portion 771 as electronic information by mechanically reading the code image 772 with a code reading device.

The background portion 773 makes the character portion 771 easy for the administrator to see, and makes the code image 772 easy for the reader to read. For example, the board number seal 77 of the present embodiment displays the background portion 773 in white, the character portion 771 in black, and the code image 772 in black.

(certificate stamp sticker 78)
FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram of the certificate stamp seal 78 of the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 68(A), the certificate stamp sticker 78 is affixed to the right side and lower side of the game board 110 on the surface of the game board 110, and displays information relating to the management of the game board 110. As shown in FIG. That is, the certificate stamp sticker 78 displays information for the administrator.
Also, the certificate stamp seal 78 is arranged outside the game area 111 (see FIG. 57) on the game board 110 . The certificate stamp sticker 78 displays a management number for uniquely identifying the game board 110 .

As shown in FIG. 68(B), the certificate stamp seal 78 has a generally rectangular shape. Furthermore, the certificate stamp seal 78 has notches at two of the four corners. As a result, the top and bottom of the certificate stamp seal 78 can be distinguished by its shape without checking the characters. The certificate stamp seal 78 is attached to the eighth attached portion R8 provided on the game board 110. As shown in FIG.
The eighth adhered portion R8 of the present embodiment is black. Further, the eighth pasted portion R8 has a positioning portion r8 for positioning the certificate stamp seal 78. As shown in FIG. The positioning portion r8 is a recess recessed from the surroundings and has a flat bottom. The shape of the positioning portion r8 corresponds to the certificate stamp sticker 78. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, the shape of the positioning portion r8 is different from that of the portion to be pasted where other stickers are pasted.
Therefore, when the worker sticks the certificate stamp sticker 78 on the game board 110, the operator can stick the certificate stamp sticker 78 to the wrong place.

The certificate stamp seal 78 of the present embodiment is issued by a gaming machine association. The certificate stamp sticker 78 displays a management number 781, which is a number for management, a union certificate 782 which is a certificate issued by the union, and a manufacturer name 783 indicating the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine. be.
The control number 781 is a unique number assigned to each game board 110 out of a plurality of game boards 110 manufactured. For example, the management number 781 of the certificate stamp sticker 78 is used to manage the game board 110 as a whole. In addition, the management number 781 of the certificate stamp sticker 78 is a management number provided for each of a plurality of components constituting the game board 110, such as a management number 841 (described later) provided on the game control board case 200c on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 100. It is used for managing a plurality of components that constitute the game board 110 by linking with the game board 110 .

The certificate stamp seal 78 of the present embodiment is configured to be most easily broken compared to other seals. Specifically, the certificate stamp seal 78 is a relatively thin piece of paper and is attached to the eighth attachment portion R8 with a relatively high-adhesive glue.
As described above, the certificate stamp seal 78 is provided with the management number 781 unique to the game board 110 . Therefore, for example, it is not preferable that the certificate stamp 78 that has already been attached to the game board 110 is peeled off and attached to another game board 110 .
Therefore, the certificate stamp seal 78 of the present embodiment is configured to be easily broken, so that even if it is peeled off, it cannot be used again, or the action of trying to peel it off is restrained.

(Frame warning sticker 79)
FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram of the frame warning sticker 79 of the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 69A, the frame warning sticker 79 is attached to the lower side of the game frame 150 on the surface of the game frame 150, and displays information calling attention to the handling of the game frame 150. As shown in FIG. That is, the frame warning sticker 79 displays information for the administrator.

In this embodiment, the frame alert seal 79 is provided in the vicinity of the shooting device 151p that shoots game balls. The frame warning sticker 79 is attached near the launching device 151p to call attention to the launching device 151p.

The frame warning sticker 79 of this embodiment has a rectangular shape. Then, the frame warning sticker 79 is attached to the ninth attached portion R9 provided on the game frame 150. As shown in FIG.

The ninth pasting portion R9 of the present embodiment is black. Further, the ninth pasted portion R9 has a positioning portion r9 for positioning the frame caution sticker 79. As shown in FIG. The positioning portion r9 is a recess recessed from the surroundings and has a flat bottom. The shape of the positioning portion r9 corresponds to the frame warning sticker 79. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, the shape of the positioning portion r9 is different from that of the portion to be pasted to which other stickers are pasted. Therefore, when the worker sticks the frame caution seal 79 to the game frame 150, the worker can stick the frame caution seal 79 to the correct position.

The frame warning sticker 79 of the present embodiment includes a character portion 791 regarding the handling of the game frame 150, a warning illustration 792 regarding the handling of the game frame 150, and a frame line 793 surrounding the character portion 791 and the warning illustration 792. have. Further, the frame warning sticker 79 has a base portion 794 which is a portion other than the character portion 791 , the warning illustration 792 and the frame line 793 .

The character portion 791 specifically instructs the administrator how to handle the launching device 151p provided in the game frame 150, for example, "Do not touch the tip of the mallet. Do not clean the tip of the mallet."
Also, a warning illustration 792 indicates an object to be handled. In this example, the warning illustration 792 expresses a simplified image of the tip of the launcher 151p, which is the object to be handled.
A frame line 793 is provided along the outer periphery of the frame warning sticker 79 . As a result, for example, the boundary portion between the frame caution seal 79 and the ninth adhered portion R9 is shown, thereby making the frame caution seal 79 stand out.

The background portion 794 makes the character portion 791, the warning illustration 792 and the frame line 793 stand out so that the player can easily see them. For example, the frame warning sticker 79 of the present embodiment displays a background portion 794 in yellow, a character portion 791 in red, a warning illustration 792 in black, and a frame line 793 in red. In this manner, the frame warning sticker 79 enhances the brightness contrast between the base portion 794 and the character portion 791 other than the base portion 794, the warning illustration 792, and the frame line 793. FIG.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the color of the base portion 794 is made different from the ninth adhered portion R9 and the surrounding color of the ninth adhered portion R9 (black in this example). As a result, the frame alert seal 79 itself is conspicuous on the game frame 150. - 特許庁

(Board warning sticker 80)
FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram of the disc warning sticker 80 of the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 70(A), the board caution sticker 80 is attached to the right side and upper side of the game board 110 on the surface of the game board 110 to call attention to the handling of the game board 110 . That is, the board attention calling sticker 80 displays information directed to the manager who manages the game board 110 .

As shown in FIG. 70(B), the disc caution sticker 80 of this embodiment has a generally rectangular shape. Furthermore, one of the four corners of the disc caution seal 80 has a notch, which is different from the other corners. That is, the disc caution seal 80 has a shape that is not point-symmetrical. The board caution seal 80 is attached to the tenth attached portion R10 provided on the game board 110. As shown in FIG.

The tenth pasted portion R10 is arranged outside the game area 111 on the game board 110 . In this embodiment, the tenth adhered portion R10 is arranged further outside the outer rail member 112b. Furthermore, the tenth pasted portion R10 is provided in the vicinity of the holding portion 150H that holds the game board 110 on the inner frame 150U. Moreover, the 10th pasting part R10 of this embodiment is exhibiting black.

In addition, the tenth sticking portion R10 has a positioning portion r10 for positioning the disc caution sticker 80. As shown in FIG. The positioning portion r10 is a recess recessed from the surroundings and has a flat bottom. Also, the shape of the positioning portion r10 corresponds to the disc caution sticker 80. As shown in FIG. As a result, when the worker sticks the board attention calling seal 80 to the game board 110, the sticking position and sticking direction of the board attention calling seal 80 are not mistaken.

The board caution seal 80 includes a first character portion 801 regarding the handling of the game board 110, a second character portion 802 regarding the handling of the game board 110, a general warning mark portion 803, a first character portion 801, It has a frame line 804 surrounding the second character portion 802 and the general warning mark portion 803 . Further, the disc caution sticker 80 has a first character portion 801 , a second character portion 802 , a general warning mark portion 803 and a base portion 805 which is a portion other than the frame line 804 .

The first character portion 801 has a content calling attention to the handling of the game board 110 when the game board 110 is mounted and demounted, for example, "Turn off the power when the game board is mounted and demounted."
The second character portion 802 has contents calling attention to handling regarding cleaning of the game board 110, for example, "Do not use detergent when cleaning the game board."
The general warning mark portion 803 is the same as the general warning mark portion 414 of the first embodiment.
A frame line 804 is provided along the outer circumference of the disc caution seal 80 . As a result, for example, by clarifying the boundary portion between the board attention calling seal 80 and the tenth adhered portion R10, the board attention calling seal 80 is made conspicuous.

The background portion 805 highlights the first character portion 801, the second character portion 802, the general warning mark portion 803, and the frame line 804 so that the administrator can easily see them. For example, the background portion 805 of this embodiment is displayed in white, the first character portion 801 is displayed in red, the second character portion 802 is displayed in black, and the frame line 804 is displayed in black. In this way, the disc caution sticker 80 enhances the brightness contrast between the base portion 805 and the first character portion 801, the second character portion 802, the general warning mark portion 803, and the frame line 804 other than the base portion 805. ing.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the color of the base portion 805 (white in this example) is made different from the color of the tenth pasted portion R10 (black in this example). As a result, the board attention calling seal 80 itself is conspicuous on the game board 110.例文帳に追加

The frame caution seal 79 and the board caution seal 80 of the second embodiment display information for the administrator. Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the glass door frame 150G is closed (see FIG. 57), the frame caution seal 79 and the board caution seal 80 are made invisible or invisible to the player. . This prevents the frame caution seal 79 and the board caution seal 80 from being misunderstood as information directed to the player.

(Frame number sticker 81)
FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram of the frame number sticker 81 of Embodiment 2. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 71(A), the frame number sticker 81 is attached to the lower side of the game frame 150 on the back side of the game frame 150, and displays information regarding the management of the game frame 150. As shown in FIG. In other words, the frame number sticker 81 displays information for the manager who manages the game frame 150 .
The frame number sticker 81 is attached to the eleventh attached portion R11 provided on the game frame 150. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 71B, the eleventh pasted portion R11 includes a positioning portion r11 for positioning the frame number sticker 81 and a transparent cover c11 covering the frame number sticker 81 pasted on the positioning portion r11. ,have.
The positioning portion r11 is a concave portion recessed from the surroundings and has a flat bottom. Also, the shape of the positioning portion r11 corresponds to the frame number sticker 81. As shown in FIG. As a result, when the operator sticks the frame number sticker 81 on the game frame 150, the sticking position and sticking direction of the frame number sticker 81 are not mistaken.
The transparent cover c11 is attached to the frame number sticker 81 so that the frame number sticker 81 affixed to the game frame 150 will not peel off or rub off when work such as installation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 on the island of the hall is performed. to protect

The frame number sticker 81 has a character portion 811 and a code image 812 for managing the game frames 150 . Further, the frame number sticker 81 has a background portion 813 which is a portion other than the character portion 811 and the code image 812 .

The character portion 811 is alphanumeric characters such as “WK654321” that are used to manage the game frame 150 . The character part 811 is a unique number assigned to each game frame 150 among the game frames 150 manufactured in plurality. For example, the character portion 811 is used to manage the game frame 150 as a whole.

A code image 812 is obtained by encoding information corresponding to the character portion 811 . In this example, the code image 812 is obtained by encoding "WK654321", which is the content of the character portion 811 .

The background portion 813 makes the character portion 811 easy for the administrator to see, and makes the code image 812 easy for the reader to read. For example, the frame number sticker 81 of the present embodiment displays the background portion 813 in white, the character portion 811 in black, and the code image 812 in black.

(Handling caution sticker 82)
FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram of the handling caution label 82 of the second embodiment.
The handling caution seal 82 is attached to the lower side of the game frame 150 on the back side of the game frame 150 (see FIG. 71(A)), and displays information calling attention to the handling of the game frame 150 . In other words, the handling caution sticker 82 displays information directed to the manager who manages the game slot 150 .
The handling caution seal 82 is attached directly to the sheet metal 150K of the game frame 150, which is the target of caution.

As shown in FIG. 72, the handling caution sticker 82 of the present embodiment includes a character portion 821 regarding the handling of the game frame 150, a warning illustration 822 regarding the handling of the game frame 150, and a frame surrounding the character portion 821 and the warning illustration 822. lines 823 and . Further, the handling caution label 82 has a base portion 824 which is a portion other than the character portion 821 , the warning illustration 822 and the frame line 823 .

The character portion 821 specifically instructs the administrator how to handle the sheet metal in the game frame 150, for example, "Be careful of the edge of the sheet metal".
In addition, the warning illustration 822 displays the content of the warning about touching the sheet metal with an illustration instead of text.
A frame line 823 is provided along the outer circumference of the handling caution label 82 . As a result, the handling attention calling seal 82 is conspicuous by, for example, indicating the boundary portion between the handling attention calling seal 82 and the metal plate 150K.

The background portion 824 makes the character portion 821, the warning illustration 822, and the frame line 823 stand out so that the administrator can easily see them. For example, the handling caution seal 82 of the present embodiment displays a background portion 824 in yellow, a character portion 821 in red, a warning illustration 822 in black, and a frame line 823 in red. In this manner, the handling caution sticker 82 enhances the brightness contrast between the base portion 824 and the character portion 821 other than the base portion 824 , the warning illustration 822 and the frame line 823 .
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the color of the base portion 824 is made different from the color (for example, metallic color) of the sheet metal 150K that is the object of attention. As a result, the handling attention calling seal 82 is conspicuous on the game frame 150.例文帳に追加

(Sub ROM seal 83)
FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram of the sub-ROM seal 83 of the second embodiment.
A sub-ROM seal 83 is provided on the back surface of the game board 110 . The sub-ROM seal 83 is directly attached to the ROM 302 of the effect control unit 300 (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the game board 110 (see FIG. 62).
As shown in FIG. 73, the sub-ROM seal 83 of this embodiment has a quasi-model name 831 related to the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and a base part 832 other than the quasi-model name 831 .
The quasi-model name 831 is displayed by omitting the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or by characters from which the model name can be guessed. For example, the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is "CR Pachinko Star 777 ~ Dream Dome Performance ~ V3B". On the other hand, the semi-model name 831 is a simplified version of the model name, such as "Star 777 Dome."

As will be described later, the official model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is displayed on the main ROM sticker 86 . On the other hand, the omitted model name is displayed on the sub-ROM seal 83 as described above. Thereby, for example, when the pachinko game machine 100 is manufactured, the ROM 302 to which the sub-ROM sticker 83 is attached and the ROM 202 to which the main ROM sticker 86 is attached are distinguished from each other so that the operator does not make a mistake. .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the combination of the character color and background color of the main ROM seal 86 is made to match the combination of the character color and background color of the sub ROM seal 83 . For example, if the background of the main ROM seal 86 is orange and the characters are black, the background of the sub ROM seal 83 is orange and the characters are black. As described above, the ROM 302 and the ROM 202 used for the same model have the same combination of the character color and the background color, so that the ROM can be distinguished from the ROMs of other different models.

(Main board management seal 84)
FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram of the main board management seal 84, the main board seal 85 and the main ROM seal 86 of the second embodiment.
The main board management seal 84 is provided on the back surface of the game board 110 and directly attached to the transparent game control board case 200c that houses the game control board 200B (see FIG. 62). In addition, CPU201, ROM202, and RAM203 (refer FIG. 3) are mounted in the game control board 200B.

As shown in FIG. 74, the main board management seal 84 has a management number 841 relating to management numbers, a code image 842, and an unsealing information column 843 for writing information about unsealing.

The management number 841 is a unique number assigned to each individual game control board 200B among the game control boards 200B manufactured in multiple units. Alphanumeric characters are used for the management number 841, for example, "XX No. 123456".
A code image 842 is obtained by encoding information corresponding to the management number 841 . In this example, the code image 842 encodes the content of the management number 841, ie, “XX No. 123456”.
The opening information column 843 is a column for the administrator who has opened the game control board case 200c to enter his/her name and the date of opening.

The main board management seal 84 is composed of a transparent seal. Therefore, the manager can visually recognize the game control board 200B in the back through the main board management seal 84. FIG.
Note that the management number 841, the code image 842, and the unsealing information column 843 are partially provided with a white background. The management number 841 is black and the code image 842 is black.

When the main board management seal 84 of this embodiment is peeled off from the game control board case 200c, it can be recognized that it has been peeled off. Specifically, when the main board management seal 84 is peeled off from the game control board case 200c, the main board management seal 84 itself and the game control board case 200c have characters such as "opened" left.

As described above, the main board management seal 84 is provided with a management number 841 unique to the game control board 200B. Therefore, for example, it is not preferable that the main board management seal 84 stuck on the game control board case 200c is peeled off and stuck on another game control board case 200c.
Therefore, the main board management seal 84 of the present embodiment is configured so that the trace of the peeling remains, so that even if it is peeled off, it cannot be used again, or the act of trying to peel it off itself is prevented. I'm trying to keep it in check.

(Main substrate seal 85)
The main board seal 85 is directly attached to the transparent game control board case 200c that accommodates the game control board 200B provided on the back surface of the game board 110. As shown in FIG.

The main board seal 85 has a model name 851 , a manufacturer name 852 , error display information 853 and external terminal information 854 .

The model name 851 displays the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100 . In the present embodiment, the model name 851 is displayed as "CR Pachinko Star 777 - Dream Dome Performance - V3B". That is, in the main board seal 85, the model name 851 displays the formal model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100 without simplification or the like.
The maker name 852 displays the name of the maker that manufactures the pachinko gaming machine 100 .
The error display information 853 clearly indicates the type of error when the LED for notifying the type of error emits light.
The external terminal information 854 indicates the relationship between terminals in the external information terminal section 900 described later and the contents of signals output from each terminal.

The main substrate seal 85 is composed of a transparent seal. Therefore, the administrator can visually recognize the rear side game control board 200B through the main board seal 85. FIG. The model name 851, manufacturer name 852, error display information 853, and external terminal information 854 are displayed in white.

(Main ROM seal 86)
The main ROM sticker 86 is attached directly to the ROM 202 of the game control unit 200 provided on the back surface of the game board 110 . That is, the main ROM sticker 86 indicates information corresponding to game specifications stored in the ROM 202 on the back side of the game board 110 .

The main ROM sticker 86 of the present embodiment has a model name 861 relating to the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100, a manufacturer name 862, and a base portion 863 other than the model name 861 and the manufacturer name 862.
The model name 861 displays the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100 . In the present embodiment, the model name 861 displays "CR Pachinko Star 777 - Dream Dome Performance - V3B". That is, in the main ROM sticker 86, the model name 861 displays the official model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100 without simplification or the like. The game specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 100 are unique to each model. Therefore, the main ROM sticker 86 of the second embodiment shows the information according to the game specifications stored in the ROM 202 by displaying the model name on the main ROM sticker 86 .

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment, the model name 735 of the spec sticker 73 also displays the official model name “CR Pachinko Star 777 ~ Dream Dome Performance ~ V3B”. That is, the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is written on the spec sticker 73, the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is written on the main ROM sticker 86, and the same model name is written on both. there is

The maker name 862 is the name of the maker that manufactures the pachinko gaming machine 100 .
The underlying portion 863 has an orange color in this embodiment. The color of the base portion 863 is the same as the color of the version display 736 of the spec sticker 73 described above. Thus, in this embodiment, the color of the base portion 863 of the main ROM seal 86 is the color of the version display 736, which is the portion other than the character portion of the specification seal 73. FIG.
As a result, for example, the administrator can select the game board based on the color of the version display 736 of the spec sticker 73 provided on the front surface of the game board 110 and the color of the base portion 863 of the main ROM sticker 86 provided on the back surface of the game board 110. It is possible to easily visually confirm that the game specifications match on the front and back of the 110.例文帳に追加

For example, the model name 861 (or manufacturer name 862) of the main ROM sticker 86 may be colored in the same color as the version display 736 of the spec sticker 73 . Even in this configuration, for example, the administrator can specify the color of the version display 736 of the spec sticker 73 provided on the front surface of the game board 110 and the model name of the main ROM sticker 86 provided on the back surface of the game board 110. With the color of 861, it is possible to easily visually confirm that the game specifications match on the front and back sides of the game board 110.例文帳に追加

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment, the character portion of the spec sticker 73 (probability information 731, prize ball number information 732, probability variable entry rate information 733, manufacturer information 734, model name 735) Other parts other than By using the color used for (version display 736) as the color of the base portion (base portion 863) of the main ROM seal 86 or the character portion (model name 861, manufacturer name 862), the front and back of the game board 110 can display the game specifications. match can be easily verified.

Further, the area of the display area of the main ROM seal 86 of the second embodiment is smaller than the area of the display area of the spec seal 73 . That is, the display area of the sticker is wider for the spec sticker 73 than for the main ROM sticker 86 . In the present embodiment, the display area is the entire area of the surface on which information such as text is provided. For example, the display area of the sticker is not the surface on which the adhesive is provided, but the opposite surface on which information is displayed.
In the second embodiment, for example, the area of the display area of the spec seal 73 is approximately three times the area of the display area of the main ROM seal 86 of the second embodiment.

For example, the spec sticker 73 is viewed by a player who has little expert knowledge of gaming machines. Therefore, by making the display area of the spec sticker 73 relatively large, the player can easily check the contents. On the other hand, by making the display area of the main ROM seal 86 relatively small, the position where the ROM 202 exists can be made inconspicuous. Then, for example, it is possible to make the ROM 202 difficult for a person who tries to illegally replace the ROM 202 to find.

The character size of the model name 861 on the main ROM sticker 86 is smaller than the character size of the model name 735 on the spec sticker 73 . That is, the character size of the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is larger on the spec sticker 73 than on the main ROM sticker 86 .
In the spec sticker 73 of the second embodiment, the character size of the model name 735 is, for example, 10pt. On the other hand, in the main ROM sticker 86 of the second embodiment, the character size of the model name 861 is, for example, 8pt.

As a result, for example, by making the character size of the spec sticker 73 relatively large, the player can easily check it. On the other hand, by making the character size of the main ROM sticker 86 relatively small, for example, it is difficult for a person who attempts to illegally replace the ROM 202 to find the ROM 202 .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the ratio of the area occupied by the model name 861 of the main ROM sticker 86 to the entire display area of the main ROM sticker 86 is the ratio of the area occupied by the model name 735 of the spec sticker 73 to the entire display area of the spec sticker 73. higher than the ratio. In other words, the main ROM sticker 86 has a higher ratio of characters indicating the model name to the display area than the spec sticker 73 .

As described above, in the second embodiment, the character size of the model name 735 of the spec sticker 73 is larger than the character size of the model name 861 of the main ROM sticker 86 . The area of the model name 735 of the spec sticker 73 is approximately 1.5 times the area of the model name 861 of the main ROM sticker 86 . Further, as described above, the area of the display area of the spec sticker 73 is approximately three times the area of the display area of the main ROM sticker 86 . That is, in the second embodiment, the area ratio of the model name of the spec sticker 73 is not as high as the area ratio of the display area to the sub-ROM sticker 83 .
In the second embodiment, the ratio of the model name 861 to the display area of the main ROM sticker 86 is about 0.5, and the ratio of the model name 735 to the display area of the spec sticker 73 is about 1. As described above, in the second embodiment, the main ROM sticker 86 has a higher percentage of characters in the display area than the spec sticker 73 does.

For example, the spec sticker 73 needs to describe the big hit probability information 731, the prize ball number information 732, the probability variable entry rate information 733, etc., in addition to the model name 735. FIG. Therefore, by making the ratio of the area occupied by the model name 735 of the spec sticker 73 to the entire display area relatively low, it is possible to sufficiently secure a writing area for the other information of the model name 735 . On the other hand, the main ROM sticker 86 should have at least the model name 861 written thereon. For this reason, the model name 861 occupies a larger proportion of the display area of the main ROM sticker 86, and is made as small as possible as a whole.

(voltage seal 87)
FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram of the voltage seal 87 of the second embodiment.
The voltage sticker 87 is attached directly to the power cord 150</b>D provided on the upper side of the game frame 150 on the back side of the game frame 150 . The voltage seal 87 calls attention to the handling of the power cord 150D of the game frame 150. FIG. In other words, the voltage sticker 87 displays information directed to the manager who manages the game slot 150 .

The voltage seal 87 is composed of a single sheet and is attached to the power cord 150D by sandwiching it between the power cord 150D and attaching the adhesive surfaces (adhesive surfaces) thereof to each other. In this embodiment, the voltage seal 87, which calls out a particularly important warning, is firmly attached to the power cord 150D by sticking the adhesive surfaces together.

The voltage sticker 87 has a rated voltage display 871 , a character portion 872 and a warning illustration 873 .
The rated voltage display 871 displays the rated voltage of the pachinko gaming machine 100 . Specifically, the rated voltage display 871 displays contents such as "24 volts caution".
Also, the character portion 872 indicates the content of a warning not to apply a voltage other than the rated voltage to the pachinko gaming machine 100 . Specifically, the character portion 872 calls attention to the handling of the power cord 150D, saying, "Do not use anything other than 24 volts, as this may cause an accident."
The warning illustration 873 is, for example, an illustration of content warning that an accident may occur.

(Modification)
FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram of Modified Example 1 of a sticker for calling attention.
As shown in FIG. 76(A), the pachinko gaming machine 100 of Modification 1 has a transparent film 150F on the rear side of the glass door frame 150G. When the glass door frame 150G is closed, the transparent film 150F is sandwiched between the game board 110 and the glass door frame 150G. In this state, at least a portion of the transparent film 150F including an optical attention calling portion 75A, which will be described later, is visible to the player through the glass plate 119. As shown in FIG.

The transparent film 150F has a light warning portion 75A that calls attention to light.
In Modified Example 1 shown in FIG. 76(B), an optical alerting portion 75A is provided between the inner rail member 112a and the outer rail member 112b (see FIG. 57).
In addition, the light warning portion 75A has a character portion 75A1 for calling the player's attention to light, and a general warning mark portion 75A2 indicating that it is a warning. Furthermore, the optical warning portion 75A has a base portion 75A3 which is a portion other than the character portion 75A1 and the general warning mark portion 75A2.

The background portion 75A3 makes the character portion 75A1 and the general warning mark portion 75A2 stand out so that the player can easily see them. For example, the optical warning portion 75A of the present embodiment displays the base portion 75A3 in yellow, the character portion 75A1 in black, and the general warning mark portion 75A2 in black. In this way, the optical attention calling portion 75A enhances the brightness contrast between the base portion 75A3 and the character portions 75A1 and general warning mark portions 75A2 other than the base portion 75A3. Furthermore, in Modification 1, the color of the base portion 75A3 is made different from the color of the surrounding members. As a result, the light warning part 75A itself is conspicuous on the game board 110. - 特許庁

Further, as shown in FIG. 76(A), the pachinko gaming machine 100 of Modification 1 has a caution sticker 89 on the glass door frame 150G of the game frame 150. As shown in FIG. Also, the caution seal 89 is provided on the side surface of the glass door frame 150G. Then, information calling attention to the handling of the game frame 150 and the game board 110 is displayed. In other words, the warning sticker 89 displays information for the administrator.

Then, as shown in FIG. 76(C), the caution seal 89 of this embodiment has a character portion 891 regarding the handling of the game frame 150 and the game board 110 and a general warning mark portion 892 . Further, the caution seal 89 has a base portion 893 which is a portion other than the character portion 891 and the general warning mark portion 892 .

The character part 891 is for the movable accessory 115 on the game board 110 when the glass door frame 150G is opened and closed, such as "Please confirm that the board surface gimmick is in the initial position before opening and closing the door." The content calls attention to the handling of That is, in this example, the caution seal 89 provided on the game frame 150 calls attention to the game board 110 .
The basic configuration of the general warning mark portion 892 is the same as that of the general warning mark portion 414 of the first embodiment.

The background portion 893 makes the character portion 891 and the general warning mark portion 892 stand out so that the player can easily see them. For example, the background portion 893 is black, the character portion 891 is white, and the general warning mark portion 892 is white and black.

Similar to the attention-calling sticker 89, there is also the following mode as the one provided on the game frame 150 to call attention to the game board 110. FIG.
For example, there is a case where the pachinko gaming machine 100 is provided with a decorative member that is separate from the game board 110 and that is apparently provided on the game frame 150 . However, the decorative member is detachable with respect to the game frame 150 . This decorative member is created based on the same motif as the game board 110, for example. That is, the game board 110 and the decoration member are a set. Therefore, when the game board 110 is replaced with respect to the game frame 150, the decorative members are also replaced. In such a case, the decorative member is treated as a part of the game board 110 rather than the game frame 150 .
In some cases, the decorative member is provided with a warning seal for calling the player's attention to the upper projecting portion 150P of the game frame 150 . In this case, this attention-calling sticker is treated as being provided on the game board 110 . The attention calling sticker is provided on the game board 110 to call attention to the game frame 150 .

FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram of Modified Example 2 of a seal regarding alerting.
As shown in FIG. 77, the game board 110 of this embodiment has a transparent game board 118 in which game nails are embedded and which forms the game area 111 . A transparent cell 118C is attached to the transparent game board 118 as a whole. The transparent cell 118C is made up of a transparent sheet and has one surface coated with an adhesive such as glue. In addition, the transparent cell 118C has, on at least a part of the transparent game board 118, a decorative portion 118d for decorating the transparent game board 118, and an attention calling portion 118k for calling the player's attention.

The decoration unit 118d, for example, decorates the motif of the pachinko gaming machine 100, such as patterns, graphics, and characters.

In Modified Example 2 shown in FIG. 77 , the attention-calling portion 118 k is provided inside the inner rail member 112 in the vicinity of the inner rail member 112 . The attention calling part 118k includes an optical attention calling part K1 calling attention to light, a fraud prevention calling part K2 calling attention to fraud, a contact attention calling seal K3 calling attention to contact, and a warning to operation. It has an operation attention calling part K4 for calling.

The light alerting unit K1 instructs the player not to stare at the same light for a long time. It is a content that calls attention not to keep watching the time. In other words, the light warning part K1 mainly indicates information directed to the player.

The anti-fraud prompting unit K2 clearly states that a sensor capable of detecting fraud in a game is provided, such as "equipped with a fraud detection sensor", to prevent fraudulent games from being played. It's becoming That is, the anti-fraud prompting section K2 indicates information directed to the player.

The contact warning seal K3 is to prevent the player from colliding with the upper protruding part 150P of the game frame 150, such as "Beware of the upper part of the frame, be careful of jumping out", or to prevent the player from colliding with the upper accessory 5 The contents are such as to prevent the player from contacting the upper accessory 5 when the is in a projecting state. That is, the contact alert seal K3 indicates information directed to the player.

The operation warning section K4 has a content to prevent the player from operating the game frame 150 with excessive force, such as "Do not operate with excessive force as it may be damaged." That is, the operation attention calling part K4 indicates information directed to the player.

In addition, the light alerting part K1, the fraud prevention alerting part K2, the contact alerting sticker K3, and the operation alerting part K4 are each drawn with black characters. In addition, the base portions other than the text portions of the optical attention alerting portion K1, the fraud prevention alerting portion K2, the contact attention alerting sticker K3, and the operation attention alerting portion K4 are displayed, for example, in white.

In the second embodiment, for example, the optical warning sticker 75 displays only a warning about staring at the light of the light-emitting lamp, but the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, the light warning seal 75 may display the contents described in the contact warning seal 71, the operation caution seal 72, and the tamper prevention seal 76, in addition to calling attention to staring at the light of the light-emitting lamp. good. The same applies to the contact attention alert seal 71, the operation attention alert seal 72, and the tamper prevention alert seal 76.

Further, in Embodiment 2, various stickers are positioned by the positioning portion constituted by the concave portion in the portion to be stuck, but the example is not limited to the concave portion. Various types of stickers may be attached to the attached portions (the first convex portion 170, the second convex portion 171, the third convex portion 172, etc.) described with reference to FIG. 35 in the first embodiment.

FIG. 78 is an overall view of the external information terminal section 900 in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment.
The pachinko game machine 100 includes an external information terminal section 900 for receiving external information signals from the frame external information terminal board 340 and the board external information terminal board 350 (see FIG. 3). By connecting the host computer installed in the hall and each terminal of the external information terminal unit 900 with a signal line, the host computer can acquire various external information.
In the external information terminal unit 900 of the present embodiment, various types of information such as "prize ball", "door/frame open", "symbol determination", "starting opening", "jackpot 1", and "jackpot 2" are stored. , “jackpot 3”, “main prize ball” and “security” signals are transmitted from the frame external information terminal board 340 and the board external information terminal board 350 .

Here, the "prize ball" is information transmitted from the payout control unit 330, and is information regarding the number of prize balls paid out. "Door/frame open" is information transmitted according to opening and closing of the glass door frame 150G or the inner frame 150U. "Pattern Confirmation" is information transmitted when the special symbol pattern variation is fixed and stopped. “Starting port” is information transmitted when a game ball wins the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 . "Jack 1" is information transmitted as ON during a jackpot game, for example. "Jackpot 2" is information transmitted from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the high-probability time-saving gaming state in the case of shifting to the high-probability time-saving gaming state after the jackpot game after the jackpot game starts. . "Jackpot 3" is information transmitted from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the low-probability time-saving gaming state in the case of shifting to the low-probability time-saving gaming state after the jackpot game after the start of the jackpot game. . “Main prize balls” is information representing the number of prize balls counted as a payout schedule in the game control unit 200 . "Security" is information sent when various errors occur.

The external information terminal section 900 has a plurality of terminals (C1 to C9) for connecting signal lines corresponding to the various signals described above. Furthermore, the terminals are color-coded according to the content of the signal. The relationship between these terminals and signals is described, for example, in the external terminal information 854 (see FIG. 74(A)).
For example, the terminal C1 outputs a "prize ball" signal and is white. The terminal C2 outputs a "door/frame open" signal and is colored green. The terminal C3 outputs a signal of "pattern confirmed" and is gray. Terminal C4 outputs a signal of "start port" and is yellow. Terminal C5 outputs a signal of "jackpot 1" and is black. The terminal C6 outputs a signal of "jackpot 2" and has a pink color. The terminal C7 outputs a signal of "jackpot 3" and is colored blue. The terminal C8 outputs a signal of "main prize ball" and has an orange color. The terminal C9 outputs a "security" signal and is light blue.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78, an external terminal seal 88 is provided in the vicinity of the external information terminal portion 900 to clearly indicate the presence of the board external information terminal board 350 . In this embodiment, the external terminal seal 88 is attached to the holding member 900c that holds the external information terminal portion 900. As shown in FIG.
The external terminal seal 88 has a character portion 881 and a frame line 882 surrounding the character portion 881 . Furthermore, the external terminal seal 88 has a base portion 883 which is a portion other than the character portion 881 and the frame line 882 . The character portion 881 has a content clearly indicating that it is the external information terminal portion 900, such as “external terminal”. A frame line 882 is provided along the outer circumference of the external terminal seal 88 .
And the base portion 883 is yellow. Also, the character portion 881 is black. And the frame line 882 is red.

In the external information terminal unit 900 configured as described above, the terminal C1 for the "prize ball" signal is white, and the terminal C5 for the "jackpot 1" signal is black. In other words, the colors of the signal terminals related to the pachinko game machine 100 are set to white and black. When adopting this configuration of colors between terminals, black and white are used for the base portion and character portion of the spec sticker 73 . For example, if the base portion of the spec sticker 73 is white, the character portion of the spec sticker 73 is black. Further, for example, when the background portion of the spec sticker 73 is black, the character portion of the spec sticker 73 is white. Similarly, black and white are used for the base portion and character portion of the main ROM seal 86 .

In the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described above, the color of the terminal for the signal related to the ball output specification, the color of the character portion and base portion of the specification sticker 73, and the character portion of the main ROM sticker 86 By using white and black for the colors constituting the base portion and the base portion, the administrator can easily manage the pachinko gaming machine 100.例文帳に追加That is, since the color forming the spec seal 73 provided on the surface of the game board 110 and the color forming the main ROM seal 86 provided on the back surface of the game board 110 are the same, It can be easily confirmed that the configuration corresponds to the game control board 200B. Furthermore, in this example, the specification sticker 73 and the main ROM sticker 86 allow the administrator to recognize that white and black are important colors, and then to connect important signal lines related to ball payout specifications to the external information terminal section. When connecting to 900, the connection work can be performed while being conscious of white and black.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the board on which each terminal of the external information terminal section 900 is mounted is printed with "CN" for each terminal. In the second embodiment, CN+number is indicated for each terminal so that each terminal can be distinguished. The CN+ characters of this embodiment are white. On the other hand, the external terminal information 854 for describing the external information terminal portion 900 on the main board seal 85 is composed of white characters. As a result, the external terminal information 854 on the main board seal 85 and the printed color of "CN" on the external information terminal section 900 correspond to each other, so that the external terminal information 854 relates to the description of the external information terminal section 900. is suggested.

In this embodiment, the colors used for the main ROM seal 86 and spec seal 73 are all included in the colors of the external terminals.

However, if the color of an important signal line is used for the spec sticker 73 or the main ROM sticker 86 that the administrator pays attention to, there is a risk that the administrator will become accustomed to the color. In particular, signal lines for door/frame opening and security are important in halls. Therefore, the color of the external terminal for opening the door/frame is not used as the character color or base color of the spec seal 73 and the main ROM seal 86 . In addition, the color of the security external terminal is not used for the character color and base color of the spec sticker 73 and the main ROM sticker 86 .

Further, for example, the spec seal 73 and main ROM seal 86 may have character portions and background portions made of white and black. In such a case, in the external information terminal section 900, terminals (white) and terminals (black) should not be provided adjacent to each other. For example, in the specification seal 73 and the main ROM seal 86, information can be made easier to see by increasing the color contrast by placing white and black adjacent to each other. However, from the worker's awareness that the colors used for the spec seal 73 and the main ROM seal 86 are white and black, a black signal line is connected next to a white terminal or a white signal line is connected next to a black terminal. There is a risk of Therefore, in this example, the terminals (white) and the terminals (black) are not adjacent to each other, and the white terminals and the black terminals are separated in advance to prevent erroneous connection of the signal lines.

Also, all the colors forming the external terminal seal 88 may be used for the colors of the terminals. For example, yellow and black are used for the external terminal seal 88 . These colors are included in the terminals (yellow and black) in the external information terminal section 900 . As a result, the portion where the external information terminal portion 900 is provided on the back surface of the game board 110 is made conspicuous, and the manager is less likely to forget the work of attaching the signal line.

Next, the variation effect in the second embodiment will be explained.
Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment, when the judgment result is a jackpot, the variable time is set to 30 to 90 seconds. In other words, the variation time is set to be longer when a big win is won. And, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponds to the production time of the fluctuation production pattern. Also, the longer the performance time of the variable performance pattern, the more special ready-to-win performance such as SP ready-to-win or SPSP ready-to-win is executed. Therefore, the longer the presentation time is, the higher the expectation of the big win is. Further, in the second embodiment, the order of expectation of a big hit is from low to high, no reach effect, normal reach effect, SP reach effect, and SP/SP reach effect.

[Pre-judgment production of Embodiment 2]
Next, an effect example of the pre-determination effect of the second embodiment will be specifically described.
In the second embodiment, the effect control unit 300 sets the display mode of the variable image 51 or the pending image 52 (hereinafter, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are collectively referred to as an “object image”) as one of the preliminary determination effects. It is possible to perform the "object change effect" of changing and the "special light emission effect" of mainly causing the light emitting part 24 of the first starting port unit 20 to emit light.
In the following description, the hold for which the preliminary determination result is to be notified by the preliminary determination effect is referred to as the notification target.
In the second embodiment, the object change effect and the special light emission effect can be executed independently. However, as will be described later, there are times when an object change effect and a special light emission effect are executed together for the same notification target.

(Object change effect)
The object change effect is executed when predetermined conditions such as the presence or absence of a big hit to be reported as a result of prior determination, the type of the big win pattern, and the variation time are satisfied. In the object change rendering, the color, pattern, shape, etc. (hereinafter referred to as display color) of the object image are changed from the default (standard) display mode. Note that in the second embodiment, the default display color of the object image is white. In the second embodiment, by changing the display color of the object image, the possibility (that is, degree of expectation) of a big winning game is suggested to the player.

In the object change effect, the object image is changed to a predetermined display color among a plurality of display colors according to the degree of expectation of winning the big prize. Here, in the second embodiment, the object image displayed in white is the default (standard) state in which no object change rendering is performed. Then, in the object change effect, the object image is changed to one of white blinking, blue, green and red display colors. These display colors are ranked. In the present embodiment, the order of blinking white → blue → green → red is from the lowest to the highest. Among these display colors, the longer the rendering time is, the higher the ratio of the selected high-ranked colors is, and the shorter the rendering time is, the higher the ratio of the low-ranked colors are selected.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the longer the effect time is, the higher the expectation of the big win is set. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the order of the degree of expectation for a big win is from low to high: white→blinking white→blue→green→red.
It should be noted that the display colors are not changed in order according to the above-mentioned order, and some display colors may be skipped. Further, in the present embodiment, the display color with a high degree of expectation does not change to the display color with a low degree of expectation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when an object change effect of blue or higher order (that is, blue, green, red) is executed, at least the reach effect (normal reach, SP reach, SPSP reach) is executed in the variable effect of the notification target. I am getting it to run.

(Special lighting effect)
The special light emission effect is executed when predetermined conditions such as the presence or absence of a big hit to be reported as a result of prior determination, the type of the big win pattern, and the variation time are satisfied. The special light emission effect is mainly performed by making the light emitting section 24 of the first starting port unit 20 have a special light emission mode.
Here, it is sufficient for the player to recognize that the special light emission effect is different from the light emission mode of the light emitting unit 24 when the special light emission effect is not executed (hereinafter referred to as non-execution time). For example, the light emitting unit 24 is turned off during non-execution, and the light emitting unit 24 is caused to emit light during special light emission production. Further, it can be exemplified that the light intensity of the light emitting unit 24 during non-execution is small and the light intensity of the light emitting unit 24 during the special light emission effect is large. Furthermore, the flashing speed of the light emitting unit 24 during non-execution is slow (light emitting interval is long), and the flashing speed of the light emitting unit 24 during the special light emission effect is fast (light emitting interval is short).

Further, in the special light emission effect, the flashing speed of the light emitting unit 24 may be constant from the start to the end of the effect. On the other hand, in the special light emission effect, the light emitting unit 24 emits light in the first blinking pattern, which is the first blinking speed, between the start of the effect and the end of the effect, and the first blinking speed is different. and a period during which light is emitted at a second blinking rate (including cases where it is faster or slower than the first blinking rate) and which is performed after the first blinking pattern. you can go

Also, the special light emission effect can emit light in any one of white light emission, blue light emission, green light emission and red light emission. These luminescent colors are ranked in the same manner as in the object change effect described above. In the present embodiment, the order of expectation for a big win is white light emission, blue light emission, green light emission, and red light emission, from low to high.

Subsequently, the variable effect of the second embodiment will be specifically described.
(Variation production example 6)
FIGS. 79-1, 79-2, 79-3, and 79-4 are explanatory diagrams of variation effect example 6 in the pattern variation effect of decorative symbols performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit.

As shown in FIG. 79-1(1), it is assumed that the decoration pattern 61 is confirmed and stopped on the image display section 114 as the variation of the previous special pattern is completed. In this example, the number combination of the fixed and stopped decorative pattern 61 is "246". Also, the number combination of the fixed and stopped small symbols 56 is "246". Further, the image display section 114 displays a pending number display 55 . The pending number display 55 remains "0". Also, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are not displayed.
Furthermore, the light emitting portion 24 of the first starting port unit 20 is turned off.

Then, the variation of the special symbol based on the winning of the first starting port 121 starts. At this time, as shown in FIG. 79-1(2), the decorative pattern 61 starts pattern variation with the action at the start of variation. In this example, the action at the time of start of fluctuation is that the decorative pattern 61 that has stopped fluctuating once moves in the direction opposite to the scrolling direction, and then scrolls in the scrolling direction. Also, the image display unit 114 displays a variation image 51 . The variation image 51 is displayed in default white. The small pattern 56 fluctuates in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the special pattern. It should be noted that the pending number display 55 is "0". Also, the light emitting unit 24 is turned off.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 79-1(3), the decorative pattern 61 changes. At this time, the light emitting unit 24 is turned off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79-1(4), the number "3" which is the left decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped. Then, in the variable production example 6, a game ball is newly won in the first starting port 121. - 特許庁At this time, since the special symbols are fluctuating, the right to judge the jackpot for the new prize is reserved. A reserved image 52 is then displayed. In addition, the pending number display 55 increases the pending number from "0" to "1".

Then, in this variable effect example 6, the right that has been won and reserved at this time is the notification target in the pre-determined effect. Then, in this example, at the timing of the winning of the first start opening 121, execution of the special light emission effect and the object change effect is started. Then, in the variable effect example 6, the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from the state of not emitting light to the state of emitting white light as a special light emitting mode after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing of winning the prize at the first start port 121. do.
Note that when the light emitting unit 24 completes the shift from the non-light emitting state to the white light emitting state, the first pending image 52 is in the middle of the transition from the non-display state to the white flashing display. At this timing, it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the first pending image 52 is displayed in white blinking.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a predetermined sound effect (for example, “pillow”) is emitted from the speaker 156 at the timing when the light emitting unit 24 emits light in a special light emitting mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79-1 (5), after the lapse of a predetermined time from the timing of the winning of the first start port 121, as the first pending image 52, from the state of non-display to the state of displaying white blinking Become. Then, in the variable effect example 6, the time required to complete the transition from the state in which the first pending image 52 is not displayed due to the object change effect to the state in which the first holding image 52 is blinking in white is the time when the light emitting unit 24 is not emitted due to the special light emitting effect. It is longer than the time required to complete the transition from the state to the state of emitting white light.

Here, the VDP 314 (see FIG. 4) of this embodiment displays effect images that constitute various effects using frame images of 60 frames per second. Then, in the special light emission effect, the light emitting unit 24 is completely shifted from the non-light emitting state to the white light emitting state by taking one frame's worth of time (=about 1.66 milliseconds). On the other hand, in the object change rendering, 30 frames of frame images are used to complete the transition of the first pending image 52 from a non-display state to a white flashing state. That is, in the object change rendering, the transition of the first pending image 52 from the non-displayed state to the white flashing state is completed by taking a time (=0.5 seconds) for 30 frames.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, the timing at which the player recognizes that the light emitting unit 24 emits white light is different from the timing at which the player recognizes that the first pending image 52 is blinking in white. ing. In the second embodiment, the player can recognize the white light emission of the light emitting unit 24 earlier than the white blinking of the first pending image 52 .

And, the fluctuation of the special design stops. At this time, as shown in FIG. 79-1(5), the decorative pattern 61 is fixed and stopped. The number combination "312" of this decorative pattern 61 is an example of a combination when the determination result of the special pattern lottery is lost.
Also, the small symbols 56 stop when the special symbols stop changing. At this time, the small pattern 56 stops at "312" which is the same number combination as the decorative pattern 61.例文帳に追加Furthermore, the variation image 51 is erased.
In addition, even if the variation of the special symbol stops, the light emitting unit 24 continues to emit white light as a special light emitting effect. In addition, the pending image 52 continues blinking in white as an object change effect.

After that, as the next special symbol starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIG. 79-1(6), the decorative pattern 61 starts to fluctuate. Further, in the image display unit 114 , the display of the reserved image 52 is changed as the variable image 51 . At this time, the variable image 51 continues to blink in white, which is the mode before the display change. Then, the small pattern 56 also starts to fluctuate. The pending number display 55 decreases from "1" to "0".
Also, the light emitting unit 24 continues to emit white light.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 79-2(7), the decorative pattern 61 changes. At this time, the image display unit 114 displays a changing image 51 that blinks in white. In addition, the light emitting unit 24 continues blinking with white light emission.
Also, at this time, the game ball wins in the first starting port 121, and the pending image 52 is newly displayed. Then, the pending number display 55 increases from "0" to "1".

After that, as shown in FIG. 79-2(8), the number "5" which is the left decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped. In the variation effect example 6, the timing of this temporary stop is used as the reference timing for transition (hereinafter, referred to as the transition reference timing), and the second change in the emission color and display color in the special light emission effect and the object change effect starts. be done. Specifically, the light emitting unit 24 completes transition from white light emission to blue light emission after a predetermined time has elapsed from the second transition reference timing.
Further, when the light emitting unit 24 completes transition from white light emission to blue light emission, the moving image 51 is in the middle of transition from white blinking to blue light emission. At this timing, it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the variable image 51 turns blue.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79-2(9), the variation image 51 completes transition from blinking white to blue after a predetermined time has elapsed from the second transition reference timing. At this time, the light emitting unit 24 is already emitting blue light. In other words, in the present embodiment, the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from white light emission to blue light emission before the changing image 51 completes the transition from white flashing to blue light emission.

In the variation effect example 6, in the special light emission effect, it takes a time of one frame (=about 1.66 milliseconds) to complete the transition of the light emitting unit 24 from white light emission to blue light emission. On the other hand, in the object change rendering, 60 frames of frame images are used to completely change the changing image 51 from blinking white to blue. That is, in the object change rendering, the time (=1 second) for 60 frames is spent to completely change the changing image 51 from blinking white to blue.
In this embodiment, the number of frames (for example, 60 frames) used to complete the color change of the already displayed object image (variation image 51, pending image 52) is the same as the object image from the undisplayed state. This is more than the number of frames used to complete the color change (eg, 30 frames).
In the variation effect example 6, by causing the light emitting unit 24 to emit blue light before the variation image 51 is completely changed to blue, the player can see the color to which the variation image 51 is to be changed momentarily. I am letting you know.

Further, in the present embodiment, the frame lamp 157 and the character object light emitting section 115L are also made to emit blue light at the timing when the light emitting section 24 shifts from white light emission to blue light emission. However, the blue light emission of the frame lamp 157 and the role object light emitting section 115L is temporary, and at least after the changing image 51 changes to blue, it is turned off or emits light in another color such as white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79-2 (10), the number "5" which is the left decorative pattern 61 and the number "5" which is the right decorative pattern 61 temporarily stop, and the two decorative patterns 61 are aligned. A normal reach is established by temporarily stopping in a state where the At this time, the variable image 51 is blue, and the light emitting unit 24 emits blue light.
Also, in this example, two pending images 52 are newly displayed as the game ball wins two prizes in the first starting hole 121 . That is, the first, second and third pending images 52 are displayed. Then, the pending number display 55 increases from "1" to "3".

Further, after that, as shown in FIG. 79-2 (11), using a predetermined timing in the normal reach state as a transition reference timing, execution of the third change in the light emission color and the change in the display color in the special light emission effect and the object change effect starts. be done. Specifically, the light emitting unit 24 completes transition from blue light emission to green light emission after a predetermined time has elapsed from the third transition reference timing.
Further, when the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from blue light emission to green light emission, the moving image 51 is in the middle of the transition from blue to green. At this timing, it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the variable image 51 turns green.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79-2(12), the variation image 51 completes the transition from blue to green after a predetermined time has elapsed from the third transition reference timing. At this time, the light emitting unit 24 is already flashing green light. In other words, in variation rendering example 6, the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from blue light emission to green light emission before the variation image 51 changes from blue to green.

In the variable effect example 6, in the special light emission effect, the light emitting unit 24 is completely shifted from blue light emission to green light emission in a period of one frame (=approximately 1.66 milliseconds). On the other hand, in the object change rendering, 60 frames of frame images are used to completely change the changing image 51 from blue to green. That is, in the object change rendering, the transition of the variable image 51 from blue to green is completed in 60 frames (=1 second).
In the variation effect example 6, by causing the light emitting unit 24 to emit green light before the variation image 51 is completely changed to green, the player can see the color of the variation image 51 after that momentarily. I am letting you know.

In the present embodiment, the frame lamp 157 and the character object light emitting section 115L also emit green light at the timing when the light emitting section 24 shifts from blue light emission to green light emission. However, the green light emission of the frame lamp 157 and the character object light emitting section 115L is temporary, and at least after the changing image 51 changes to green, it is turned off or emits light in another color such as white.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79-3 (13), in the image display section 114, the decoration pattern 61 is reduced and displayed, and the game shifts to SP reach. At this time, the variable image 51 is green, and the light emitting unit 24 emits green light.

Further, as shown in FIG. 79-3 (14), with a predetermined timing after the transition of the SP reach as the transition reference timing, the fourth change in the emission color and the change in the display color in the special light emission effect and the object change effect. Execution is started. Specifically, the light emitting unit 24 completes transition from green light emission to red light emission after a predetermined time has elapsed from the fourth transition reference timing.
Further, when the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from green light emission to red light emission, the moving image 51 is in the middle of the transition from green to red. At this timing, it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the changing image 51 turns red.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79-3 (15), the variation image 51 completes the transition from green to red after a predetermined time has elapsed from the fourth transition reference timing. At this time, the light emitting unit 24 is already emitting red light. That is, in the variation effect example 6, the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from green light emission to red light emission before the change of the variable image 51 from green to red is completed.

In the variation effect example 6, in the special light emission effect, the light emitting unit 24 is completely shifted from green light emission to red light emission in a period of one frame (=approximately 1.66 milliseconds). On the other hand, in the object change rendering, 60 frames of frame images are used to completely change the changing image 51 from green to red. That is, in the object change rendering, the transition of the variable image 51 from green to red is completed by taking 60 frames (=1 second).
In the variation effect example 6, by causing the light emitting unit 24 to emit red light before the variation image 51 is completely changed from green to red, the player can see the color to which the variation image 51 changes after that. I'll let you know as soon as possible.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the frame lamp 157 and the character object light emitting section 115L are also made to emit red light at the timing when the light emitting section 24 shifts from green light emission to red light emission. However, the red light emission of the frame lamp 157 and the character object light emitting section 115L is temporary, and at least after the changing image 51 changes to red, it is turned off or emits light in another color such as white.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79-3 (16), the image display unit 114 shifts to SPSP reach. At this time, the decorative pattern 61 and the reserved image 52 are no longer displayed on the image display section 114 . However, the pending number display 55 and the small pattern 56 remain displayed on the image display section 114, respectively.
Further, after the transition to SPSP reach, the variation image 51 is red, and the light emitting unit 24 continues blinking with red light emission.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79-3 (17), the image display section 114 displays a lever operation image 538 prompting the player to operate the effect lever 161L. In this variation effect example 6, the variation image 51 is hidden while the lever operation image 538 is being displayed. However, the light emitting unit 24 continues to emit red light even when the red varying image 51 is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79-3 (18), when the player operates the effect lever 161L while the lever operation image 538 is being displayed, the movable accessory 115 positioned above the game board 110 is displayed. descends to the center of the game board 110. In the variation effect example 6, the movable accessory 115 is positioned at the appearance position overlapping the image display section 114 in the central portion of the image display section 114 . Then, the movable accessory 115 causes the accessory light emitting section 115L to emit light. At this time, the light emission mode of the role object light emitting section 115L is different from the state in which it is positioned at the standby position, the amount of light is large, the speed of light emission blinking is high, and the number of light emission colors is large. In addition, the image display section 114 displays an effect image 115e emphasizing the presence of the movable accessory 115. FIG.
In this variation effect example 6, while the movable accessory 115 faces the central portion of the image display section 114 and the effect image 115e is being displayed on the image display section 114, the variation image 51 is not displayed. to However, the light emitting unit 24 continues to emit red light even when the red varying image 51 is not displayed.
As described above, it is assumed that the player will worry that the degree of expectation has decreased because the variable image 51 of red color, which has a high degree of expectation, is not displayed. However, in the variable effect example 6, since the light emitting unit 24 continues to emit light in a color corresponding to the display color of the variable image 51, the player can enjoy the effect without worrying.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 79-4 (19), when the movable accessory 115 returns to the standby position, the double-digit decorative pattern 61 temporarily stops on the image display section 114 . In this example, three decorative symbols 61 corresponding to the number "5" are temporarily stopped.
In addition, when the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 61 of double eyes is displayed, the red variation image 51 is displayed again. Note that the light emitting unit 24 continues to emit red light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79-4 (20), the image display unit 114 displays decorative patterns 61 having the same number "5" and having high decorativeness, and these three decorative patterns 61 are confirmed and stopped. do. In the illustrated example, the decorative symbols 61 are displayed in a combination of "555" to inform the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. It should be noted that the small pattern 56, like the decorative pattern 61, is fixed and stopped at the number "555".
Here, the decorative pattern 61 is fixed and stopped, and after the fixed time is completed, the light emitting section 24 stops red light emission. That is, the light emitting unit 24 ends the light emission as the special light emission effect in accordance with the stop of the symbol variation of the right to be notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79-4(21), an opening image 589 is displayed on the image display section 114. FIG. The opening image 589 is an image for informing the player of the start of the jackpot game. More specifically, the characters "BIG Bonus! Configurations" are displayed in the opening image 589 of the present embodiment. A right-handed shot image 542 is also displayed on the image display section 114 . After that, a jackpot game is executed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment, a special light emitting effect is executed using the light emitting section 24 that emits light in a special light emitting mode so as to expect a big win. A decorative sticker 23 that is the motif of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is provided in the vicinity of the light emitting section 24 . Therefore, the player can easily pay attention to the light emitting section 24 .
Also, in the special light emission effect, when the light emitting unit 24 emits light, a sound effect is output from the speaker 156, for example. This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the light emitting section 24 when the light emitting section 24 emits light.
On the other hand, in the pachinko game machine 100 of the second embodiment, for example, by providing an optical caution seal 75 on the surface of the game board 110, the player is cautioned not to stare at the light emitting section 24 more than necessary. This prevents the player from feeling dazzled.

FIG. 80 is a timing chart of the special light emission effect and the object change effect in example 6 of the variable effect.
As shown in FIG. 80, from the timing of winning of the notification target to the completion of transition of the light emitting unit 24 to white light emission in the special lighting effect and the completion of transition of the object image to white blinking in the object change effect, There is a time difference.
Also, from the second transition reference timing until the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from white light emission to blue light emission in the special light emission effect, and until the object image completes the transition from white blinking to blue light in the object change effect, There is a time difference.
Furthermore, from the third transition reference timing until the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from blue light emission to green light emission in the special light emission effect, and until the object image completes the transition from blue to green in the object change effect, There is a time difference.
Then, from the fourth transition reference timing, there is a time difference between when the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from green light emission to red light emission in the special light emission effect and when the object image completes the transition from green to red in the object change effect. is occurring.

Then, for example, the white light emission period in which white light is emitted in the special light emission effect is longer than the white flashing period in which white light is flashed in the object change effect (after the transition to white blinking is completed and before the transition to blue is completed). It's getting shorter. In this way, when focusing on a change to a specific color, the execution time of the special light emission effect for the notification target right is shorter than the execution time of the object change effect for the notification target right.

(Variation production example 7)
FIGS. 81-1, 81-2, 81-3, and 81-4 are explanatory diagrams of example 7 of the decorative symbol variation effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit.

As shown in FIG. 81-1(1), it is assumed that the decoration pattern 61 is confirmed and stopped on the image display section 114 as the variation of the previous special pattern is completed. In this example, the number combination of the fixed and stopped decorative pattern 61 is "765". Also, the number combination of the fixed and stopped small symbols 56 is "765". Furthermore, the image display section 114 displays a pending number display 55 and a small pattern 56 . The pending number display 55 is "0". Also, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are not displayed. Furthermore, the light emitting part 24 of the first starting port unit 20 is turned off.

Then, the variation of the special symbol based on the winning of the first starting port 121 starts. At this time, as shown in FIG. 81-1(2), the decorative pattern 61 starts pattern variation with the action at the start of variation. Also, the image display unit 114 displays a variation image 51 . The variation image 51 is displayed in default white. The small pattern 56 fluctuates in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the special pattern. It should be noted that the pending number display 55 is "0". Also, the light emitting unit 24 is turned off.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 81-1(3), the decorative pattern 61 changes. At this time, the light emitting unit 24 is turned off. Moreover, in this example 7 of variation production|presentation, a game ball newly wins the 1st start opening 121. FIG. Then, the reserved image 52 is newly displayed. In addition, the pending number display 55 increases the pending number from "0" to "1".

After that, as shown in FIG. 81-1(4), the number "8" which is the left decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped.
Then, as shown in FIG. 81-1(5), the number "3" which is the right decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped. In addition, in the variation production example 7, the game ball further wins the first start opening 121 . Then, in this variable effect example 7, the right that has been won and reserved at this time is the notification target in the pre-determined effect. In variation effect example 7, execution of the special light emission effect and the object change effect is started at the timing of the winning of the first start opening 121 . Then, in the variation effect example 7, the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from the state of not emitting light to the state of emitting green light as a special light emitting mode after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing of winning the prize at the first start port 121. do.
Further, when the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from the non-light emitting state to the green light emitting state, the second pending image 52 is in the middle of the transition from the non-display state to the green display. At this timing, it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the second pending image 52 turns green.
It should be noted that, in variation effect example 7, a predetermined effect sound is emitted from the speaker 156 in accordance with the timing at which the light emitting unit 24 emits light in a special light emitting mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 81-1 (6), the second pending image 52 completes the transition from the non-displayed state to the green display after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing of winning the prize at the first start port 121. do. At this time, the light emitting unit 24 is already emitting green light. That is, in the variation effect example 7, the light emitting unit 24 starts emitting green light before the second green pending image 52 is displayed.
In addition, in example 7 of variable effect, the relationship between the time required for transition of the emission color in special light emission effect and the time required for transition of display in object change effect is the same as example 6 of variable effect. In the variation effect example 7, by causing the light emitting unit 24 to emit green light before the green second pending image 52 is displayed, the second pending image to be displayed after that is displayed to the player. The color of the image 52 is notified a moment earlier.
In addition, the pending number display 55 increases the pending number from "1" to "2".

And, the fluctuation of the special design stops. At this time, as shown in FIG. 81-2(7), the decorative pattern 61 is fixed and stopped. The combination “813” of the numbers of this decorative pattern 61 is an example of a combination when the determination result of the special pattern lottery is lost.
Also, the small symbols 56 stop when the special symbols stop changing. At this time, the small pattern 56 stops at "813", which is the same number combination as the decorative pattern 61.例文帳に追加Furthermore, the variation image 51 is erased.
In addition, even if the variation of the special symbol stops, the light emitting unit 24 continues green light emission as a special light emission effect. Also, the pending image 52 continues to be displayed in green as an object change effect.

After that, as the next special symbol starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIG. 81-2(8), the decorative pattern 61 starts to fluctuate. Also, in the image display unit 114 , the display of the first pending image 52 is changed as the variable image 51 . Also, the position of the second reserved image 52 moves as the first reserved image 52 . At this time, the first reserved image 52 continues to be displayed in green, which is the mode before being moved. Then, the small pattern 56 also starts to fluctuate. Note that the pending number display 55 decreases from "2" to "1". Also, the light emitting unit 24 continues to emit green light.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 81-2(9), the decorative pattern 61 changes.
Then, in the variation effect example 7, the game ball wins twice in the first starting hole 121, and the second and third pending images 52 are newly displayed in order. Then, the pending number display 55 increases from "1" to "3".
Also, a green pending image 52 is displayed on the image display section 114 . Then, using a predetermined timing as a transition reference timing, execution of the second emission color change and display color change in the special light emission effect and the object change effect is started. Specifically, the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from green light emission to red light emission after a predetermined time has elapsed from the second transition reference timing.
When the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from green light emission to red light emission, the first pending image 52 is in the middle of the transition from green to red. At this timing, it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the changing image 51 turns red.

Then, as shown in FIG. 81-2(10), the first pending image 52 completes the transition from green to red after a predetermined time has elapsed from the third transition reference timing. At this time, the light emitting unit 24 is already emitting red light.
In addition, in example 7 of variable effect, the relationship between the time required for the transition of the light emission color in the special light emission effect and the time required for the change of the display color in the object change effect is the same as in example 6 of the variable effect. That is, in variation effect example 7, the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from green light emission to red light emission before the pending image 52 changes from green to red. In variation effect example 7, the light emitting part 24 is made to emit red light before the pending image 52 turns red, so that the player is instantly informed of the color of the pending image 52 that will change after that.

In addition, in the variation effect example 7, the frame lamp 157 and the character object light emitting section 115L are also made to emit red light at the timing when the light emitting section 24 shifts from green light emission to red light emission. However, the red light emission of the frame lamp 157 and the character object light emitting unit 115L is temporary, and at least after the reserved image 52 changes color to red, it is turned off or emits light in another color such as white.

Further, as shown in FIG. 81-2 (10), the number "2" which is the left decorative design 61 is temporarily stopped, and the number "5" which is the right decorative design 61 is temporarily stopped.

And, the fluctuation of the special design stops. At this time, as shown in FIG. 81-2 (11), the decorative pattern 61 is fixed and stopped. The number combination "275" of this decorative pattern 61 is an example of a combination when the determination result of the special pattern lottery is lost.
Also, the small symbols 56 stop when the special symbols stop changing. At this time, the small pattern 56 stops at "275" which is the same as the number combination of the decorative pattern 61.例文帳に追加Furthermore, the variation image 51 is erased.
Incidentally, even if the variation of the special symbol stops, the light emitting unit 24 continues blinking by red light emission as a special light emission effect. Also, the first pending image 52 continues to be displayed in red as an object change effect.

After that, as the next special symbol starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIG. 81-2 (12), the decorative pattern 61 starts to fluctuate. Also, in the image display unit 114 , the display of the first pending image 52 is changed as the variable image 51 . At this time, the variable image 51 continues to be displayed in red, which is the mode before the display change. Also, the positions of the second and third reserved images 52 are moved as the first and second reserved images 52, respectively. Then, the small pattern 56 also starts to fluctuate. Note that the pending number display 55 decreases from "3" to "2". Further, the light emitting unit 24 continues to emit red light.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 81-3 (13), the decorative pattern 61 changes.
Then, as shown in FIG. 81-3 (14), the number "2" which is the left decorative pattern 61 and the number "2" which is the right decorative pattern 61 are temporarily stopped, and the two decorative patterns 61 are aligned. A normal reach is established by temporarily stopping in a state where the At this time, the variable image 51 is red, and the light emitting unit 24 emits red light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 81-3 (15), in the image display section 114, the decorative pattern 61 is displayed in a reduced size, and the game shifts to SP reach. At this time, the variable image 51 is red, and the light emitting unit 24 emits red light.

Further, as shown in FIG. 81-3 (16), the image display unit 114 shifts to SPSP reach. At this time, the decorative pattern 61 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed on the image display section 114 . However, the pending number display 55 and the small pattern 56 are displayed on the image display section 114, respectively.
Further, in the variation effect example 7, when the game shifts to the SPSP reach, the red variation image 51 is also hidden. On the other hand, the light emitting unit 24 continuously emits red light.
In the variation effect example 7, it is assumed that the player is worried that the expectation level has decreased because the variation image 51 with the high expectation level of red is not displayed. However, in variation effect example 7, since the light emitting unit 24 continues to emit light in the color corresponding to the display color of the variation image 51, the player can enjoy the effect without worrying. .

Then, as shown in FIG. 81-3 (17), the decorative pattern 61 of double eyes is temporarily stopped on the image display section 114 . In this example, three decorative symbols 61 corresponding to the number "2" are temporarily stopped.
In addition, when the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 61 of double eyes is displayed, the light emitting unit 24 continues to emit red light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 81-3 (18), the image display section 114 temporarily stops the ornamental pattern 61 which is double and highly decorative with the same number "2".
In the variation effect example 7, the variation image 51 and the pending image 52 are displayed at the timing when the three decorative symbols 61 are temporarily stopped. At this time, the variable image 51 is displayed in red, which is the mode before it is hidden.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 81-4 (19), in the example 7 of variation production, promotion production is executed. In the promotion performance, the player expects whether or not the double decorative pattern 61 of the number '2' temporarily stopped becomes the double decorative pattern 61 of another number. At this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are hidden.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81-4 (20), the decorative symbols 61 are displayed in a combination of "555", thereby informing the player that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. . In other words, the decorative pattern 61 is an example of promotion to a decorative pattern that is a jackpot that is more profitable for the player than the double decorative pattern before the promotion effect. At this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 remain undisplayed.
It should be noted that the small pattern 56, like the decorative pattern 61, is fixed and stopped at the number "555".
Here, the decorative pattern 61 is fixed and stopped, and after the completion of the fixed time, the light emitting section 24 stops flashing with red light emission. That is, the light emitting unit 24 ends the light emission as the special light emission effect in accordance with the stop of the symbol variation of the right to be notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 81-4(21), an opening image 589 is displayed on the image display section 114. FIG. The opening image 589 is an image for informing the player of the start of the jackpot game. More specifically, the characters "BIG Bonus! Configurations" are displayed in the opening image 589 of the present embodiment. A right-handed shot image 542 is also displayed on the image display section 114 . After that, a jackpot game is executed.

Then, in variation effect example 7, the execution time of the special light emission effect for the right to be notified differs from the execution time of the object change effect for the right to be notified.
In the variation effect example 7, the execution time of the object change effect for the right to be notified is, for example, from the start of the display of the green pending image 52 in conjunction with the winning of the right to be notified to the red variable image 51. It is the time until it changes and disappears with the transition of the SPSP reach. On the other hand, the execution time of the special light emission effect for the right to be notified is, for example, when the right to be notified is won, the light emitting unit 24 starts emitting green light, then shifts to light emitting red, and the symbol of the right to be notified is displayed. This is the time until the light emitting unit 24 is extinguished when the fluctuation is fixed and stopped. Therefore, in variation effect example 7, the execution time of the special light emission effect for the right to be notified is longer than the execution time of the object change effect for the right to be notified.

FIG. 82 is a timing chart of the special light emission effect and the object change effect in Example 7 of variation effect.
As shown in FIG. 82, there is a time difference between the timing of the winning of the notification target and the completion of the transition of the light emitting unit 24 to green light emission in the special light emission effect and the completion of the transition of the object image to green in the object change effect. is occurring.
In addition, there is a time difference from the second transition reference timing until the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from green light emission to red light emission in the special light emission effect and until the object image completes the transition from green to red in the object change effect. is occurring.

In addition, in Example 7 of variation effect, the total effect time from the start to the end of the special light emission effect is from the start to the end of the object change effect, and temporarily at the time of Zoro Mekari stop. It is longer than the total time the object image is displayed. Thus, as a whole effect, the execution time of the special light emission effect for the right to be notified is longer than the execution time of the object change effect for the right to be notified.

Also, for example, the green light emission period during which green light is emitted in the special light emission effect is shorter than the green period during which green light is emitted in the object change effect (after the completion of the transition to green and before the completion of the transition to red). there is In this way, when focusing on a change to a specific color, the execution time of the special light emission effect for the notification target right is shorter than the execution time of the object change effect for the notification target right.

(Variation production example 8)
FIGS. 83-1, 83-2, and 83-3 are explanatory diagrams of example 8 of the decorative symbol variation effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit.
Note that the variation effect example 8 is an example in which the pending image 52 is displayed but the variation image 51 is not displayed. For example, when a special symbol change is started for the reserved right, the reserved image 52 corresponding to the reserved right is erased (that is, reserved digestion).

As shown in FIG. 83-1(1), it is assumed that the decoration pattern 61 is fixed and stopped on the image display section 114 as the variation of the previous special pattern is completed. In this example, the number combination of the fixed and stopped decorative symbols 61 is "135". Also, the number combination of the fixed and stopped small symbols 56 is "135". Then, in the variation effect example 8, two pending images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114 . Furthermore, the image display section 114 displays a pending number display 55 indicating the number "2" indicating that there are two pending.
Furthermore, the light emitting part 24 of the first starting port unit 20 is turned off.

Then, the variation of the special symbol based on the winning of the first starting port 121 starts. At this time, as shown in FIG. 83-1(2), the decorative pattern 61 starts pattern variation with the action at the start of variation. In the image display unit 114 , the first pending image before the start of the change is erased, and the second pending image 52 before the start of the change is moved to the position of the first reserved image 52 . Note that the pending image 52 is displayed in white, which is the default. Then, the small pattern 56 fluctuates in synchronism with the start of fluctuation of the special pattern. Also, the pending number display 55 becomes "1". Furthermore, the light emitting unit 24 is turned off.

Then, as shown in FIG. 83-1(3), the decorative pattern 61 changes.
Furthermore, in the variation production example 8, a game ball wins the first starting port 121 . Then, in this variable effect example 8, the right reserved based on the winning at this time is the notification target in the pre-determined effect. Then, in this example, at the timing of the winning of the first start opening 121, execution of the special light emission effect and the object change effect is started. Then, in the variation effect example 8, the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from the state of not emitting light to the state of emitting white light as a special light emitting mode after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing of winning the prize at the first start port 121. do.
Note that when the light emitting unit 24 completes the shift from the non-light emitting state to the white light emitting state, the second pending image 52 is in the middle of the transition from the non-display state to the white flashing display. At this timing, it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the second pending image 52 is displayed in white blinking. Note that the pending number display 55 changes from "1" to "2".
Furthermore, in variation effect example 8, a predetermined effect sound is emitted from the speaker 156 in accordance with the timing at which the light emitting unit 24 emits light in a special light emitting mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 83-1 (4), the second pending image 52 completes the transition from the non-displayed state to the white flashing display after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing of winning the prize at the first start port 121. do. In addition, in example 8 of variable effect, the relationship between the time required for transition of the emission color in special light emission effect and the time required for transition of display in object change effect is the same as example 6 of variable effect.

And, the fluctuation of the special design stops. At this time, as shown in FIG. 83-1(4), the decorative pattern 61 is fixed and stopped. The number combination "684" of this decorative pattern 61 is an example of a combination when the determination result of the special pattern lottery is lost. Also, the small symbols 56 stop when the special symbols stop changing. At this time, the small pattern 56 stops at "684" which is the same as the number combination of the decorative pattern 61.例文帳に追加
Incidentally, even if the variation of the special symbol stops, the light emitting unit 24 continues blinking by white light emission as a special light emission effect. Also, the second pending image 52 continues blinking in white as an object change effect.

After that, as the next special symbol starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIG. 83-1(5), the decorative pattern 61 starts to fluctuate. Also, in the image display unit 114, the first pending image 52 is erased. Also, the second reserved image 52 before the start of fluctuation moves to the position of the first reserved image 52 . At this time, the first reserved image 52 continues white blinking, which is the aspect of the second reserved image 52 before the start of the fluctuation.
In addition, in this variation production example 8, the game ball wins the first start hole 121 at this timing. Therefore, the second reserved image 52 is newly displayed. Note that the pending number display 55 remains "2" apparently due to pending completion and pending occurrence. Also, the light emitting unit 24 continues blinking in white.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 83-1(6), the decorative pattern 61 changes.
At this timing, in the example 8 of variable production, the game ball is further entered into the first starting port 121. - 特許庁Then, the third pending image 52 is newly displayed. The pending number display 55 changes from "2" to "3".

After that, the fluctuation of the special symbol which has fluctuated is stopped. At this time, as shown in FIG. 83-2(7), the decorative pattern 61 is fixed and stopped. The number combination "312" of this decorative pattern 61 is an example of a combination when the determination result of the special pattern lottery is lost. Also, the small symbols 56 stop when the special symbols stop changing. At this time, the small pattern 56 stops at "312" which is the same as the number combination of the decorative pattern 61.例文帳に追加
In addition, even if the variation of the special symbol stops, the light emitting unit 24 continues to emit white light as a special light emitting effect. Also, the first pending image 52 continues blinking in white as an object change effect.

Then, as the next special symbol starts to fluctuate, the decorative pattern 61 starts to fluctuate as shown in FIG. 83-2(8). Also, in the image display unit 114, the first pending image 52 is erased. That is, the first pending image 52 blinking in white before the change starts is erased. That is, the change of the rights of the notification target by the pre-determination effect is started. In addition, the object change rendering ends when the pending image 52 to be notified is erased. Also, the second reserved image 52 before the start of fluctuation moves to the position of the first reserved image 52 . Note that the pending number display 55 changes from "3" to "2".
Then, in variation effect example 8, the light emitting unit 24 continuously performs white blinking. As described above, in the example 8 of variation effect, even after the holding image 52, which is the target of notification and is blinking in white, is erased, the light-emitting unit 24 continues to notify the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot. done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 83-2 (10), the number "6" which is the left decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped. At this time, the light emitting unit 24 continues blinking by white light emission as a special light emission effect.
Then, as shown in FIG. 83-2 (11), the number "6", which is the right decorative pattern 61, is temporarily stopped, and the two decorative patterns 61 are temporarily stopped, thereby establishing normal reach. . At this time, the light emitting unit 24 continues blinking by white light emission as a special light emission effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 83-2 (12), it shifts to SP reach. At this time, the light emitting unit 24 stops blinking with white light emission. That is, the light emitting unit 24 ends the light emission as the special light emission effect. As described above, in variation effect example 8, the special light emission effect ends before the symbol variation for the right to be notified stops.
Further, in the variation effect example 8, the pending image 52 is hidden at the timing of shifting to SP reach.

Further, as shown in FIG. 83-3 (13), a fan effect is executed to determine whether or not the middle decorative design 61 is aligned with the left decorative design 61 and the right decorative design 61 .
Then, as shown in FIG. 83-3 (14), the decorative pattern 61 is fixed and stopped. The number combination "676" of this decorative pattern 61 is an example of a combination when the determination result of the special pattern lottery is lost.
Further, in the variable effect example 8, the pending image 52 is displayed again at the timing when the decorative pattern 61 is fixed and stopped. In addition, although this example 8 of variable performance is a case of a final loss, even in the case of a big win, the reserved image 52 that has been hidden is displayed again at the timing when the decorative pattern 61 is fixed and stopped.

FIG. 84 is a timing chart of the special light emission effect and the object change effect in Example 8 of variation effect.
As shown in FIG. 84, in variation effect example 8, from the timing of winning of the notification target until the transition of the light emitting unit 24 to white light emission is completed in the special light emission effect, and the transition of the object image to white flashing is completed in the object change effect. There is a time lag between when and when.

In the example 8 of variable performance, the total performance time from the start to the end of the special light emission performance is longer than the total performance time from the start to the end of the object change performance. Thus, as a whole effect, the execution time of the special light emission effect for the right to be notified is longer than the execution time of the object change effect for the right to be notified.

[Customer waiting performance]
Next, an example of the customer waiting effect in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment will be described.
FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram of the customer waiting effect of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 85, the variation of the decorative pattern 61 is stopped and displayed, and the customer waiting effect is started based on the customer waiting effect command set in S3207 of FIG.
In the customer waiting effect of the present embodiment, a demonstration image 92, an alert image 93, and a model name image 94 are reproduced in order.

The demonstration image 92 is an image related to the game of the pachinko gaming machine 100, such as an explanation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and a demonstration of a predetermined effect with a high expectation of a big win.

In addition, the attention calling image 93 is an image for calling the attention of the player regarding the pachinko gaming machine 100 . The alert image 93 can be visually recognized by the player when the glass door frame 150G is closed, for example, and displays the content written on the sticker showing the information to the player (see FIG. 57). In the present embodiment, the caution image 93 displays the contents described on the contact caution seal 71 , the operation caution seal 72 , the optical caution seal 75 and the anti-fraud seal 76 .

Further, the model name image 94 is an image indicating “CR Pachinko Star 777 ~Dream Dome Tour~”, which is part of the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100, as described above.
In the customer waiting effect, the screen transitions of FIGS. 85(a) to 85 are repeated until the customer waiting flag is turned off.

FIG. 86 is a reception screen for setting regarding the content of the player's effect in the symbol variation effect of the pachinko gaming machine 100 . This reception screen is displayed according to the menu screen 571 (see FIG. 49).
In this example, in the symbol variation effect, a first setting item 951 for receiving settings for effects using the upper accessory 5, a second setting item 952 for receiving settings for effects using the effect lever 161L, the light emitting unit 24, etc. and a third setting item 953 for receiving settings for effects using various lamps.

The first setting item 951 is an item for receiving the setting of the frequency with which the upper accessory 5 is projected in the symbol variation effect. The effect control unit 300 adjusts the selection probability of the variable effect pattern using the upper accessory 5 among the plurality of variable effect patterns according to the setting received from the player in the first setting item 951 . That is, when the player desires to make the upper accessory 5 appear frequently, the effect control section 300 makes it easier for the variable effect pattern using the upper accessory 5 to be selected. On the other hand, when the player desires that the upper accessory 5 hardly appears, the production control unit 300 makes it difficult to select the variable production pattern using the upper accessory 5.例文帳に追加

The second setting item 952 is an item for receiving the setting of the frequency of instructing the player to operate the effect lever 161L in the symbol variation effect. The effect control unit 300 adjusts the selection probability of the variable effect pattern using the effect lever 161L among the plurality of variable effect patterns according to the setting received from the player in the second setting item 952 .

The third setting item 953 is an item for receiving setting of the frequency of effects using various lamps in the symbol variation effect. The effect control unit 300 adjusts the selection probability of a variable effect pattern using various light emitting lamps among a plurality of variable effect patterns according to the setting received from the player in the third setting item 953 .

The pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment performs various effects using the upper accessories 5, the effect lever 161L and various light emitting lamps so that the player can enjoy the game. On the other hand, as described above, the pachinko game machine 100 calls the player's attention to the components related to the performance, such as the contact attention seal 71, the operation attention seal 72, and the light attention seal 75. . In order to call the player's attention in this way, it is preferable to be able to adjust the operation related to the attention calling of the component which is the target of the attention calling. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, it is possible to set the operation of the constituent parts to be alerted.

Various effects of the pachinko gaming machine 100 have been described above, but it is possible to apply or combine all or part of the described contents to other effects, controls, etc., even if there is no particular mention. In addition, although various embodiments and modifications have been mentioned, it is possible to apply or combine the contents of these embodiments and modifications to other effects, etc., even if they are not mentioned in this document. . In addition, it is possible to combine various embodiments and modifications with each other, and to replace some of them, even if there is no mention in this document. For example, various seals, components related to seals, and various effects in the first embodiment can be applied to the second embodiment. Conversely, various seals, components related to the seals, and various presentations in the second embodiment can be applied to the first embodiment.

41 ... Alert sticker (an example of alerting means)
61 ... Decorative design (an example of production design)
100 Pachinko game machine (an example of a game machine)
151... Handle (an example of the third operating means)
161B...Production button (an example of the second operating means)
161L...Production lever (an example of the first operation means)
300 ... Production control unit (an example of production control means)

Claims (1)

a first operating means operable by a player;
a second operating means operable by a player and different from the first operating means;
an alerting means for alerting the player to the second operation means;
A production control means capable of executing a variable production accompanied by a variable display of a specific pattern,
The production control means is
It is possible to execute an operation presentation prompting the operation of the second operation means,
under a predetermined condition, the variable performance using the first operating means is easier to execute than the variable performance using the second operating means;
When executing the operation effect, a specific image including a predetermined image simulating at least part of the second operation means can be displayed according to the first mode and then displayed according to the second mode,
The form of the predetermined image includes a first form and a second form different from the first form,
a specific background image can be displayed when the specific image is displayed;
The specific pattern can be displayed superimposed on the specific background image,
The attention-calling means has an attention-calling character calling attention to an action performed by the second operation means based on the operation effect,
When displaying the specific image in the first mode, the predetermined image can be displayed in the first mode and then displayed in the second mode,
A gaming machine capable of displaying the predetermined image in the second mode when displaying the specific image in the second mode .

Images